手册打印视图仅一个领域：

手册

宇宙图集

平台的每项功能集中一处——它是什么、面向谁、用途以及如何使用。附操作路径、截图和可直接试用的二维码。

截至 16.10.2026

1. Learning
2. Teaching
3. Exams & Credentials
4. Studies & Administration
5. Course Workshop & Avatars
6. Stage
7. Community & collaboration
8. People Development
9. Operations & Administration (Control)
10. Apps
1. Mobile in the browser
2. Add to home screen
11. Technology & Security
12. Suite & Academy
13. Talents

第 1 章

Learning

Everything learners experience in a course: the course player with a speaking avatar, the learning tools next to it, the learning modes, your own mastery and the competence diagnosis, which checks whether you can apply what you have learned.

Course player

学生教师

The place where a course runs: slide, speaking avatar, subtitles, learning tools and questions to the presenter — on one surface.

用途#

A course should feel like a good lecture in which you may ask questions at any time. The player carries slides and presentation, remembers your progress and lets learners learn at their own pace and in their own language.

使用方法#

操作路径DashboardMy coursesOpen course

1Open a course in the dashboard under “My courses” — or go straight into the trial course without an account via “Try it now”.
2Start the presentation with the round play button on the left; the avatar speaks the narration of the slide (图 1).
图 1 The presenter in a circle; below it playback, skip buttons of ten seconds, language choice, speed and “Give me an example”.
图 1 The presenter in a circle; below it playback, skip buttons of ten seconds, language choice, speed and “Give me an example”.
3Move from slide to slide with “Next →” and “← Back” in the bar at the bottom; the line at the top shows module, slide and the remaining time (图 2).
图 2 The bar below the slide: Back, “Ask …” (speak or type), “Ask me”, “Someone asks a question”, Learning mode and Next.
图 2 The bar below the slide: Back, “Ask …” (speak or type), “Ask me”, “Someone asks a question”, Learning mode and Next.
4Ask a question: choose “Ask …” at the bottom and speak (microphone) or type (speech bubble) — the avatar answers with reference to the slide.
5Open learning tools above the slide: flashcards, pocket quiz, mind map, podcast, tutor chat (图 3).
图 3 The head of the player: module, slide and remaining time, the course title, the toolbar with the five learning tools, the learning path and the note tools.
图 3 The head of the player: module, slide and remaining time, the course title, the toolbar with the five learning tools, the learning path and the note tools.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The learning tools, the tutor chat, the learning modes and the role play can each be switched per tenant (see the respective entries).
Every learner chooses the language of the presentation themselves; which languages exist as finished video is set by the author in the workshop.

The screen at a glance#

Top left: module, slide and remaining time (“Module 1 · Slide 13 / 74 · approx. 680 min left”), plus “Hide avatar”, “Focus” and full screen.
Top centre: the course title and below it the toolbar (flashcards, pocket quiz, mind map, podcast, tutor chat).
Below that the learning path: every module as a dot up to the goal — one click jumps to the module.
Below that the note tools: sticky note, highlight, snippet, notepad.
Top right: “Live co-learning” and “Invite”.
Left: the avatar in a circle, below it playback, skip buttons of ten seconds, language choice, speed (continuous) and “Give me an example”.
Centre: the slide. Above it a short notice that presenter and voice-over are AI-generated and the content has been checked by experts — with “What exactly?” for the details.
Bottom: Back, “Ask …” (speak or type), “Ask me”, “Someone asks a question”, “Follow-up questions”, “Learning mode” and Next.

Asking questions and being asked#

The avatar is not a film that simply runs: with “Ask …” you ask a question by voice or text, and the answer refers to the current slide and the course. Answers pass through a verification chain that holds statements against sources; whatever cannot be supported is marked as such.

“Ask me” reverses the direction: the avatar asks a comprehension question. “Someone asks a question” lets a fellow learner ask a typical question, as it would come up in a lecture hall. “Follow-up questions” controls whether the avatar probes further when answers are unclear.

If a running answer is interrupted, the avatar finishes the sentence, pauses briefly and then continues — nobody is cut off mid-word.

Labelled as AI-generated#

Presenter and voice-over are AI-generated; this is visible above every slide. “What exactly?” explains what is generated and what has been checked by people. This follows the transparency obligation of the European AI Act (Art. 50).

On phone and tablet#

On small screens the slide runs from edge to edge. It can be moved and enlarged with a finger; the handle always stays in view, and a back button restores the starting position. Subtitles can be switched on at the speaker bubble.

When the quota runs low#

Avatar minutes and conversations are counted. At 80 and 95 percent of the quota there is a notice; at 100 percent the dialogue ends with a friendly closing message instead of an abrupt cut-off. Slides and learning tools remain available.

提示#

Focus mode hides all controls. There are three ways back: via the narrow strip at the edge, by moving the mouse pointer or with Esc.
The font size of the slide can be changed at the top right of the slide with “A” and “A” — handy on small screens.
“Give me an example” below the avatar provides a vivid example for exactly this slide.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fdashboard

Switching learning modes

学生

A menu in the player in which learners choose the didactics: be asked Socratic questions, explain back, see an example or practise.

用途#

People learn differently. Those who only listen forget faster than those who have to explain. The learning mode makes the four ways that are built into the player anyway findable in one place.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseBottom barLearning mode

1In the course, click “Learning mode” at the bottom right.
2Choose a way: “Ask me (Socratic)”, “Explain it back to me (Feynman)”, “Show me an example” or “Interactive exercise” (图 1).
图 1 The open menu “Learning mode” with the four ways of learning and one sentence of explanation each.
图 1 The open menu “Learning mode” with the four ways of learning and one sentence of explanation each.
3When explaining back, answer in your own words — you get feedback on what is missing (图 2).
图 2 “Explain it back to me”: the field for your own explanation, by microphone or typed, with “Evaluate”.
图 2 “Explain it back to me”: the field for your own explanation, by microphone or typed, with “Evaluate”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Lernplattform（始终包含）

The four ways#

Ask me (Socratic) — the presenter asks a question about the slide; if the answer is narrowly wrong, “Close, but not quite” comes with the correct solution.
Explain it back to me (Feynman) — explain in your own words, by microphone or typed, then “Evaluate”.
Show me an example — a vivid example for exactly this slide; with “Next” a different perspective on the same content.
Interactive exercise — only on slides for which the author has created an exercise.

What the evaluation of explaining back shows#

Understanding in percent.
“You explained that well” — what is covered.
“You could still add this” — what is missing.
“Small stumbling block” — a misconception, if one was noticed.

Every explanation with its feedback then appears in the learning progress under “Explain it back to me — history”. The evaluation politely rejects explanations that are too short.

提示#

The interactive exercise only exists on slides for which the author has created an exercise — otherwise the item is greyed out with a reason.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fdashboard

Sticky note, highlight, snippet, notepad

学生

Your own notes right on the course: sticky notes on the slide, highlights, image snippets and a notepad that runs alongside.

用途#

Whoever writes while learning remembers more. The notes stay attached to the slide on which they were made and are there again on the next visit.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseNote tools below the learning path

1In the course, below the learning path, choose one of the tools: sticky note, highlight, snippet or notepad (图 1).
图 1 The note tools below the learning path: sticky note, highlight, snippet, notepad and the collected snippets.
图 1 The note tools below the learning path: sticky note, highlight, snippet, notepad and the collected snippets.
2Sticky note: click on the slide and write. Highlight: drag across the slide. Snippet: drag out an area and save it.
3Delete via the bin on the respective element — this also works while a tool is active.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The four tools in detail#

Sticky note — place it on the slide, write, shrink or delete it.
Highlight — choose a colour, then drag; several highlights per slide are possible.
Snippet — frame an area of the slide; it is saved as an image and lands in the “Snippets” tray, where it can be enlarged.
Notepad — notes on the whole course; “Current slide” inserts a reference to the slide, “Clear” empties the pad.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fdashboard

Flashcards

学生

Cards with question and answer, generated from what the course is currently covering.

用途#

Repetition is the most effective form of learning. The cards are created from the course material without anyone having to write them.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseToolbarFlashcards

1In the course, click “Flashcards” at the top.
2Choose the scope (“Up to here”, “Current module”, “All modules”), number of cards and difficulty (easy, medium, hard, mixed) and “Start card game” (图 1).
图 1 The “Flashcards” window before the start: scope, number of cards and difficulty.
图 1 The “Flashcards” window before the start: scope, number of cards and difficulty.
3Before turning the card, state how confident you are; then turn it and choose “Knew it” or “Didn't know it” (图 2).
图 2 A flashcard with a question, the slider “How sure are you?” and the buttons for turning it.
图 2 A flashcard with a question, the slider “How sure are you?” and the buttons for turning it.
4At the end you see points, level and a calibration report; the cards can be taken away as a PDF or presentation file.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Lernwerkzeuge

Points, levels and calibration#

The cards are a card game: the harder the card, the more points. The points determine a level — from beginner via advanced and very good up to expert.

The calibration report compares how confident you were with how often you were right. Three results: “A little overconfident” (where you were sure, you were wrong more often), “You underestimate yourself” or “Well calibrated”. A statement needs a few cards.

To your phone#

“To your phone” shows a QR code: scanned with the phone, the card game continues there. The code is valid for 14 days; alternatively “Copy link”.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fdashboard

Pocket quiz

学生

A short multiple-choice quiz in the player to check whether the material has sunk in.

用途#

A quick self-check in between — without a grade, without a record in the exam file.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseToolbarPocket quiz

1In the course, open “Pocket quiz” at the top.
2Choose the scope, number of questions and difficulty and “Start quiz” (图 1).
图 1 The pocket quiz before the start: scope, number of questions and difficulty.
图 1 The pocket quiz before the start: scope, number of questions and difficulty.
3For each question, state how confident you are and answer; every answer is resolved and explained immediately (图 2).
图 2 A quiz question with the answers and the indication of how confident you are.
图 2 A quiz question with the answers and the indication of how confident you are.
4At the end: correct out of total, learning level and calibration report.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Lernwerkzeuge

Why the quiz asks about confidence#

Whoever knows what they do not know learns in a more targeted way. That is why the quiz asks “How sure are you?” before every answer and shows at the end whether confidence and hit rate match — the upper bar shows how confident, the lower one how often correct. The closer the two, the better calibrated.

The pocket quiz does not count as an exam and does not end up in the exam file.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fdashboard

Mind map

学生

A movable, connected mind map of the material — drag, zoom, tap branches for details.

用途#

See connections instead of going slide by slide: the mind map shows how the concepts of a module or the whole course relate to each other.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseToolbarMind map

1In the course, open “Mind map” at the top.
2Choose the scope: “Up to here”, “Current module” or “All modules” (图 1).
图 1 The “Mind map” window with the choice of scope and the button “Create mind map”.
图 1 The “Mind map” window with the choice of scope and the button “Create mind map”.
3“Create mind map” — then tap, drag and zoom branches (图 2).
图 2 The finished mind map: the topic in the centre, the branches with the concepts of the module, below them the buttons for taking it away.
图 2 The finished mind map: the topic in the centre, the branches with the concepts of the module, below them the buttons for taking it away.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Lernwerkzeuge

How to use it#

Dragging moves the mind map, scrolling zooms.
Tapping a branch collapses or expands it.
The scope shows beforehand how many slides the mind map covers.
Export as PDF or presentation file.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fdashboard

Podcast in the player

学生

The course material as a conversation between two voices to listen to — as a detailed podcast or as a short flashcast.

用途#

Learning on the go, during sport, on the train: the podcast sums up the material in audio form.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseToolbarPodcast

1In the course, open “Podcast” at the top.
2Choose the format: “Podcast (2 voices)” or “Flashcast (short)” with one voice; plus length and scope (图 1).
图 1 The podcast window before generating: format (two voices or flashcast), length, own sources and scope.
图 1 The podcast window before generating: format (two voices or flashcast), length, own sources and scope.
3Optionally add your own sources (up to ten PDFs).
4“Create podcast” — first the script is written, then the audio; play, pause, change speed, read the transcript (图 2). “To your phone” shows a QR code that opens the episode on the phone (图 3).
图 2 The podcast player in the course: title, speakers “Sophie & Max”, play, speed from 0.75× to 1.5× and the dialogue lines to read along.
图 2 The podcast player in the course: title, speakers “Sophie & Max”, play, speed from 0.75× to 1.5× and the dialogue lines to read along.
图 3 The same player with “To your phone” open: the QR code to scan and “Copy link”.
图 3 The same player with “To your phone” open: the QR code to scan and “Copy link”.
5Every recording also lands in “My podcasts” and can be published directly in the public feed.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Podcasts

Podcast or flashcast#

Podcast — two voices discuss the material as in a conversation.
Flashcast — one voice gets to the point briefly; the voice can be chosen.

Your own PDF sources flow into the script; the scope shows how many slides are covered.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fdashboard

Podcasts

学生教师

Your own podcast library in the dashboard and a public feed with all published episodes.

用途#

What was created as a podcast in the player should not get lost — and good episodes should be available for others to hear.

使用方法#

操作路径DashboardMy podcasts

1Open “My podcasts” in the dashboard: all your recordings are here, each one playable (图 1).
图 1 “My podcasts”: your own recordings with type, number of contributions, date, Listen and Publish.
图 1 “My podcasts”: your own recordings with type, number of contributions, date, Listen and Publish.
2Publish an episode with one click — it then appears in the public feed.
3Anyone can find the public feed under “Podcasts” without signing in.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Podcasts

What you can do in “My podcasts”#

Listen — every episode of your own with the number of contributions.
Publish — the episode appears in the public feed as the institution's own production.
Withdraw — the episode disappears from the feed again.
Delete.

Tutor chat

学生

A written tutor next to the slide that answers questions about the course — read aloud on request.

用途#

Not every question is one you want to ask out loud. The tutor chat answers it calmly, with reference to the course.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseToolbarTutor chat

1In the course, open “Tutor chat” at the top.
2Under “What shall we talk about?” choose the scope and “Start tutor chat” — the tutor first asks how you are getting on with the material and what you want to focus on (图 1).
图 1 The tutor chat before the start: “What shall we talk about?” with the choice of scope.
图 1 The tutor chat before the start: “What shall we talk about?” with the choice of scope.
3Type a question or “Speak”; read the answer or have it read aloud with “Voice on” (图 2).
图 2 The conversation with the tutor: its first question, the input field, “Speak” and “Voice on”.
图 2 The conversation with the tutor: its first question, the input field, “Speak” and “Voice on”.
4“Explain my progress to me” asks the tutor where you stand and what you should deepen.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：KI-Tutor

The learning curve#

The tutor recognises gaps in understanding during the conversation and gives tips. Next to the chat a learning curve grows — it shows how understanding develops over the course of the conversation.

提示#

The tutor sticks to the topic of the course. The AI guardrails fend off attempts to get it out of its role or to query internals.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fdashboard

Role play

学生教师

A conversation exercise with an AI figure on the slide — with an assessment at the end.

用途#

Communication is learned in conversation: a customer conversation, a negotiation, a staff appraisal. The figure plays the other side, the assessment shows what went well.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseSlide with role playStart conversation

1In the workshop the author creates a role play on a slide (role, goal, assessment criteria).
2In the course the invitation to the conversation appears on this slide.
3On the slide choose “Practise role play: …”. The window shows the conversation partner, the situation and your own goal.
4Type and send answers; at the top you see how many exchanges remain.
5“End and assess”: 0 to 3 points per criterion with a justification and an overall score in percent; “Again” starts over.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Rollenspiel

What a role play consists of#

Conversation partner — whom the AI figure plays.
Situation — the setting of the conversation.
Goal — what you yourself should achieve.
Criteria — what the assessment measures against; each with 0 to 3 points.
A limited number of exchanges — as in a real conversation.

Export from the player

学生

Download flashcards, quiz, mind map and podcast text as a PDF or presentation file — in the institution's corporate design.

用途#

Learning material to take away, print and pass on.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseToolExport

1In the respective tool (e.g. flashcards) choose export.
2Choose the format: PDF for everything, presentation file for flashcards and mind map (图 1).
图 1 A finished mind map; below it the buttons for taking it away as a PDF and as a presentation file.
图 1 A finished mind map; below it the buttons for taking it away as a PDF and as a presentation file.
3The file carries the institution's logo, colours and footer.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Lernwerkzeuge

Which tool supports which format#

Flashcards — PDF and presentation file.
Mind map — PDF and presentation file.
Pocket quiz — PDF.
Podcast — the transcript as a PDF.

Logo, colours and footer come from the tenant's corporate design.

Mastery (learning progress)

学生

An overview per course: how ready you are for the exam, how confident per knowledge area and which misconceptions are still open.

用途#

Learning needs a goal and honest feedback. Mastery shows where you stand — from the same data the avatar uses when answering.

使用方法#

操作路径DashboardLearning progress

1In the dashboard open the tab “Learning progress”.
2At the top three key figures: exam readiness, strong areas, to deepen (图 1).
图 1 The three key figures: exam readiness in percent, strong areas and areas to deepen.
图 1 The three key figures: exam readiness in percent, strong areas and areas to deepen.
3Below that, per module, the knowledge areas as bars with confidence and number of answers (图 2).
图 2 A module with its knowledge areas as bars, confidence and number of answers.
图 2 A module with its knowledge areas as bars, confidence and number of answers.
4“Open misunderstandings” and “Explain it back to me — history” show what you should still work on (图 3).
图 3 “Open misunderstandings”: what was noticed while answering and should still be clarified.
图 3 “Open misunderstandings”: what was noticed while answering and should still be clarified.
5If you are close, the page offers “To the exam”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Lernwerkzeuge

The key figures#

The bars adjust continuously: slides, quiz answers, questions and identified misconceptions all feed in — the more you ask and answer, the more precise.

Exam readiness — “Ready for the exam”, “More practice recommended” or “Still significant gaps”.
Strong areas — knowledge areas with at least 70 percent.
To deepen — areas below 40 percent.

Mastery and competence profile#

Mastery measures how confident you are with the material. If the competence diagnosis is switched on, the competence profile appears next to it — separately: what you have shown in tasks from practice. A slide that has been read never counts as a competence there.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动为您创建试用学生，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fdashboard%2Fmastery

ECTS overview

学生

Credit points, exam dates, mock exams and recognition in the dashboard.

用途#

Whoever studies wants to know how many credit points they have, what is still missing and when the next exam is due.

使用方法#

操作路径DashboardECTS

1In the dashboard open the ECTS area.
2“Book oral exam”: once you are ready for the exam you can choose a date; booking is unlocked from 60 percent mastery.
3Practise a “Mock presentation” and compare all runs under “Mock presentations — history” (图 1).
图 1 An application for recognition: submitted achievements with ECTS, level, grade and proof, below them the status of the review.
图 1 An application for recognition: submitted achievements with ECTS, level, grade and proof, below them the status of the review.
4The campus shows recognition of previously completed achievements under “Recognition & Credentials”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Prüfungen

Mock presentation and history#

Every run of a mock presentation is evaluated — among other things speaking rate in words per minute and filler words — and classified as “exam-ready”, “almost exam-ready” or “not yet exam-ready”. The history shows the runs side by side so that progress becomes visible.

Where the points are listed#

The ECTS account with the grade average (weighted by ECTS) and all assessed achievements is in the achievement archive; the final transcript is also there to view and verify.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/anerkennung

Explainer video (short clip)

学生教师

In the learning workshop, order a short explainer clip for a course module: the course figure explains the core in a few sentences, in the course voice — from the platform's own material, without an external video service.

用途#

Some things are understood faster when someone tells you. A short clip about a module complements slides and presentation — with the familiar face and voice of the course.

使用方法#

操作路径Learning workshopLearning toolsFrom a courseExplainer video

1Open “Learning workshop”, choose “Learning tools” at the top and “From a course” as the source (course and module).
2The box “Explainer clip (short)” states what a clip costs: seconds from the video credit and the compute time (图 1).
图 1 The box “Explainer clip (short)” with the remaining credit, the cost of one clip and “Order clip”.
图 1 The box “Explainer clip (short)” with the remaining credit, the cost of one clip and “Order clip”.
3“Order clip” and then “Yes, order” — only this second click orders. “Cancel” orders nothing.
4Wait until the clip is ready (usually a few minutes) and watch it.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Lernplattform（始终包含）

Default: off. The operator switches it on per tenant (feature “Explainer video”).
The video credit is a separate quota in seconds per month; one clip uses 20 seconds. When it is used up, the box says so.

How the clip is made — and its limits#

From the module's text the platform's text model writes a short script (at most about 55 words); the course figure speaks it in the course voice and the platform's own avatar renderer turns it into the video. It is stored in the platform's storage in the EU.
Only on click and after confirmation — nothing is created in the background, nothing is re-created. The compute time is recorded in the usage tracking.
Only from a course module, not from your own material in the learning workshop. The clip shows the speaking figure, not the slides.
For trying it out there is a button “Top up credits (demo)” that only simulates the credit.

Dashboard tour

学生

A guided tour on the first visit to the dashboard that shows the most important places.

用途#

The first impression decides whether someone comes back. In a few steps the tour shows where courses, progress and help are.

使用方法#

操作路径Dashboard (first visit)

1When the dashboard is opened for the first time, the tour starts on its own.
2Go through the stations with “Next” or end at any time (图 1).
图 1 A station of the tour: progress bar, explanation and “Next”.
图 1 A station of the tour: progress bar, explanation and “Next”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Lernplattform（始终包含）

Using the tour#

At the top you see which station you are at (“2 / 5”).
“Next” goes to the next station, “Let's go” ends the last one.
“Skip” ends the tour immediately; on this device it will not start on its own again afterwards.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动为您创建试用学生，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fdashboard

Interactive learning

学生

Type in a topic, the AI builds a lesson with a sequence of steps from it — and you play through it.

用途#

Not every subject is covered by a finished course. Here you learn self-directed what you need right now and keep your progress per lesson.

使用方法#

操作路径CampusStudiesLearn interactively

1In the campus open “Studies” → “Learn interactively”.
2Write a topic in the field “Explain to me …” (e.g. “How does a neural network work?”) and “Build lesson” — or tap one of the suggestions (图 1).
图 1 The field “Explain to me …” with “Build lesson” and the suggestions below it.
图 1 The field “Explain to me …” with “Build lesson” and the suggestions below it.
3Play through the lesson step by step: try things out, immediate feedback, onwards. No video, no lecture.
4“Your lessons” lists all your lessons with progress; “mastered” means: everything right the first time (图 2).
图 2 “Your lessons”: every lesson of your own with progress and the note “mastered”.
图 2 “Your lessons”: every lesson of your own with progress and the note “mastered”.
5“Show profile” analyses strengths and what you should work on and suggests next topics.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Interaktives Lernen

Streak, records and assignments#

Streak — days in a row with a completed lesson.
Mastered — lessons you solved completely correctly the first time.
Learning records — for completed lessons with number and date of issue, verifiable via a dedicated verification page.
Assigned to you — lessons that someone else has assigned. Whoever has built lessons can assign them to others by email address (with a note) and sees their progress.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动为您创建试用学生，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Finteraktiv

Fellow learner's question on the slide

学生

In the middle of the slide a voice from the group asks a question — as in a lecture hall.

用途#

Other people's questions lead to thoughts you did not have yourself and break up a long presentation.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseBottom barSomeone asks a question

1If the feature is on, a fellow learner interrupts at suitable points with a question.
2The avatar answers it, then the presentation continues.
3In the bar at the bottom “Someone asks a question” can be switched on and off (图 1).
图 1 The bar below the slide with the switch “Someone asks a question” (on or off).
图 1 The bar below the slide with the switch “Someone asks a question” (on or off).

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Interaktives Lernen

Default: off. Can be switched on per tenant.

How the question comes#

If “Someone asks a question” is on, a fellow learner now and then speaks up at the end of a slide: a hand goes up, the person is called on, asks the question, the presenter answers. The person is an AI figure — the question is typical of what would be asked at this point in a lecture hall.

Further languages

学生教师行政

The interface in fifteen languages and a language switcher for every user — plus subtitles and presentation in the chosen language.

用途#

The content speaks the learners' language, and so does the interface: German, English, French, Italian, Spanish, Polish, Swedish, Chinese, Ukrainian, Dutch, Russian, Japanese, Arabic, Hebrew and Hindi.

使用方法#

操作路径HeaderGlobeLanguage

1Click the globe at the top right.
2Choose a language — the interface switches immediately, the choice is saved (图 1).
图 1 The open language menu: all languages of the interface, each in its own script.
图 1 The open language menu: all languages of the interface, each in its own script.
3In the course choose the presentation language at the avatar (button with the language code).

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Mehrsprachigkeit

Off: only the institution's language, no switcher.

Three levels of language#

Interface — menus, buttons and notices; the choice applies to the whole account.
Presentation — the language in which the avatar speaks; selectable per course at the avatar, as far as the author has released the language.
Subtitles — can be switched on at the speaker bubble.

Lecturers can define course texts in their language themselves; this manual work takes precedence over machine translation.

提示#

Arabic and Hebrew run from right to left; the interface is then mirrored.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo

Learning workshop

学生教师

Generate study material from a course or your own material: study guide, flashcards, quiz, mind map, infographic, podcast, study plan and more.

用途#

A script, lecture notes, a specialist article — the learning workshop turns them into material for practising without anyone having to build it by hand.

使用方法#

操作路径Learning workshopLearning tools

1Open “Learning workshop” and choose “Learning tools” at the top.
2Choose a source: “From a course” (select course and module) or “Own material” (upload a file or paste text).
3Choose a tile: study guide, flashcards, quiz, mind map, infographic, podcast, study plan, exam simulation, common mistakes, comparison table or practice transfer (图 1).
图 1 The eleven learning formats as tiles — from the study guide to the practice transfer, each with one sentence of explanation.
图 1 The eleven learning formats as tiles — from the study guide to the practice transfer, each with one sentence of explanation.
4View the result, practise or download it (图 2).
图 2 A finished result: flashcards from the chosen module, with download.
图 2 A finished result: flashcards from the chosen module, with download.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：LernWerkstatt

Usage (text models, speech output, images) is booked to the workshop credit.

The eleven learning formats#

Study guide — the material as a structured learning summary.
Flashcards
Quiz
Mind map
Infographic
Podcast — as a conversation to listen to.
Study plan — repetitions spread over several days.
Exam simulation
Common mistakes — typical stumbling blocks of the topic.
Comparison table
Practice transfer — how to apply what you have learned.

Generated results can be saved and opened again later.

提示#

The study plan spreads the repetitions over several days — so that you repeat shortly before forgetting.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动创建试用账号，一天后自动删除，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fwerkstatt

Competence diagnosis (competence check)

学生教师

What can the learner already do, what is this assessment based on, what is still missing — and how does the course help in a targeted way? With tasks from practice, evidence per criterion and reassessment.

用途#

Slides that have been read are not competence. The diagnosis checks in conversation whether someone can also apply knowledge, finds the specific gap, suggests a targeted learning step and then checks again with a new task.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseCourse overviewYour competences

1Open the course overview. If the competence check is switched on for the course, the invitation “What can you already do? Let's find out together where you stand.” appears at the top — “Start check” or “Skip”.
2Below it, under “Your competences”, three tiles: “My competence check”, “My competence profile” and “My next learning step”.
3In the check: for each competence (“Competence 1 of 5”) first a comprehension question, a follow-up question if needed, then a task from practice. Type answers or “Speak answer”, check the transcript and “Submit answer”.
4After every answer: “That was good” and “You can work on this”. At the end “Check completed” and the route “To the competence profile”.
5In the profile read, for each competence, the level, the justification, what is still missing and the learning need per criterion; “Continue learning” or “Reassess”.
6“My next learning step” takes you with one click to the right place in the course — afterwards “Reassess” with a new task.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Kompetenzcheck

Per tenant via the feature “Competence check (CIE)” (default off) or the bookable module “Competence check” — and additionally switchable per course.
Introduced as a project-based extension: the competences of a course (learning outcome, rubric, tasks) are set up together with the customer and approved by those responsible for the course — only then is there something to check. This does not mean immediate across-the-board availability for every course; for the pilot course “AI competence” five competences are ready.
Off means unchanged: no tiles, the competence pages answer with “not found”, player and learning progress stay as before.
The assessment uses the same text model that the tenant has enabled for the workshop; every call is booked in the usage.

What a competence is here#

A competence is an observable ability — not a chapter and not a lesson that has been read. Not “knows the risks of generative AI”, but “can identify relevant risks in a specific business application, justify their impact and select appropriate countermeasures”.

Every competence has a learning outcome (“What this means in concrete terms”), an expected level, assigned course content, suitable tasks and an assessment rubric with criteria. Definition and rubric carry a version.

Level 1 — Understanding
Level 2 — Applying
Level 3 — Analysing and deciding
Level 4 — Independent problem solving

The levels are an internal didactic order, not qualification levels. Consumed content never makes a competence “proven”.

The competence check step by step#

Header: the badge of the mode, “Competence n of m”, the current competence and the figure of the course. “Read question aloud” speaks the question with the course voice.
Comprehension question — a short starting question.
Follow-up question — adaptive: it builds on your own answer and targets the weakest criterion. It never counts as evidence of its own.
Task from practice — a case study, a decision with justification, an error analysis, a transfer to a changed situation or an open problem. At least one per competence.
Speak answer: the transcript appears in the field with the note to check and correct it before submitting. Without a microphone you type.
“Pause” and later “Resume”: the check picks up again at the task that was set.
An answer that cannot be evaluated “does not count against you”.

Learning mode and assessment mode#

The check starts in assessment mode: the answer is assessed; help is only available for understanding the question (“Question about the task”), not for the solution.

“Switch to learning mode” allows explanations, tips and examples. The current task then counts as practice, not as evidence — even if you switch “Back to assessment mode” afterwards.

The mode is always visible as a badge above the task. The switch is logged.

How assessment works#

0 to 3 points per criterion: 0 not met or serious error, 1 partially, 2 largely, 3 completely — each criterion with a justification, not by overall impression.
The rubric is fixed before answering and is never adjusted afterwards.
High scores need a verbatim quote from the answer; without it the score is reduced to 1 — visibly.
“Demonstrated” needs at least two independent pieces of evidence that were met, one of them from practice.
If pieces of evidence of the same kind clearly contradict each other, nothing is averaged: the level is “Still unclear”, and a further task clarifies it.
Eloquence, length, self-description or the model's confidence are not evidence.

The level of a competence#

Not assessed — no answers yet. That is never a gap.
Learning need identified — for example “Something essential was still missing in the practice task.”
Developing — partially shown, or proof is still missing.
Demonstrated — “Shown in several independent tasks, including in practice.”
Still unclear — contradictory evidence.

If a piece of evidence is waiting for review by a teacher, this is indicated. Percentages are deliberately not given — no spurious precision.

My competence profile#

For each competence: name, level, a short justification, “What this means in concrete terms”, “Still missing” (e.g. a practice task, further proof, a clarifying task, review by a teacher) and the learning need per criterion with the justification of the assessment.

“Download evidence (JSON)” gives a structured, verifiable file of your own evidence — not a certificate.

In the dashboard's learning progress the competence profile appears as a separate section next to mastery.

My next learning step#

Three blocks: “This is what you can already do.”, “This is where you still need to learn.”, “This is what we recommend next.” A click on “Start now” opens the course at the right slide with the right method; above the slide it then says what is being practised specifically. “Or rather:” offers alternatives.

The recommendation only comes when there is a reason — not automatically after every module. Competences already demonstrated are not taught again.

Basics missing → view slide, view explanation or example
Misconception → Ask me (Socratic) focused on the gap, otherwise explanation or slide
Application uncertain → view example, then guided exercise
Justification weak → Explain it back to me or Socratic
Problem solving missing → guided exercise (multi-step decision)
Unclear evidence → do not teach, reassess instead

Reassess#

After a learning step, “Afterwards: reassess” leads to a new, equivalent task for the same competence in a different context — never to the same task. The level results only from the new evidence; progress is only shown when it is supported. Original performance, learning step and new evidence are compared and recorded.

For those responsible for courses: maintaining competences#

Workshop course: in the phase “Content” the tab “Competences” (only when the feature is switched on). At the top the switch “Competence check in this course”.
“Suggest competences from the slides” — the suggestions appear with the status “Suggestion” and the origin “AI suggestion”.
For each competence: criteria of the rubric (type: knowledge, application, justification, analysis, problem solving; key criteria marked), assigned content (a missing slide is marked) and sample tasks.
“Edit rubric” → “Save as new version”: the changed rubric needs a new approval; previous assessments remain unchanged.
“Approve” makes a competence effective, “Withdraw” takes it out.
Lecturers switch file courses in the lecturer area under “Competences”; the review list of disputed assessments is there too.

Limits — honestly#

A tool for individual learning support. It claims no diagnostic validity: rubric points are not measurements, the level is a comprehensible assessment from evidence, not a certificate.
No certificate, no QR verification, no ranking, no use for personnel decisions, no passing on to superiors. The competency matrix of people development is deliberately not connected.
The assessment per criterion is made by a language model. The form is safeguarded (exactly the criteria, 0–3, quote, repetition on errors, “not assessable” instead of guessing); wrong judgements on content within a valid form are possible — hence two pieces of evidence, review list and correction with a log.
Very short, correct answers can be scored lower because of the quote rule; this is shown visibly.
Attempts to give the assessment instructions are detected by a narrow pattern recognition (German and English) plus the model; they only lead to review by a person, never to penalty points.
The content of the pilot course is German; answers in other languages are assessed.
A draft in the answer field is not saved — only submitted answers.
The invitation speaks of a few minutes; a check across all five competences of the pilot rather takes 15 to 25 minutes.
Accounts without an institution get no competence check — all data hangs on a tenant. Several runs of the same course share the competence level.

The pilot course “AI competence”#

For each competence there is at least one comprehension task and one independent application task. The pilot is a small course of its own; existing courses remain unchanged.

Basic understanding of generative AI
Assessing AI-generated information
Safe use at work
Selecting suitable use cases
Critical review of AI-supported decisions

提示#

No permanently visible buttons are added to the player. The competence diagnosis lives on the course overview; only a learning step leads into the player.
AI may suggest competences from the slides; they only take effect after approval by those responsible for the course.
A single competence can be checked specifically — from the profile with “Check now” or “Reassess”.
Thresholds and the number of required pieces of evidence are stored as versioned defaults (every piece of evidence names the version it was assessed by); deviations for an institution are set in the introduction project.

Competence block and “My competence profile”

学生教师行政

A learning format in the course that practises acting instead of testing knowledge: a real case, your own decision, a role play or slider scenario, instant feedback against a competence grid, reflection and a task for everyday work. Every level is evidenced and appears in the competence profile.

用途#

Competence shows in action. The block puts learners into a real situation, gives instant, reasoned feedback on observable behaviour and makes development visible — for the person and, only in groups of five or more, for teachers and people development.

使用方法#

1In the workshop, on a slide, “Add competence block”: title, situation (a real case; the avatar speaks the slide as usual), type of action, reflection question and transfer task with a reminder after X days.
2Act: decision with reasoning, role play with the avatar by text, or slider scenario with the sliders of the slide.
3Competence grid: four levels with observable behavioural anchors. “AI: suggest grid” provides a draft for the situation and type of action (the course material is background); the levels build on each other; the author edits and approves it. Only then do learners see the block.
4In the player the block starts with the button below the slide and guides through six steps: situation, act, feedback, reflect, transfer, evidence.
5The feedback comes instantly, is labelled as AI feedback and shows for each anchor whether it was met, with the verbatim passage from your own answer.
6“My competence profile” shows the level of the most recent evidence per competence, the history, the next step, open and completed transfer tasks and all evidence.
7“Group competences” shows teachers and people development the distribution per competence, the development over the months and where it gets stuck — counts only, from the minimum group size.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kompetenzcheck

Switchable per tenant, on by default; part of the module “Competence check”.
The minimum group size of the group view is the same as in competence continuity, never below 5.
If the grid is linked to a competence of the competence check, evidence from level 3 appears there as application evidence and flows into the competence passport.

How the level is determined#

The model only assesses the anchors: met or not, with reasoning and a verbatim passage. The platform calculates the level: level n is reached if all levels below are reached and at least half of the anchors of level n are evidenced.

A claimed anchor without a verbatim passage is not counted and is shown as such.

Who sees what#

The person: all of their own evidence, feedback, reflections and transfer tasks.
Teachers and people development: only counts across groups from the minimum group size; smaller cells are shown as “under 5”. No individual, no answer.

提示#

There is no level without evidence: an anchor only counts if the answer shows the behaviour verbatim. If level 1 is not evidenced, no evidence record is created.
The level of the most recent evidence is shown, not the best — that keeps the profile honest.
Reflection and transfer feedback are visible only to the person; they do not affect the level.

第 2 章

Teaching

The workplace of lecturers: cohorts, papers and reviews, office hours and the academic guideline against which work is checked.

Lecturer area

教师

The lecturers' home page: lead classes, maintain course texts in every language, set exams, assess papers, grade projects, maintain your profile.

用途#

Build a course, set an exam, assess — and lead your own classes without opening five different systems.

使用方法#

操作路径LecturerLecturers' home page

1Sign in as a lecturer and open “Lecturer”; the home page greets you with “Welcome, …”.
2Choose one of the tiles: “Classes”, “Course texts in your language”, “Learning workshop”, “Exam creation” or “Submitted papers” (图 1).
图 1 The tiles of the home page: Classes, Course texts in your language, Learning workshop, Exam creation and Submitted papers.
图 1 The tiles of the home page: Classes, Course texts in your language, Learning workshop, Exam creation and Submitted papers.
3If the competence check is switched on for the institution, the tile “Competences” is added.
4Use the bar at the top to switch to “Profile & topics”, “Projects & assessment”, “Office hours” and “Fees”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Dozentenbereich

Off: the whole lecturer area is missing — including the office hours that sit below it.
The bar additionally shows “Studio” if the course workshop is switched on for the institution.

The tiles of the home page#

Classes — create classes, invite students, see progress.
Course texts in your language — word slides, quiz and exam questions yourself, in every language offered.
Learning workshop — build a course from your own material (slides, narration, quiz).
Exam creation — create multiple-choice questions, a written exam or paper topics.
Submitted papers — read and assess students' submissions, maintain your own sources.
Competences — switch the competence check per course, review disputed assessments (only when switched on).

Previously the workshop, exam creation and papers were reachable for lecturers but linked nowhere. The tiles make them findable — a feature you cannot find does not exist.

The bar in the lecturer area#

Whoever comes via the campus demo sees the campus navigation instead; the pages behind it are the same.

Profile & topics
Projects & assessment
Office hours
Fees
Studio (if the workshop is switched on)

提示#

Whoever owns a course in the workshop also gets into class management without the lecturer role — so every author can lead a cohort on their own course.
Every page of the area checks the permission again itself; a link typed in directly does not get you in without the lecturer role.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fdozent

Classes (cohorts)

教师

A class bundles students on a course: invite by email, manage open invitations, see progress per person.

用途#

Lecturers want to know who is in their course and how far they have got — without typing up lists and without writing to everyone individually.

使用方法#

操作路径LecturerClassesNew class

1In the lecturer area open the tile “Classes” (图 1).
图 1 The lecturer's classes as cards: name, course, institution and number of students.
图 1 The lecturer's classes as cards: name, course, institution and number of students.
2Choose “New class”: enter a name (e.g. “Business Administration Semester 2026-S1”), course and optionally university or institute, then create it.
3Open the class and, on the left under “Invite”, paste email addresses — separated by comma, space or line break — and “Send invitations” (图 2).
图 2 “Invite” in a class: the field for email addresses and “Send invitations”, below it the open invitations.
图 2 “Invite” in a class: the field for email addresses and “Send invitations”, below it the open invitations.
4Under “Open invitations” you can copy the invitation link or revoke the invitation for each address.
5On the right are the students of the class with progress bars (completed modules out of all) and the status “Active” or “Completed” (图 3).
图 3 The students of a class with progress bars and the status “Active” or “Completed”.
图 3 The students of a class with progress bars and the status “Active” or “Completed”.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

What the list shows#

Header: name of the class, course, university and the number of students.
Per person: name or email address, progress bar “n/m” modules, status “Active” or “Completed”.
Open invitations: address, copy link, revoke.

提示#

If there is no assignable course yet, the page says so: first create a course in the workshop or have an Academy course enabled.
Invited people appear in the list as soon as they have created their account — before that they are listed under “Open invitations”.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fdozent%2Fcohorts

Course texts in your own language

教师行政

Word a course's slide texts, quiz questions and exam questions yourself — in the language in which you teach. Manual work takes precedence over machine translation.

用途#

Machine translation does not always get specialist language right. Whoever teaches in a language should be able to define their texts there themselves — and they should not disappear again with the next translation round.

使用方法#

操作路径LecturerCourse texts in your language

1In the lecturer area open “Course texts in your language”.
2Choose a course at the top; the courses of your own institution appear, including the published courses from the workshop.
3Choose the area: “Slides”, “Quiz questions” or “Exam questions”. For courses from the workshop only the slides are available here.
4For slides and quiz questions choose a module; exam questions apply to the whole course.
5Choose the language, edit the texts and save (图 1).
图 1 On the left the texts of the chosen area, on the right the chosen text in the target language for editing and saving.
图 1 On the left the texts of the chosen area, on the right the chosen text in the target language for editing and saving.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

When nothing appears#

“No final exam is stored for this course.” — there is no question pool for the exam.
“No quiz is stored for this module.” — the module has no quiz questions.
“This module has no slides with text.” — for example pure image slides.

提示#

What is entered here applies — even after the next round of machine translation. The other languages are updated in the background without overwriting other lecturers' manual work.
The surface is reserved for lecturers and the administration: whoever can write course text can also write exam questions.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fdozent%2Ftexte

Projects & assessment

教师

Assess project submissions of portfolio modules with a percentage and a comment — the overall grade is recalculated on saving.

用途#

In portfolio modules the project makes up half of the grade. The assessment belongs in a place where the overall grade is right immediately.

使用方法#

操作路径LecturerProjects & assessment

1In the lecturer area open “Projects & assessment” in the bar.
2For each submission view the file and enter a percentage and a comment.
3Save: the participant's overall grade is recalculated automatically.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

How the portfolio grade is formed#

A portfolio module is not assessed by a written exam but by several parts. The project submission is one of them and counts for half. When a project assessment is saved, the platform recalculates the participant's overall grade — nobody has to enter it by hand.

提示#

The project counts for 50 percent of the portfolio grade; participants see the gradebook and the discussion on the course page under “Achievements & participation”.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fdozent%2Fprojects

Profile & topics for theses

教师学生

Your own lecturer profile with title, CV, publications and office hours — and advertised topics for theses.

用途#

Students look for supervision for their theses. A well-maintained profile with open topics saves circular emails and shows who can be approached for what.

使用方法#

操作路径LecturerProfile & topics

1In the lecturer area open “Profile & topics” in the bar.
2Fill in title, website, “About me”, publications (one per line), office hours (e.g. “Tue 2–4 pm, by appointment”) and “Available for” (图 1).
图 1 The lecturer's profile: title, website, “About me”, publications, office hours and “Available for”.
图 1 The lecturer's profile: title, website, “About me”, publications, office hours and “Available for”.
3Tick “Visible in the lecturer directory” if the profile should be listed publicly in the directory, and “Save profile”.
4Under “Topics for theses” advertise a topic with an optional short description; students see open topics in the directory (图 2).
图 2 Advertised topics for theses with type and short description.
图 2 Advertised topics for theses with type and short description.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The fields of the profile#

Title (e.g. “Prof. Dr.”) and website.
About me.
Publications — one per line.
Office hours — as text, e.g. “Tue 2–4 pm, by appointment”; bookable slots come from “Office hours”.
Available for — what you can be approached for as a supervisor.
Visible in the lecturer directory — yes or no.

提示#

An advertised topic can be deleted again at any time; only visible profiles appear in the directory.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fdozent%2Fprofil

Office hours

教师学生

Lecturers release slots, students book them themselves — and both see their bookings in one place.

用途#

No email ping-pong over an appointment: free slots are listed, one click books.

使用方法#

操作路径DashboardOffice hour

1Lecturers: in the lecturer area open “Office hours”, enter date and time, duration in minutes and location (default “Online (video call)”) and “Release slot”.
2Released slots are listed below as “open” or with the name and note of the person who booked; a slot can be deleted (图 1).
图 1 A lecturer's released slots — open or with name and note of the person who booked.
图 1 A lecturer's released slots — open or with name and note of the person who booked.
3Students: in the dashboard open “Office hour”; under “Free slots” every slot is listed with lecturer, duration and location (图 2).
图 2 “Free slots” from the students' point of view: lecturer, time, duration, location and “Book”.
图 2 “Free slots” from the students' point of view: lecturer, time, duration, location and “Book”.
4Optionally state what it is about and “Book”.
5“My appointments” lists your own bookings; “Cancel” releases the slot again.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Dozentenbereich

What a slot carries#

Start (date and time)
Duration in minutes
Location — freely selectable, default “Online (video call)”
after booking: who booked and the optional note

提示#

Only the lecturer sees the note made when booking (“What is it about?”) — so they can prepare.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/termine

Checking and reviewing papers

教师

Upload a paper, have quotations and sources checked and receive a review with a grade proposal — the grade is set by a person.

用途#

Checking seminar papers, term papers and theses takes time. The platform takes over what can be checked mechanically and justifies every objection with a rule number from the guideline.

使用方法#

操作路径Check papersOpen paperCheck now

1Open the page “Check papers” (address /dozent/arbeiten) and upload a paper: title, author identifier, type (seminar paper, term paper, bachelor's thesis, master's thesis, other), date the topic was issued, assessment round, length according to the module description, deviating supervision agreement, file.
2“Upload and read” — the paper then appears in the list as “read, not yet checked” (图 1).
图 1 “Recently submitted”: the uploaded papers with type, author identifier and status of the check.
图 1 “Recently submitted”: the uploaded papers with type, author identifier and status of the check.
3Open the paper and choose “Check now” (optionally with “Check quotations (takes time)”) — this takes up to two minutes.
4In the review folder read every finding with its rule number and location and choose “Accept” or “Discard” (图 2).
图 2 The review folder: every finding with rule number, location, “Accept” and “Discard”.
图 2 The review folder: every finding with rule number, location, “Accept” and “Discard”.
5Under “Assessment” read the machine proposal, choose the grade yourself and “Set grade”; before that the paper can be “submitted to the author for comment” (图 3).
图 3 “Assessment”: the machine proposal, the examiner's choice of grade and “Set grade”.
图 3 “Assessment”: the machine proposal, the examiner's choice of grade and “Set grade”.
6“Download complete file” — paper, findings, log and the wording of every cited rule in one file.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Why the details at upload matter#

Topic issued on — determines which version of the guideline applies (rule 1.2).
Assessment round — all papers of a round are checked with the same checking tools (rule 1.3). A new round can be created directly.
Length according to the module description (words) — without a target there is no length finding (rule 2.4).
Deviating supervision agreement — if the text names a rule number, the objection to it is dropped (rule 1.1).

The states of a paper#

read, not yet checked
checked, findings open
submitted to the author
graded — the list then shows “Grade x.x”

What the review folder contains#

Findings with rule, location, objection and source; for each finding the examiner decides “Accept” or “Discard”. Below that “Discarded by the machine”: observations that the check itself dropped because they did not meet the requirements of a rule — they are listed there so that nobody has to claim the system saw nothing.

Plus the check log and a section “What was not assessed by machine”. The examiner's justification is a separate field.

提示#

The grade proposal and the grade are in separate fields; there is deliberately no “Accept proposal” button. A person has to decide (Art. 22 GDPR).
There is no AI score for cheating — detectors provide no proof.
An image PDF without a text layer is rejected; PDFs with a text layer, DOCX and text are accepted.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fdozent%2Farbeiten

Academic guideline

学生教师行政

The rules for academic work against which papers are checked — each with a number and legal basis, public and as a PDF.

用途#

Whoever is assessed should know beforehand by what criteria. Every objection in the review cites a rule from this guideline; a university can store its own set of rules.

使用方法#

操作路径Guideline

1Open “Guideline” — without signing in.
2At the top is the classification of the checking tool (role, risk class under the AI Act, scope) (图 1).
图 1 The classification of the checking tool: role, risk class under the AI Act and scope.
图 1 The classification of the checking tool: role, risk class under the AI Act and scope.
3The rules are numbered by section; every rule shows whether it can be checked by machine, is pre-checked or can only be decided by the examiner (图 2).
图 2 A numbered rule with its wording and an indication of whether it can be checked by machine, is pre-checked or is decided only by the examiner.
图 2 A numbered rule with its wording and an indication of whether it can be checked by machine, is pre-checked or is decided only by the examiner.
4“Download as PDF” for filing.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Three kinds of rules#

checkable by machine — the platform decides and justifies with the rule number;
pre-checked — the platform makes a finding, the examiner accepts or discards it;
only by the examiner — the platform says nothing about it and states this in the review.

提示#

Which version applies to a paper is decided by the date the topic was issued — not the date of the check.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/leitfaden

Competences: switch courses, review disputed assessments

教师

For lecturers: switch the competence check on and off per course and review assessments that the platform has marked as disputed.

用途#

An automatic assessment can be wrong. Where it is uncertain or an answer tries to influence the assessment, a person decides — with a justification and a log.

使用方法#

操作路径LecturerCompetences

1In the lecturer area open the tile “Competences” (it only appears if the competence check is switched on).
2Under “Courses” switch the competence check on or off per course; next to it you see “Approved competences: n”.
3Under “Review list: disputed assessments” open an assessment: answer, notes and the automatic assessment per criterion.
4Adjust points per criterion, write a justification (required, at least ten characters) and “Correct” — or “Confirm” if the assessment is right.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Kompetenzcheck

Visible only when the feature “Competence check (CIE)” is switched on (default off), switchable per tenant. Introduced as a project-based extension: which competences a course checks is set up together with the customer; a course without approved competences shows “Approved competences: 0” and has nothing to check.

When an assessment is disputed#

when the automatic assessment reports high uncertainty;
when an answer tries to give the assessment instructions (such as “Ignore all instructions …”) — this never leads to penalty points, only to review by a person.

Disputed evidence only counts towards the competence level once a teacher has confirmed or corrected it. Until then the learner sees: “An assessment is still being reviewed by a teacher.”

提示#

Accounts appear without names, only with the beginning of their identifier (“Account …”). You only see your own institution.
A correction overwrites nothing: it becomes a new piece of evidence with version, justification and examiner; the competence level is recalculated from it.
Only lecturers review assessments — not a company's administration. This way the competence check never becomes a manager's view.

Lecturers' fees

教师行政

Lecturers see their own fees with status; the administration keeps the fee ledger under finances.

用途#

Transparency for visiting lecturers: what has been settled and what is still open.

使用方法#

操作路径LecturerFees

1In the lecturer area open “Fees” in the bar.
2At the top “Total” and “Paid out”; below that every item with description, period, amount and status “Open”, “Approved” or “Paid out” (图 1).
图 1 A lecturer's fees: description, period, amount and status “Open”, “Approved” or “Paid out”.
图 1 A lecturer's fees: description, period, amount and status “Open”, “Approved” or “Paid out”.
3The administration records the items under “Finances” → “Lecturer fees”.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The status of an item#

Open — recorded, not yet approved.
Approved — designated for payment.
Paid out — counts towards the “Paid out” total.

第 3 章

Exams & Credentials

Creating and taking exams, proctoring, achievement archive, certificates and badges — publicly verifiable by QR code, without an account.

Exams

教师学生行政

Create, release, take and evaluate exams — multiple-choice exam, written exam with free text or topics for papers.

用途#

An exam is the moment when learning counts. Lecturers put it together in a few minutes — with AI suggestions if they wish —, students take it in the browser, and the result lands in the achievement archive.

使用方法#

操作路径LecturerExam creationNew exam

1Lecturers: open “Exam creation” and create a “New exam”; choose the type (multiple-choice exam, written exam, paper topics) (图 1).
图 1 “Exam creation”: the created exams with type, course, number of questions and release status.
图 1 “Exam creation”: the created exams with type, course, number of questions and release status.
2Write questions or have them generated from a topic under “Generate with AI” — the suggestions are appended, nothing is overwritten (图 2).
图 2 The editor of an exam: multiple-choice and free-text questions with answers, correct solution and assessment grid.
图 2 The editor of an exam: multiple-choice and free-text questions with answers, correct solution and assessment grid.
3For free-text questions, store an assessment grid; it steers the AI pre-marking.
4Release: for a class in the course or via a link (guests enter their name, signed-in users take it under their account).
5Students: open “Exams” in the dashboard and take the exam; with proctoring, agree to the declaration first.
6View the results per exam; a shared link can be revoked at any time.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Prüfungen

The module “Exams” comprises exams, achievement archive and ECTS overview.

Three types of exam#

Multiple-choice exam: questions with several answers, can be evaluated immediately.
Written exam: free-text questions with an assessment grid; the AI suggests an assessment, the release lies with the teacher.
Paper topics: issue topics; the submitted paper goes through the review check.

From draft to archive#

An exam is created as a draft, released and taken. Results flow into the student's achievement archive (grade, credit points). Passed exams produce exam certificates that can be verified publicly under an unguessable code.

In the campus, “Assessment rethought” shows what an exam without pure recall can look like; objecting to an assessment has its own procedure (“Objection procedure”).

Who may do what#

Lecturers create and assess their own exams.
The examinations office (administration) sees the exams and proctoring incidents of its own university and releases transcripts — never those of another.
Students only see their own attempts and results.

提示#

The AI suggestion for a free-text assessment is a suggestion. A person confirms the assessment.
A revoked exam link shows guests a friendly refusal instead of an error.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fpruefungen

Proctoring in exams

学生行政

Camera and behaviour monitoring during an online exam — what is recorded and why is stated openly beforehand; incidents are always reviewed by a person, never by a machine.

用途#

A certificate is only worth as much as the exam behind it. Proctoring shows that the person was examined themselves — with as little data as possible and without an automatic verdict.

使用方法#

操作路径Start examTransparency noticeAgree

1Before the exam, “Before the exam — what we record and why.” appears with the three points webcam images, tab switches and full screen, plus storage, access and “Your right” (图 1).
图 1 The students' view: consent and identity check, each with its status.
图 1 The students' view: consent and identity check, each with its status.
2“Agree — start exam →” or “Rather not now”.
3Identity check: “A photo as proof.” — look into the camera, “Take photo”, if necessary “Again”, then “Confirm photo”. The image is linked to the certificate, not public.
4During the exam: photos at intervals, switching to another tab or window is noted; the stricter level adds mandatory full screen, copy lock and face detection (图 2).
图 2 A proctored session: integrity score as a triage hint, the incident timeline and the human review under the four-eyes principle.
图 2 A proctored session: integrity score as a triage hint, the incident timeline and the human review under the four-eyes principle.
5The administration opens “Proctoring”: the last 200 events of all exams and above them “For review” — transcripts with incidents that await a decision.
6For each transcript “Release” or “Hold back”, always with a justification (at least 10 characters); the student may read it later.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Prüfungsaufsicht

Off: no consent, no camera — for every course of this tenant.
There are three levels per exam session: without proctoring, light (photos and focus changes) and strict (additionally full screen, copy lock, face detection, pause after three violations).
The module “Exam proctoring” requires the module “Exams”.

What is noted#

Tab switch and leaving the window
Leaving full screen (strict level)
Attempt to copy or paste (strict level)
Several faces or no face (twice in a row) — strict level, checked every minute
Camera photo — every five minutes

Every event has a severity: info, warning or critical. Photos are info — they are the material of a review, not its cause.

No incident is judged by a machine#

The platform counts, it does not judge: if there are observations of the level warning or critical, the transcript is issued but does not count as proctored — until a person has looked at it and released it with their name and a justification. If there are none, there is nothing to review.

An automatic assessment of exam behaviour would be a high-risk system under the European AI Act; a counter that calls a person is not. A guard in the code ensures that the release can only arise at these two places.

The page “Proctoring” in the administration#

Key figures: events (last 200), warnings, critical, photos
“For review” — waiting transcripts with “Release” and “Hold back”
“Event stream” — the events with severity; one click opens the session

Who may do what#

The page is opened by a tenant's administration (examinations office) for incidents of its own students — every query is bound to the tenant boundary — and by the operator for all.

提示#

Photos are stored in the EU, kept for 90 days and then deleted automatically. Only the exam board has access, in case of review — no passing on, no evaluation by AI without cause.
The identity check can be skipped (“Continue without identity check”); this is then stated on the credential.
If the browser cannot detect faces, this is noted — the session then counts as not monitored, not as unremarkable.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/proctoring

Achievement archive & ECTS account

学生

The student's grades, credit points and weighted average, their own final transcript — and the certificates to download.

用途#

Whoever needs a certificate of studies for an authority looks for it where their achievements are listed — not on the application page.

使用方法#

操作路径StudiesAchievements

1In the studies area open “Achievements” (address /studium/leistungen) — “Your ECTS account and all assessed achievements”.
2If a final transcript has been issued, it is at the very top with degree, programme, transcript number, date and “View and verify transcript”.
3Three key figures: ECTS account (out of 180, with a bar), grade average (weighted by ECTS) and number of achievements (of which assessed) (图 1).
图 1 The three key figures: ECTS account with a bar, grade average and number of achievements.
图 1 The three key figures: ECTS account with a bar, grade average and number of achievements.
4Below that every achievement: type, course, title, examiner, grade or “passed”, ECTS or “failed” — or “being assessed”; plus the review, submission and assessment date (图 2).
图 2 An assessed achievement: type, course, title, examiner, grade, ECTS and the review with date.
图 2 An assessed achievement: type, course, title, examiner, grade, ECTS and the review with date.
5At the bottom the certificates as PDF — depending on the status of the studies.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Prüfungen

Part of the module “Exams” (together with examinations office and ECTS overview).

Types of achievements#

Written exam
Seminar paper
Thesis
Project work
Oral exam
Other

Which certificate when#

Notice of admission — from admission (admitted, enrolled, active, on leave, graduated).
Certificate of enrolment — only during enrolment (enrolled, active, on leave).
Certificate of studies — likewise only during enrolment.

The enrolment certificates need a real matriculation number; that is why they are only available after enrolment.

Who may do what#

The student reads their own achievements and their own transcript — the database only lets their own rows through. Entering and assessing: the examinations office via student administration.

提示#

Nobody except the examinations office can write here — the page only reads your own achievements.
As long as nothing has been entered, it says: “As soon as the examinations office enters an assessment, it appears here — with grade, ECTS and review.”

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动为您创建试用学生，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fstudium%2Fleistungen

Certificates & transcripts

学生行政运营方

Tamper-proof certificates and transcripts with a QR code — anyone can verify them without an account.

用途#

An employer should see within seconds whether a credential is genuine, valid and not revoked — without calling the university.

使用方法#

操作路径Verify (public)Enter code

1After passing a course or an exam, the certificate is ready in the dashboard (view, PDF, share).
2The administration issues final transcripts under “Transcript”: enter name, degree and programme, check the preview, print or save as PDF.
3Verify: scan the QR code or open “Verify” and enter the code — “valid”, “expired” or “invalid” appears (图 1).
图 1 “Verify credential”: the field for the code and the result “valid”, “expired” or “invalid”.
图 1 “Verify credential”: the field for the code and the result “valid”, “expired” or “invalid”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Zertifikate & Abzeichen

Why a credential cannot be forged#

Every credential has an unguessable code; the verification page reads it directly from the institution's database.
Final transcripts are additionally issued as a verifiable digital credential following an open standard (Verifiable Credential): signed by the issuing institution, with validity and revocation status. The verification page shows at the top the document as the holder received it and below it the cryptographic verification.
If a company issues it (training records of people development, microcredentials), it appears in the credential as the issuing body with name and country; the signature comes from the platform. The verification page shows company and country as soon as the signature has been verified.
The PDF is created from the same view that is shown on the verification page — identical image for image.
Real prints need a token signed by the server; every print without it carries the watermark MUSTER (sample).

Revocation and expiry#

A credential can be revoked; the verification page shows this immediately. Unknown or revoked codes give a clear negative result, never an error message. A daily run sends a reminder before time-limited credentials expire.

Which credentials exist#

Course certificate after passing a course
Exam certificate for a passed exam
Final transcript of the university (issued by the administration)
Training record of people development with a validity date
Certificates from the achievement archive

Who may do what#

Verify: anyone, without an account — the verification page is public.
Issue final transcripts (the administration's “Transcript” page): administration and operator.
Course and exam certificates are created automatically after passing; the holder views, prints and shares their own.

提示#

Whoever shares a certificate gets a proper preview with a certificate banner on social networks.
Without a valid server signature every print carries the watermark MUSTER (sample) — there is no parameter that switches it off.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/verify

Badges

学生行政

Digital badges that are not awarded but calculated — with the condition in plain text, also for what has not yet been achieved, and the evidence for what has been achieved.

用途#

A badge whose condition you do not know is a gamble, not a goal. And one that remains after a grade correction is wrong — that is why it is recalculated instead of copied.

使用方法#

操作路径CampusStudiesMy badges

1Students: in the campus open “Studies” → “My badges” (address /studium/badges).
2At the top: “x of y badges” and the ECTS from passed achievements.
3Badges achieved show “Evidence:” — the achievement they follow from, with date; open ones show “Required:” (图 1).
图 1 “My badges”: achieved badges with “Evidence:” and date, open ones with “Required:”.
图 1 “My badges”: achieved badges with “Evidence:” and date, open ones with “Required:”.
4The administration opens “Badges” (address /admin/badges): “How often achieved” per badge with condition and number of students, below that each student with their badges (图 2).
图 2 “How often achieved” in the administration: every badge with condition and number of students.
图 2 “How often achieved” in the administration: every badge with condition and number of students.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Zertifikate & Abzeichen

Part of the module “Certificates & badges”.

The badges and their conditions#

First exam passed — at least one passed course exam
Three exams passed — at least three passed course exams
First academic achievement — at least one assessed and passed achievement in the achievement archive
Very good — at least one passed achievement with grade 1.3 or better
30 ECTS and 60 ECTS — from assessed, passed achievements
Thesis passed
Graduation — an issued final transcript

Who may do what#

Students see their own badges.
The administration (and the operator) sees who has which badge — read-only: when recalculating, the overview enters no award date for other people's accounts.

提示#

There is deliberately no “Award badge” button: badges follow from passed exams, assessed achievements and the transcript.
If a grade is corrected, a badge based on it disappears by itself — both pages recalculate on every visit.
None achieved yet? The page refers to the achievement archive.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/badges

Fact check of the content

教师行政

Verifiable statements in courses are checked against sources by two models — when new slides are generated and on a schedule across the whole inventory; every case is recorded in a file that cannot be retouched.

用途#

A course that teaches something false does more harm than none. The verification chain holds statements against sources and knows, besides “supported” and “refuted”, also “unverified” — an unreachable server does not become an accusation.

使用方法#

操作路径CampusQuality & governanceFact check file

1When a slide is generated, its verifiable statements are checked before graphics and voice-over are created. If the check finds something, the workshop shows the slide and the narration with highlighting and a suggestion with clickable sources (图 1).
图 1 A recorded case: two checkers with their sources, below them the verdict on which statement applies and why.
图 1 A recorded case: two checkers with their sources, below them the verdict on which statement applies and why.
2The administration opens “Fact check across the inventory” (address /admin/faktenpruefung): “Last run”, “What is in the inventory”, “Register”, “State of development” and the schedule.
3Schedule: switch “Fact check runs automatically” on or off, “Every how many days?” (30 = once a month), “Objects per night” (a cost brake) and “Not before (UTC)” — then “Save plan”. It applies from the next nightly run (图 2).
图 2 The fact-check schedule: on or off, interval in days, objects per night and earliest start.
图 2 The fact-check schedule: on or off, interval in days, objects per night and earliest start.
4“Record inventory” → “Reconcile now”: reads courses, slide decks and documents, determines the owner of each and writes the register — without changing content.
5“Start run now”: immediately checks two objects of the inventory; the report names checked objects and statements, new findings, duration — and what was no longer checked.
6“Fact check file” (address /pruefkette/akte) shows every checked case: what both checkers answered, which sources they named and whether the statement really appeared there (图 3).
图 3 A case in the file: the statement, both checkers with their evidence and whether the statement really appeared at the source.
图 3 A case in the file: the statement, both checkers with their evidence and whether the statement really appeared at the source.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The findings#

Supported and undisputed
Accepted, but not beyond doubt
Contradiction — a person decides
Divided doctrine — both positions are supported
not checked — for example because a source could not be reached; that is not an accusation

Ranking of sources#

Primary source (e.g. legal text)
Official interpretation
Specialist source
Other source

Register and responsibility#

Every object in the inventory has someone responsible — the owner of the content or, if there is none, the administration. The reconciliation states the figures: seen, newly added, retired, responsibility changed, responsible only via the administration.

If an object has nobody responsible at all, that is an operational error: the organisation has no administration account that could step in, and reports on this content reach nobody. The page says so explicitly.

Who may do what#

Schedule, reconciliation and run: administration and operator.
File: the administration sees all cases of its organisation, a lecturer only those concerning content they own — the database decides this, not the page. They may not decide anything (for example on “Contradiction”).

提示#

Disputed questions are not decided but shown with both supported positions (“divided doctrine”).
Sources are stored as an evidence copy in the source library so that a vanished web page does not take the evidence with it.
“Every 30 days” is an illusion with many objects: the calculation of how long a full run takes with the set number per night is next to the field.

Imported questions as an exam

教师行政

Turn an imported question pool (QTI) into a multiple-choice exam of exam creation with one click — release it, count attempts, assess it like any other.

用途#

Whoever brings their inventory also wants to bring their exams — often the most valuable part of the whole course inventory. Nobody should have to retype questions for that.

使用方法#

操作路径Course packageQuestion poolAdopt as exam

1Deliver the course package with the question pool (QTI 1.2 or 2.x/3, also inside a Common Cartridge); the pool appears in the package as a separate item of the outline.
2Open the pool. Above the questions, authors (lecturers, administration, operator) see the field “Adopt as exam”.
3Check or change the title and choose “Create exam”.
4The feedback states how many questions were adopted and lists every question that did not fit, with the reason.
5“Open exam” leads into exam creation: the new multiple-choice exam is there as a draft, can be edited and is released like any other.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Prüfungen

Part of the module “Exams”. The course package itself needs the interfaces (SCORM, Common Cartridge).

What is adopted#

every question with text, exactly four answers and one valid correct answer — with an explanation if the pool has one
at most 200 items per exam; anything beyond that is reported
not adopted and reported with a reason: a different number of answers, no valid solution, empty text, text too long
Matching questions, cloze texts with tolerances and items with partial points were already reported by the import; they are listed in the package under “not adopted”

What the exam can do afterwards#

It is an ordinary multiple-choice exam of exam creation: release for a class or via a link, count attempts (with a maximum per person), assess immediately, result in the achievement archive, certificate on passing.

Camera and behaviour proctoring currently applies to the course exam, not to exams from exam creation — this also applies here.

Who may do what#

Only authors may create it: registered lecturers, administration and operator — the same barrier as “New exam”.
Only a pool of your own tenant is read; the exam belongs to the author and their tenant.

提示#

The platform's multiple-choice exam knows exactly four answers. Questions with two, three or five answers are neither padded nor shortened but reported — an invented fourth answer changes the question.
The exercise in the package stays as it is: ungraded. The exam is a copy; changes to it do not affect the pool.
Every adopted question counts one point; weights, pass mark (default 60 %) and explanations can be adjusted in the exam's editor.

第 4 章

Studies & Administration

University administration: application and admission, student records, surveys, doctorate, library, finances, statistics and careers.

Application & admission

学生行政

The route from the online application with documents via the decision of the admissions office to enrolment.

用途#

Applicants should be able to see at any time where their application stands; the admissions office should check, approve, request or reject documents in one place.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationApplicationsOpen

1Applicants: open “Application” in the dashboard. Under “How would you like to take part?” choose a route: “Course / further education”, “Single module” or “Full degree” (图 1).
图 1 “How would you like to take part?”: the three routes course/further education, single module and full degree.
图 1 “How would you like to take part?”: the three routes course/further education, single module and full degree.
2Choose the programme or course, optionally write your motivation and “Submit application” (for further education: “Book & start”).
3Under “Documents” upload certificate, ID, CV or other (PDF, JPG, PNG, at most 10 MB) (图 2).
图 2 A submitted application with status, notes from the admissions office and the uploaded documents.
图 2 A submitted application with status, notes from the admissions office and the uploaded documents.
4Admissions office: open “Applications”, choose the tab “Open”, “All”, “Admitted” or “Rejected”.
5For each application open the documents and choose “Admit”, “Request more” or “Reject”. When requesting more or rejecting, a note to the applicant is required (图 3).
图 3 An application from the admissions office's point of view: documents to open, “Admit”, “Request more” and “Reject”.
图 3 An application from the admissions office's point of view: documents to open, “Admit”, “Request more” and “Reject”.
6After admission comes payment or the voucher; then the applicant is enrolled and the student record is created.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Bewerbung & Zulassung

Three routes of participation#

Course / further education (without ECTS) — no admission, book and start immediately; also for corporate customers.
Single module (with ECTS) — admission required, the documents are checked; the points can be credited at other universities.
Full degree (programme) — admission required, the complete programme with a degree.

The status of an application#

Submitted
Under review
Submit further documents (in the administration: “Documents requested”)
Admitted
Enrolled
Rejected
Withdrawn

Notices are available to the applicant as PDF. Until online payment is connected, a voucher code enrols; in the tour the code is prefilled and nothing is charged.

提示#

Demo accounts only see fictitious people here; the real administration sees its real applicants.
Documents are stored in the EU and can only be viewed by the applicant and the admissions office; every look at them is recorded in the document file.
If the system refuses a decision, the account usually lacks the right to make it — the page says so explicitly.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=sekretariat&next=%2Fadmin%2Fapplications

Student administration

行政

The central list of all enrolled students with student record, study status, examinations office and notices.

用途#

The record is the backbone: examinations office, document file and statistics build on it.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationStudentsOpen record

1Open “Students”.
2Search by name, matriculation number or email; each row shows matriculation number, programme, route, status, enrolment date and number of courses (图 1).
图 1 The list of students: matriculation number, programme, route, status, enrolment date and number of courses.
图 1 The list of students: matriculation number, programme, route, status, enrolment date and number of courses.
3Open a record: master data, status with an optional note (“Set status”), applications and documents, enrolled courses (图 2).
图 2 The master data of a student record.
图 2 The master data of a student record.
4In the section “Examinations office & achievement archive” create and assess achievements, get the grade export as CSV and maintain the transcript data (图 3).
图 3 “Examinations office & achievement archive” in the record: the achievements with grade and ECTS, “Create achievement” and the grade export.
图 3 “Examinations office & achievement archive” in the record: the achievements with grade and ECTS, “Create achievement” and the grade export.
5Under “Notices & certificates” are the person's issued documents.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Bewerbung & Zulassung

The study status#

applied
admitted
enrolled
active
on leave
graduated
exmatriculated

Examinations office & achievement archive in the record#

Header figures: ECTS account (passed), additional achievements, grade average.
Create an achievement: title, grade (1.0–5.0), ECTS, examiner, optionally a review as text; paper and review can be uploaded as files.
Additional achievements do not count towards the ECTS account.
Transcript data for transcript, Diploma Supplement and Transcript of Records: form of address, mode of study (full-time/part-time), graduation date, programme end date.

What the examinations office enters here, the student sees in their achievement archive — with grade, ECTS and review.

提示#

A student appears as soon as an admitted application has been paid (or redeemed with a voucher) — with a matriculation number.
The note on the status is meant for reasons, such as “semester abroad” or the reason for an exmatriculation.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=sekretariat&next=%2Fadmin%2Fstudierende

Surveys

学生行政

Course evaluations — answered anonymously, evaluated only as totals and only from five responses.

用途#

Good teaching needs honest feedback. Only those who are sure to remain anonymous answer honestly — that is why the evaluation shows nothing at all when there are too few responses.

使用方法#

操作路径CampusStudiesMy surveys

1Students: in the campus open “Studies” → “My surveys”. If a survey is running for one of your courses, it appears there.
2Rate the statements on a scale from 1 to 5, optionally write freely (“What helped, what was missing?”) and “Submit anonymously” (图 1).
图 1 The questionnaire: every statement with the scale from 1 to 5.
图 1 The questionnaire: every statement with the scale from 1 to 5.
3Administration: under “Quality & governance” → “Surveys” view, per survey, the overall impression, the values per statement and the free feedback (图 2).
图 2 The evaluation of a survey: overall impression, values per statement and the free feedback.
图 2 The evaluation of a survey: overall impression, values per statement and the free feedback.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Hochschulverwaltung

The statements#

The course was clearly structured and logically organised.
The content was conveyed in an understandable way.
The materials (slides, tasks, sources) helped me learn.
Questions were addressed; I felt supported.
I can transfer what I have learned to my work.
The level of the course was appropriate for me (1 = too low, 5 = too high) — this statement does not count towards the overall impression.

Why the answers are truly anonymous#

Storage is separate: that someone has taken part (so that nobody answers twice) and what was answered — without any link between them. Not even the university can bring the two together.

The evaluation only shows totals and only from five responses. Below that, one could work out from the answers who gave them; until then it says “No evaluation yet: n of at least 5”.

提示#

Whoever has taken part in all running surveys sees a thank-you instead of a form — answering twice is not possible.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/befragungen

Doctorate

学生教师行政

Doctoral procedures from registration to the awarded degree — each stage only once the previous one has been reached and the required documents are in the file.

用途#

A doctoral procedure has many stages and participants. The committee sees, per procedure, what a stage is still missing; doctoral candidates see their status and the next step.

使用方法#

操作路径CampusQuality & governanceDoctorate

1Doctoral candidates: in the campus open “Studies” → “My doctorate” — the steps of the procedure, what is due “next” and the history (图 1).
图 1 “Steps of the procedure” from the doctoral candidate's point of view: done, next, still open.
图 1 “Steps of the procedure” from the doctoral candidate's point of view: done, next, still open.
2Doctoral committee: open “Doctorate”; for each procedure “Record document” (a milestone is done) and “Next stage” (图 2).
图 2 A procedure from the doctoral committee's point of view: open milestones, “Record document”, “Next stage” and the history.
图 2 A procedure from the doctoral committee's point of view: open milestones, “Record document”, “Next stage” and the history.
3If a stage is not yet possible, it says below what it is missing; the button remains locked.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Hochschulverwaltung

The stages and what they require#

Registered — the committee checks admission requirements and supervision.
Accepted for the doctorate — next, the supervision agreement and exposé belong in the file.
In progress — requires the supervision agreement and exposé; progress via milestones (e.g. interim report).
Dissertation submitted — requires the submission.
Reviewed — requires the first and second review.
Defence passed — requires the defence.
Completed — requires publication; only then is the degree awarded.
Cancelled — reachable from every running stage.

The publication obligation is the reason why the degree is not already awarded with the defence.

提示#

There is deliberately no shortcut — not for the administration either, and not “just for testing”. A procedure that can be skipped proves nothing.
Cancelling is possible from every running stage: withdrawal must always be possible.
Without a recorded procedure, the doctoral candidate's page explains how it starts: with acceptance by the doctoral committee.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/promotion

Careers & talent

学生行政

Your own external profile, internships and jobs from partner companies — every kind of visibility is a separate decision of the person, default “nobody”.

用途#

Studies lead into a profession. Companies find talent, students find internships — and nobody is visible who does not want to be.

使用方法#

操作路径DashboardMy external profile

1Students: in the dashboard open the card “My external profile”. First set who sees the profile (four levels), then separately whether the study status is shown as well (图 1).
图 1 “Who sees the profile?”: the four levels of visibility.
图 1 “Who sees the profile?”: the four levels of visibility.
2Check the block “This and only this would go out” — no course names, no grades, no individual exams (图 2).
图 2 “This and only this would go out”: the preview of what a company would see.
图 2 “This and only this would go out”: the preview of what a company would see.
3Fill in headline, “About me”, skills, “I am looking for” (internship, working student job, entry-level job, nothing at the moment), goal, website and “What can I be approached for?” and “Save profile”.
4“Who follows me” shows in full which companies have bookmarked the profile.
5“Careers” shows the internship exchange and the public talent profiles; for a job “Express interest”, optionally with a short message.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Alumni & Karriere

Who sees the profile — four levels#

Nobody — only you (default).
Other graduates of this university.
Graduates and verified companies.
Everyone, also without signing in.

The study status is a separate decision, independent of visibility: it also says something about detours — that is why it is asked separately.

What you can be approached for#

Internship
Working student job
Thesis in a company
Research project
Mentoring by alumni
Professional exchange

提示#

“Delete profile” removes the external profile completely.
A company that follows you gets no additional access through it — what it sees is decided solely by your own setting.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/boerse

Employer matching

行政

For each advertised position: who has expressed interest and which visible talent profiles fit.

用途#

Career services bring supply and demand together instead of comparing lists.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationMatching

1Open “Matching”.
2“Create job posting”: title, company, location, type, description and optionally a link.
3For each posting view two columns: the interested people with their message and the matching talent profiles (图 1).
图 1 A posting with two columns: the interested people with their message and the matching talent profiles.
图 1 A posting with two columns: the interested people with their message and the matching talent profiles.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Alumni & Karriere

What is shown per posting#

The posting itself — title, company, type.
Interested people — students who have “expressed interest”, with their message and status.
Matching profiles — visible external profiles whose search fits the type, with headline and skills.

Without a posting the page stays empty; the first one is created via the button at the top.

提示#

A profile counts as matching if its “I am looking for” fits the type of the position — and if it is visible to companies at all.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/arbeitgeber

Library

学生教师行政

The institution's media library and the source library, in which every source is listed with an evidence copy and what it is used for.

用途#

If a source turns out to be wrong or moves, it must be visible immediately which statements depend on it.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationQuality & governanceSource library

1Media library: in the campus “Service” → “Library” — interviews, podcasts, explainer videos, lectures, books and articles, each with origin and visibility (图 1).
图 1 A medium of the media library with type, title, origin, visibility and citation style.
图 1 A medium of the media library with type, title, origin, visibility and citation style.
2Source library (administration): open “Library”. Every source is listed with type, identifier, level, usage and — for online sources — an evidence copy (图 2).
图 2 A source of the source library: type, identifier, level, usage and the evidence copy.
图 2 A source of the source library: type, identifier, level, usage and the evidence copy.
3“Fetch missing copies” fetches missing evidence copies; “Resubmit now” checks whether every source is still reachable and still says the same.
4“Record publication”: enter ISBN, ISSN or DOI — the identifier is checked immediately — plus title, page and the wording at that point.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Hochschulverwaltung

Evidence copy and resubmission#

Online sources move: addresses change, pages disappear. The evidence copy records what was there at the time of access; it is not public. For publications the evidence is the catalogue entry, not a copy.

The resubmission checks whether every source is still there today and still says the same. The second case is the dangerous one: address and title still match, only the content no longer does. The list then marks “moved”, “content changed” or “not reachable”.

提示#

The source library fills itself as soon as the fact check runs: every source a checker cites is classified.
Page and wording are mandatory for publications: the identifier proves that the publication exists — not that it says what is claimed.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/bibliothek

Notice board

学生教师行政

Notices of your own institution: announcements with category and run time, polls with one vote per person and a personal watch list; the administration creates, extends and withdraws them.

用途#

What everyone should know belongs in a place everyone knows — filterable so that the important does not get lost in the many, and time-limited so that old items disappear by themselves.

使用方法#

操作路径StudiesNotice board

1Members: open “Notice board” (address /studium/brett). You see the notices that are currently posted, newest first.
2At the top filter by category (general information, poll, event, system, exam) and semester, optionally “Watch list only” (图 1).
图 1 The notice board filters on the demo surface: semester, category and news type.
图 1 The notice board filters on the demo surface: semester, category and news type.
3“more” expands long texts. “Bookmark” puts a notice on your own watch list, “Bookmarked” takes it off again (图 2).
图 2 An announcement on the demo surface with date, category, news type, text and “Bookmark”.
图 2 An announcement on the demo surface with date, category, news type, text and “Bookmark”.
4In a poll choose an answer: every person has one vote; the result only appears after your own vote.
5Administration: under “Notice board” in the administration (/admin/brett) create a new notice — category, optionally news type and semester, title, text, “Visible from” and “Visible until”, optionally “With poll” with two to eight answers.
6Below are all notices with their status (scheduled, posted, expired, withdrawn) and the poll results; “+30 days” extends, “Withdraw” takes a notice off the board immediately.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Hochschulverwaltung

Part of the module “University administration”; switchable per tenant.
Run time without an entry 30 days, at most one year.

What a notice carries#

Category
News type and semester (optional)
Title and text (up to 8,000 characters)
Period: visible from, visible until
optionally a poll with 2–8 answers

How voting works#

Every signed-in person of the tenant has exactly one vote per poll — recorded in the database, not in the browser.
A second vote changes nothing; voting is only possible while the notice is posted.
Votes are counted in the database; only totals are shown, never who voted how.

Who may do what#

Read, vote, bookmark: signed-in members of your own institution.
Create, extend, withdraw, see results: the administration of your own institution.
Every query is bound to the tenant boundary; a guard in the code checks this per query.

提示#

You only see the results of a poll after your own vote — so the interim result does not influence you.
A withdrawn notice is gone for members immediately; in the administration it remains visible with the status “withdrawn”.
For concerns with justification and discussion there is the community.
The public demo surface /g-uds/blackboard shows sample data; the real board is at /studium/brett.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds/blackboard

Finances

行政运营方

Tuition fees per route and brand with enrolment figures, and the lecturers' fee ledger.

用途#

Income and expenditure of the study operation at a glance.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationFinances

1Open “Finances”.
2At the top “Tuition fees per track”: fee per route and brand with the number of enrolled students (图 1).
图 1 “Tuition fees per track”: fee per route with the number of enrolled students.
图 1 “Tuition fees per track”: fee per route with the number of enrolled students.
3At the bottom “Lecturer fees”: choose a lecturer, enter description (e.g. “Teaching M3”), amount and period (e.g. “2027-Q1”) and “Record” (图 2).
图 2 “Lecturer fees”: recorded items and the form for a new one.
图 2 “Lecturer fees”: recorded items and the form for a new one.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Hochschulverwaltung

The fee ledger#

Per entry: lecturer, description, amount in euros, period.
Status: open, approved, paid out.
The lecturer sees their entries under “Fees” in the lecturer area.

提示#

Fees can only be recorded once there are accounts with the lecturer role; the page says so as long as none exists.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/finanzen

Statistics

行政运营方

Key figures of the institution from real data: admission funnel, students by status, applications by route, ECTS awarded, pass rate.

用途#

The management should see in one picture how the university is doing — from real data, not from yesterday's spreadsheet.

使用方法#

操作路径CampusQuality & governanceStatistics

1Open “Statistics”.
2At the top the key figures: total applications, students, active courses, ECTS awarded, pass rate, achievements assessed (图 1).
图 1 The six key figures: applications, students, active courses, ECTS awarded, pass rate and achievements assessed.
图 1 The six key figures: applications, students, active courses, ECTS awarded, pass rate and achievements assessed.
3Below that the admission funnel (received → decided → admitted → enrolled), students by status and applications by route (图 2).
图 2 The admission funnel and the students by status as bars.
图 2 The admission funnel and the students by status as bars.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Hochschulverwaltung

The key figures in detail#

The funnel counts applications by progress: received, decided, admitted, enrolled. Next to it students by study status and applications by route.

Total applications
Students
Active courses
ECTS awarded
Pass rate
Achievements assessed

提示#

The figures update from live data when the page is opened — there is no export or reference date here.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/statistik

Document audit

行政

The document file: who saw which document when and which documents have exceeded their retention period.

用途#

Data protection requires proof: log access, observe deadlines.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationDocuments

1Open “Document file”.
2At the top the documents beyond their retention period — empty means “No overdue documents”.
3Below that the access log of the last 50 accesses: time, who viewed it, which type of document, which student (图 1).
图 1 The access log: time, who viewed it, which type of document and which student.
图 1 The access log: time, who viewed it, which type of document and which student.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Hochschulverwaltung

What is logged#

Time of access.
Who viewed it.
Which type of document — application document, achievement (paper) or achievement (review).
Which student it belongs to.

Every document carries a retention period; anything beyond it is listed at the top.

提示#

Application documents are logged as well as papers and reviews from the achievement archive.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/dokumente

Company partners

行政

The entrance for companies: create a profile, prepare offers — publishing and seeing talent only after review by the university.

用途#

In the external profile students reveal something about themselves. That is why only a verified company sees anything — and a waiting company sees what it is waiting for.

使用方法#

操作路径Company access

1Companies: in the dashboard open the card “Company access” and register the company (name, domain, location, website, contact address, short description).
2During the review: maintain “Your presence” and prepare internships, working student and permanent positions, theses and research projects under “Offers”.
3The university reviews under “Companies”: “Approve”, “Revoke approval”, “Block”, “Unblock”.
4After approval: offers become visible; under “Students and graduates” search by focus, goal or keyword and follow people.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Personal & Weiterbildung

Three states of a company#

awaiting review — creating and preparing is possible, nothing becomes visible;
verified — offers are visible, talent can be found;
blocked — the access no longer works; students it followed see “a company whose access the university has withdrawn”.

提示#

The talent search deliberately finds few: only those who have explicitly opened up to companies.
Below every offer is the company's presence — an offer without a traceable sender would be an anonymous advertisement.

第 5 章

Course Workshop & Avatars

A presentation, a document or a video becomes a course with slides, narration, figure and voice — in four phases: Content, Design, Speakers & Interaction, Publish.

Course workshop at a glance

教师行政

Build courses yourself: material in, the AI suggests a structure, slides and narration are created, an avatar presents — in four phases.

用途#

Existing material — a presentation, a script, a video — should become a course in hours rather than weeks, which you can publish, present and download.

使用方法#

操作路径Learning workshopNew course

1Open “Learning workshop” and choose “New course” — or continue a draft from “Your drafts” (图 1).
图 1 A course's guide: the four phases Content, Design, Speakers & Interaction and Publish with progress, below them the sub-steps of the current phase.
图 1 A course's guide: the four phases Content, Design, Speakers & Interaction and Publish with progress, below them the sub-steps of the current phase.
2Phase 1 · Content: define the outline, then work out every slide with narration and presentation.
3Phase 2 · Design: logo and colours, music, transitions, further versions. The defaults usually fit.
4Phase 3 · Speakers & Interaction: choose figure and voice, define languages, place the speaker per slide.
5Phase 4 · Publish: release, share, present or download as video, presentation file, PDF or course package.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio

Module “Course Studio” with usage for text models, speech output and images.
Every sub-step has its own address — the browser's back button and bookmarks work.
The workshop saves automatically; switching steps loses nothing.

Four phases, six steps#

Content → 1 Outline (modules and slides) · 2 Slides (narration and presentation)
Design → 3 Look & sound
Speakers & Interaction → 4 Figure & voice · 5 Placing
Publish → 6 Publish

The guide shows four words and a progress bar at the top; below them only the sub-steps of the current phase. On the phone it says “Step 2 of 4 · Design” with four dots.

What “done” means#

Outline: done as soon as there are slides.
Slides: done when every slide has narration and presentation — otherwise “n of m slides still missing”.
Look & sound: has defaults, counts as done.
Figure & voice: done when figure and voice are set.
Placing: slides without their own decision use the automatic speaker spot — that is a finished state.
Publish: done when the course is published.

提示#

Keyboard shortcuts: Alt+1 to Alt+4 jumps to the phase; “?” shows all shortcuts.
Only what makes no sense without slides is locked. Whoever knows what they are doing jumps straight to step 4.
Trial author account: upload your own presentation without signing in and have a course built; the account disappears after one day.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动创建试用账号，一天后自动删除，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Creating a course from material

教师

Put in files, up to three web addresses or a text — the workshop reads it, recognises the topics and suggests a course; or adopt a presentation 1:1, film a text as a script, start empty.

用途#

Nobody should start from zero. What already exists — slides, scripts, web pages, videos — becomes the starting point; the AI suggests, the author decides.

使用方法#

操作路径Learning workshopNew courseDrag material in

1In the learning workshop (address /studio/kurs) “New course” — “What should it be created from?”.
2Drag material in (“Drag a file here or select one”: PDF, word processing, presentation, spreadsheet, text, SVG graphics, ZIP, video), enter up to three addresses separated by spaces under “Web address” or paste anything from a sentence to a finished text under “Text” (图 1).
图 1 “What should it be created from?”: file, web address or text, plus length, further options and filing.
图 1 “What should it be created from?”: file, web address or text, plus length, further options and filing.
3Choose “Length” (Automatic, Short, Medium, Long — “about n slides”) and under “More options” the AI's writing style and the spoken duration; under “File under” choose or create a folder.
4“Draft course”. While “Reading material … Recognising topics … Drafting structure …” runs you do not have to wait: the suggestion is then under “Your drafts”, even if the tab was closed.
5Check the suggestion (“Suggestion — nothing has been created yet”): modules, slides, form of address (informal or formal), certificate; a click on a slide sketches the planned content. “What the AI saw in the material” lists the findings.
6Under “Adjust: modules, slides, duration” change values and “Suggest again with these values”; “Suggest topics” adds sensible topics, your own can be written line by line (“Include topics”).
7“Create course & write slides” — only now is the course created.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio

Part of the module “Course Studio”; which text model writes follows from the text models the tenant has enabled.
Files up to 100 MB each; large slide decks go directly into storage.

Four routes to a course#

Draft course — the AI reads the material and suggests modules and slides.
Film a script — a text remains the narration word for word; per paragraph (or per “## Scene”) a slide is created with presentation, speaker spot and ideas for interstitial images.
Adopt presentation 1:1 — slides without AI rework; then apply corporate design, speaker and exports. Included vector graphics replace embedded images of the same name.
Empty course — you create outline and slides yourself; the AI helps on request.

What the report after a 1:1 adoption states#

how many slides were adopted and which instructions were read
how many stage directions moved from the narration into the intent of the slide
slides with a target duration and the total minutes (of which estimated)
slides without source numbers in the narration
adopted exam questions
archive entries that were not adopted

If instructions do not match the slides, the report says so — the import is then the usual one.

Who may do what#

The learning workshop is open to every signed-in account if the tenant has booked Course Studio; every author sees their own drafts and courses (plus those shared by colleagues). Without an account of your own, trial access leads into a trial workshop.

提示#

Three other routes are below the button: “Create empty course” (one module, one slide), “Or: film the text verbatim as a script” (one slide per paragraph, the text remains the narration word for word) and “Adopt presentation 1:1 (without AI)”.
With the 1:1 adoption an included file can be read as production instructions: the import then knows what in the speaker notes is direction and what is narration — with markers, target durations, house colours and included exam questions.
From a video the audio track is created in the browser; the transcript with timestamps is produced in the EU and serves as material.
A course package (file extension .kurs.json) from another installation is adopted as a new draft — nothing is overwritten.
Third-party courses in the standard format (SCORM, Common Cartridge with question pools) are adopted by the administration under “Third-party content”.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动创建试用账号，一天后自动删除，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Phase 1 · Content: outline and slides

教师

Define modules and slides, then work out every slide with narration and presentation — the longest and most important step.

用途#

The focus belongs at the beginning: on the content. Look, figure and video only come afterwards.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseContentOutlineSlides

1“Outline”: create, move, rename modules and slides — or set the time and have a suggestion made. Via “Change scope” modules, slides and speaking time can also be adjusted afterwards, also per module (图 1).
图 1 “Change scope”: modules, slides and speaking time — for the whole course or per module.
图 1 “Change scope”: modules, slides and speaking time — for the whole course or per module.
2“Slides”: slide by slide write the narration or have it generated and choose a presentation (图 2).
图 2 The slide overview: every slide as a tile with the status of narration and presentation.
图 2 The slide overview: every slide as a tile with the status of narration and presentation.
3Graphic or image: describe what should be seen and generate it — a suggestion with versions to browse is created; only “Accept” inserts it.
4Record stage directions for the presentation (for the draft and per slide).
5For notes from the fact check, check the highlighted passage and accept or discard the suggestion with sources.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

What a slide consists of#

Narration — what the avatar says.
Presentation — a template (e.g. bullet list, comparison, key figure), an explanatory graphic, an image or a freely designed surface.
On the free surface: text, image, video, graphic, shape and the speaker spot; at most 40 elements per slide.
Optional: an exercise, a role play or a question at the end of the slide.

AI suggests, the person decides#

Everything an AI generates — text, graphic, image — first lands as a suggestion next to the slide. Several versions can be browsed; “Accept” or “Discard”. Nothing lands on the slide unasked, and every acceptance can be undone.

提示#

Explanatory graphics reveal themselves in time with the voice-over: markers in the narration determine when which element appears.
No generation without a description — whoever has no idea can get suggestions with “Ideas for a graphic”.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动创建试用账号，一天后自动删除，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Phase 2 · Design: look & sound

教师

Style, logo, signet, surface behind the speaker, background music, transitions and further versions of the course.

用途#

A course carries the corporate design of its institution. Everything has defaults — whoever changes nothing is still done.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseDesignLook & sound

1Open “Look & sound”.
2Look: choose style, logo, signet and the surface behind the speaker (图 1).
图 1 “Look”: style, logo, signet and the surface behind the speaker.
图 1 “Look”: style, logo, signet and the surface behind the speaker.
3Music: choose a mood (e.g. Calm, Focus, Departure); it automatically gets quieter during speech (图 2).
图 2 “Music”: the moods to choose from; it automatically gets quieter during speech.
图 2 “Music”: the moods to choose from; it automatically gets quieter during speech.
4Transitions: cut, soft fade, slide, zoom in or wipe — applies to every slide without its own choice, in the player, in the presentation and in the video.
5Versions: create a translation, short or long version as a separate variant (图 3).
图 3 “Versions”: translation, short or long version as a separate variant.
图 3 “Versions”: translation, short or long version as a separate variant.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The brand of the course#

A course carries the brand of the organisation it names: logo, colours, slide font and footer. This applies in the player, in the presentation, in the export and in the video — even when the course runs on another institution's installation. If an organisation has no logo of its own, its signet is shown.

Music and transitions#

Moods of the background music, e.g. “Calm” (wide pads, hardly any movement), “Focus” (quiet arpeggio — the classic for explainer videos), “Departure” (driving pulse).
The music gets quieter as soon as someone speaks.
Transitions: cut (immediate), soft fade, slide in from the right, zoom in, wipe. A slide can have its own choice.

Further versions#

Variants are created from a course: a translation, a short version, a long version. Every variant is created as a new draft — the original remains unchanged.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动创建试用账号，一天后自动删除，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Phase 3 · Speakers & Interaction

教师

Who speaks the course, in which languages, with which voice — and where the speaker stands on every slide.

用途#

The figure comes before placing: when placing, it stands live on the slide, and you should see whom you are choosing the spot for.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseSpeakers & InteractionFigure & voice

1Open “Figure & voice”: choose a figure (default figure, your own figure from a photo or “My avatar”) (图 1).
图 1 “Figure & voice”: the chosen figure with its voice, optionally several speakers per slide range.
图 1 “Figure & voice”: the chosen figure with its voice, optionally several speakers per slide range.
2The voice belongs to the figure. Several speakers per slide range are possible (“Slides 1–3 spoken by A, 4–8 by B”).
3Below it is the course's voice model: “Voice model: new (v4)” or “Voice model: previous”. New courses speak with the new model; an existing course only switches via “Switch to the new voice model” and a confirmation.
4Define languages: per language “full” (whole course as video, at most two), “start” (the first slides are ready, the rest is created while watching) or “off”. The estimated rendering costs are shown below, with their derivation (图 2).
图 2 The course's languages: per language “full”, “start” or “off”, below them the estimated rendering costs.
图 2 The course's languages: per language “full”, “start” or “off”, below them the estimated rendering costs.
5“Placing”: decide per slide where and how large the speaker stands (see speaker spot).

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Head start instead of waiting#

Production runs ahead of the viewer: for languages in “start” mode the first slides are ready as video. If someone switches to this language, video plays immediately, and the rest is created while they watch. This way a course saves a large part of the rendering costs without anyone waiting.

When re-rendering happens#

Changed narration orders the avatar video of that slide again. A different voice version or cast, on the other hand, does not change finished videos by itself; they are only re-rendered after explicit approval.

The course's voice model#

Every course remembers which voice model it is voiced with. Courses created before 17.10.2026 and courses from files stay with the previous model — also for new slides, new variants and new languages. This way the voice never changes in the middle of a course. Newly created courses speak with the new model (v4) from the start.

Live answers in the course (Ask me, tutor, presentation view) follow the course's voice model; a course with the new model answers with its real-time variant.

Switching is only possible explicitly under “Figure & voice” → “Voice model” and can be undone. Recordings already stored remain in use until new voicing is approved; until then a switched course can contain slides of both models.

提示#

A new cast applies to videos created from now on. Finished videos are never re-rendered on their own — only after approval.
In the trial account the default figure speaks with its own voice; your own figures are available in your own organisation.
Switching the voice model orders nothing: slides already voiced and finished videos remain unchanged; new voicing only happens after approval.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动创建试用账号，一天后自动删除，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Several speakers on one slide

教师

Interview and conversation: a slide's narration is divided into sections, every section has its speaker with their own figure and voice — the videos are ordered per section on request and played seamlessly one after another in the player.

用途#

A conversation between two experts explains some things better than a lecture — for example a lecturer and an expert taking turns on the same slide.

使用方法#

操作路径Slide editorInsertSeveral speakers

1In the slide editor “Insert” → “Several speakers”: “Add speaker”, choose a name and figure (the voice comes from the figure), “Place spot on the slide” and move and scale the spot on the slide.
2Under “Who speaks which sentence” assign every sentence of the narration to a speaker (图 1). Consecutive sentences of the same speaker form a section; the order of the sentences is the order of the sequence.
图 1 The field “Several speakers”: the speakers with figure and spot and below them “Who speaks which sentence”.
图 1 The field “Several speakers”: the speakers with figure and spot and below them “Who speaks which sentence”.
3Under “Videos per section” is the sequence: who speaks in which order and the status of every video — “Video ready”, “In progress”, “Outdated”, “Video missing”, “Voice missing”, “Figure missing”. With several course languages the language is chosen at the top right.
4Missing sections are preselected, outdated ones are not. Below that the estimated computing minutes (1.2 per section). “Order sections” and then “Yes, order” commission the selected sections — nothing is ordered before that.
5Once all sections of a slide are ready, the course player plays them one after another: every speaker with their own voice, a guest at their spot on the slide, the name of the person speaking is visible. Subtitles, reveal, read-along and speed follow the whole sequence.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio

Part of the module “Course Studio”; switchable per tenant. If the switch is off, there is no order button and no sequence in the player.

Ordering and costs#

one video per section with figure, voice and text of the person speaking
only on request and after confirmation; the estimated computing minutes are shown beforehand
at most three new orders per call; what remains open is reported and can be ordered again
a video that is already finished or running is not ordered a second time
new recordings speak with the course's voice model (setting “Voice model”)

Other languages#

translation happens per section, not for the whole slide — so in every language who speaks which sentence is preserved
the translation is created when ordering and stored for the player

In the player#

the sequence only runs if every section of the slide is ready in this language
the next section is preloaded; the switch happens without a pause
if a section is missing or outdated, the course's speaker speaks the whole slide as before, and guests appear as still images at their spots

提示#

Every face speaks only with its own voice: a guest without a voice of their own gets no order — never the course voice.
If a sentence is changed, it loses its assignment and falls back to the course's speaker; it is never put into a stranger's mouth.
Finished videos are never re-rendered automatically. A changed section is shown as “Outdated”; it is only ordered again if it is selected and the order is confirmed.
What is ordered is the saved state of an accepted slide in a published course. The order rejects unsaved changes.

Phase 4 · Publish

教师

Release the course, view it as a student, share it, present it or download it — as video, presentation file, PDF or standard package for other learning systems.

用途#

At the end of a long run you want to know how to continue: who sees the course, and in what form do I take it with me?

使用方法#

操作路径CoursePublish

1Open “Publish”. At the top the summary: modules, slides, how many with a set speaker (图 1).
图 1 The status of the course with the summary and the button “Publish” or “Back to draft”.
图 1 The status of the course with the summary and the button “Publish” or “Back to draft”.
2“View as a student first” — shows exactly what a student sees, without the author bar.
3“Publish”: afterwards the assigned students see the course. Withdrawing is possible at any time (“Back to draft”).
4“Present”: “Presentation” (full screen with speaker) or “As zoom canvas” (图 2).
图 2 “Present”: presentation with speaker or as zoom canvas.
图 2 “Present”: presentation with speaker or as zoom canvas.
5“Download”: choose format and modules (图 3).
图 3 “Download”: choose format and modules.
图 3 “Download”: choose format and modules.
6“Share link” creates a public view link.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The formats#

One video per module — one lesson, one MP4 file; the usual choice for a learning system.
One video in one piece — the whole course in one file.
Presentation file — the slides for further editing, with speaker notes.
Presentation file with video — with the speaker window as in the presentation; large file.
PDF — for printing and distributing.
SCORM package (1.2) — for another learning system: slides, subtitles, progress reporting.

The video recording runs in the presentation view and is started there by hand — in real time. It costs no GPU minute, only run time.

提示#

If the text of a module has been changed since the last recording, the page warns: the video file says something different there from the course and must be recorded again.
Changes in the workshop apply immediately to a published course.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动创建试用账号，一天后自动删除，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Avatars & voices

教师行政运营方

Your own figures from a photo and your own voices from a recording — with consent as a condition and one fixed rule: every face speaks only with its own voice.

用途#

A course works when the presenter is familiar. Universities build their figures themselves, without the provider's involvement — and nobody ever has a stranger's voice put into their mouth.

使用方法#

操作路径Learning workshopAvatar workshop

1Open “Avatar workshop”.
20 · Record consent: name of the person depicted, date, period of validity, what it applies to (image, voice) and upload the signed proof (PDF, PNG or JPEG). Without proof nothing is recorded (图 1).
图 1 “Record consent”: person, date, period of validity, purpose and the signed proof.
图 1 “Record consent”: person, date, period of validity, purpose and the signed proof.
3Upload a photo; from it the figure is created with mouth shapes, blinking and eyebrows, then a running preview (图 2).
图 2 The photo for the figure, linked to a recorded consent.
图 2 The photo for the figure, linked to a recorded consent.
4Voice: record or upload a speech sample; duration, sampling rate and proportion of silence are checked before building (图 3).
图 3 The voice: record or upload a speech sample; duration, sampling rate and silence are checked before building.
图 3 The voice: record or upload a speech sample; duration, sampling rate and silence are checked before building.
5The administration releases the figure for students. After that it can be chosen in every course workshop under “Figure & voice”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Eigene Avatare

Module “Own avatars” (requires “Avatar lecturer”); building on the GPU and the voice are counted as usage.

The rule: every face has one voice#

A figure speaks with its own voice — the voice assigned to it when it was created — or not at all. There is no substitute voice that steps in when its own is not available at the moment. In the past such a fallback sounded like “it works” and was the opposite: a face with another person's voice.

The one exception is none: a course without its own cast is presented by the default figure, and it speaks with its own voice assigned to it.

This rule is recorded in the code and protected by automatic guards; a term that would promise a “substitute voice” does not reach the screen in any of the fifteen languages.

Consent as a technical condition#

Image and voice are consented to separately.
No figure is built without a stored, signed proof.
A withdrawal takes effect immediately.
Everything a figure says is labelled as AI-generated for learners.

Pre-produced and live#

The presentation of a slide is available as a pre-produced video (audio from the file). For follow-up questions a lip-synchronous head answers live. Both run with our own models on rented graphics servers.

提示#

A withdrawal of consent takes effect immediately: the figure no longer speaks.
A figure without a voice does not speak. If the voice is missing, the answer appears as text, and the log says why.

My avatar

教师

Lecturers make themselves the speaker of their courses: consent, photo or video selfie, voice, test, use — revocable at any time.

用途#

Your own course with your own face and your own voice — without a studio and without an appointment.

使用方法#

操作路径Learning workshopMy avatar

1Open “Learning workshop” → “My avatar” (address /werkstatt/ich). At the top the four steps: photo, voice, test, use (图 1).
图 1 The four steps to your own avatar: photo, voice, test, use.
图 1 The four steps to your own avatar: photo, voice, test, use.
2“Your consent”: “Name as it appears in the course”, tick “I am the person depicted …” and “I am aware: my avatar will be … labelled as AI-generated”, optionally “My voice may also be cloned” — “Consent and continue” (图 2).
图 2 “Your consent”: name in the course, the two confirmations and the choice of whether the voice may also be cloned.
图 2 “Your consent”: name in the course, the two confirmations and the choice of whether the voice may also be cloned.
3Photo: “Record video selfie” (four seconds, the sharpest frame is taken) or “Upload photo” — straight into the camera, mouth closed, even light from the front, head and shoulders in the picture. Then “Use this image”.
4Voice: “Own voice (30 s)” — read the displayed text calmly, “Finished speaking”; or choose a ready-made voice.
5Test: “Listen to test sentence” — the moving image is created with the first course video.
6Use: “Use as speaker” — afterwards the avatar can be chosen in all your own courses when placing the speaker.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Eigene Avatare

Part of the module “Own avatars” (requires the module “Avatar lecturer”).

What the assistant checks#

No person clearly recognisable → “Please move closer to the camera.”
Low camera resolution → the image is upscaled slightly; a photo from the phone will be sharper.
Recording too short or almost silent → once more, completely and closer to the microphone.
Camera or microphone not permitted → notice to allow access, or upload a photo.

Image, voice and labelling#

Photo, voice sample and voice capsule are kept in the platform's storage in Frankfurt. Image and own voice are computed by the platform with its own models on rented graphics servers. If a preset voice is chosen instead of one's own, the text to be spoken goes to a specialised speech service in the USA — only this text. Consent can be revoked at any time. Everything the avatar says is labelled as AI-generated for learners.

The rule “Every face speaks only with its own voice” applies: without consent to your own voice, the avatar speaks with a chosen ready-made voice — never with another person's voice.

Who may do what#

Lecturers with teaching authorisation, workshop authors, administration and operator — each only for themselves.

提示#

The green background during building is intentional; it is removed afterwards so that the figure stands freely on the slides.
You can close the page; the build continues, and the status is shown there on your next visit.
“Withdraw consent”: the avatar then stops speaking immediately — in no course and not live.
The figure only appears in your own courses, not with colleagues.

Text models of the workshop

行政运营方教师

Which language model writes the slide texts can be enabled per tenant — three models from different providers, one of them processed in the EU (Paris); models that cannot be chosen are greyed out with a reason.

用途#

Some institutions require processing exclusively in the EU, others want the strongest model. The customer makes the decision — and whoever chooses a model gets exactly that one or a clear refusal, never silently a different one.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseContentSlideSourcesAI models

1Under “Control” the operator enables per tenant which text models the workshop may offer.
2In the workshop under “Content” open a slide; in the box “Sources — fetch content” choose the tab “AI models”.
3Under “Text models” take a selectable model; the chosen one writes the slide texts (图 1).
图 1 “Sources — fetch content”, tab “AI models”: selectable text models and greyed-out ones with a reason.
图 1 “Sources — fetch content”, tab “AI models”: selectable text models and greyed-out ones with a reason.
4Models that cannot be chosen are greyed out, with a reason: “Switched off in the admin panel”, “Not yet connected” or “Not enabled for this institution”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio
可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio
可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio

Part of the module “Course Studio”.

Three conditions, all must be met#

Enabled — the switch in the feature catalogue is on for the tenant.
Access stored — the provider's key is set in the installation.
Connected — there is a route to this model in the house.

The reasons have a ranking: “switched off” beats everything (the administration has decided), then “not connected”, then “without access”. So the author always sees the reason they can pass on.

Who may do what#

Enable per tenant: the operator in the feature catalogue.
Choose: every workshop author among the enabled models.

提示#

If no model is chosen, the first selectable one in the priority list writes. That is not necessarily the model processed in the EU — whoever requires that enables only this one for the tenant.
The slide routes also reject a model that cannot be chosen if someone requests it directly — the same calculation decides in the display and in the check.
In the event of an outage the workshop only falls back to a model that can also be chosen for the tenant.

Workshop credits

运营方

A credit account per organisation for the workshop: balance, available models, price table per model and operation, latest bookings.

用途#

AI usage costs money. The credit makes visible what the workshop has used and what is still left.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationWorkshop credits

1Open “Workshop credits” in the administration's bar.
2At the top the balance with “Total credited” and “Total used” (图 1).
图 1 The balance with “Total credited” and “Total used”.
图 1 The balance with “Total credited” and “Total used”.
3“Models”: which models are connected — or “not connected (key missing)”. “Default” appears at the model that writes for this institution without a choice (the first selectable one in the priority list) (图 2).
图 2 “Models”: connected or not, and which one is the “Default” for this institution.
图 2 “Models”: connected or not, and which one is the “Default” for this institution.
4“Price table”: credits per operation (“Generate slide”, “Generate image”) and model (图 3).
图 3 The price table: credits per operation and model.
图 3 The price table: credits per operation and model.
5“Latest bookings”: time, operation, model, change in credits and balance afterwards.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：LernWerkstatt

Part of the module “Learning workshop”.

Who may do what#

The page requires the operator role; it shows the account of the organisation to which the signed-in account belongs.

提示#

The account is kept per organisation. An account without an organisation generates via the basic licence and does not charge any credit — the page says so.
Premium models and images cost more credits than the cheapest model (the fair-use tariff).

Explanatory graphics and images

教师

Graphics are created from the narration and reveal themselves in time with the voice-over — as text instead of pixels, hence translatable; images show a scene. Both only as a suggestion, never unasked.

用途#

A graphic that shows exactly what the speaker is talking about explains better than a full slide. And nothing should land on a slide that the author has not chosen.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseContentSlideGenerate graphic

1Write the narration first — the graphic follows its structure.
2Describe under “What should the graphic or image show?” (e.g. “Three profiles side by side, each with an icon and two keywords”) — or choose “Ideas for a graphic” or “Ideas for an image”. Without a description nothing is generated (图 1).
图 1 “What should the graphic or image show?” with the buttons for ideas, “Generate graphic” and “Generate image”.
图 1 “What should the graphic or image show?” with the buttons for ideas, “Generate graphic” and “Generate image”.
3“Generate graphic” (explanatory graphic from the narration) or “Generate image” (photo or image scene according to the description).
4The suggestion appears as a version: “Version n of m”, browse with ‹ and ›, “Accept” or “Discard”. Nothing changes on the slide until “Accept”.
5Set reveal markers in the narration at which the next element appears.
6In the new slide editor a graphic can be broken down to every label and edited freely.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Part of the module “Course Studio”.

Revealing in time with the voice#

An explanatory graphic consists of stages. Every stage appears at a marker ⟨r⟩ in the narration — without matching markers evenly over the speaking time. In the slide editor this can be dragged and reordered under “Build-up in time with the voice”.

Changing only markers leaves a finished video valid; whoever changes the spoken text invalidates the slide's video — it has to be created again, and that never happens by itself.

Translating#

When the slide is translated, the labels of the graphic are translated too — in one pass with the slide text.

Who may do what#

Every author of the course. A guard in the code ensures that no AI output gets onto the slide past the version bar.

提示#

The graphic explains and reveals along with the narration; it is translatable and stays sharp. The image shows — it is not translated along with it.
Even after accepting you can browse back to an earlier version with ‹; the versions stay in the browser, a reload does not eat them.
If a slide comes from the platform's kit and no longer shows the original graphic, the workshop offers “Restore original”.

Slide assistant: an avatar builds with you

教师

An avatar greets you when creating a new course, asks by voice or text about topic, audience, length, tone, material and language and builds the draft from it; in the editor it carries out requests such as “delete slide 3” or “more images” and — only with consent — learns how you work.

用途#

Building slides should feel like a conversation: say what you want instead of filling in forms. And next time it is faster, because the assistant remembers how you work.

使用方法#

1In the workshop under “New course”, tap the assistant at the bottom right. It greets you: “Ok, what kind of presentation shall we build?”
2Answer by microphone (only after clicking the microphone) or by keyboard: topic, audience, length, tone and form of address, material, language. For material, the workshop's file selection opens.
3Check and change the summary, then “Build draft”: the workshop creates the proposal as usual — with outline, target duration and direction.
4In the editor (step “Content”) tap the assistant and say or type what should change: “delete slide 3”, “make this slide shorter”, “more images”, “move slide 5 to the start”, “swap slide 2 and 4”, “headings blue”, “undo”.
5Every change is one step in the history of the deck; “Back” undoes it. If a sentence is unclear, the assistant asks; “delete” without a slide number asks first.
6“My working profile”: allow learning, view what was learned or delete the profile.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio

Switchable per tenant, on by default; part of the module “Course Studio”.
Assistant voice on or off (remembered in the browser); without voice the text is shown.
Learning only with consent, separately per person and organisation; deleting ends the learning.

Every request is a command#

A spoken or typed sentence is first interpreted and then turned into exactly one command of the slide core — the same route that mouse, keyboard and gestures take. That is why every change is in the history and can be undone with one step.

Content requests go through the workshop's revision; its result comes back as a single command.

What the assistant remembers#

Length, tone, form of address and language of the last drafts — pre-filled next time, and the assistant says what it has kept.
Preferred layouts and colours from your own decks.
Recurring corrections (“shorter”, “more images”) — they flow into the next draft as direction.

Only with explicit consent; only the person themselves sees the profile.

提示#

Only counts are learned: length, tone, form of address, language, preferred layouts, colours and recurring corrections — no slide texts and no topics.
Content requests (“shorter”, “more images”) use the same revision as in the workshop; finished videos are never regenerated.

Opening (“Setting the Scene”)

教师

One switch “Opening” per presentation: coffee talk, fun fact, question to the audience or short anecdote as a slide of its own, optionally bridges between chapters — suggested, checked and accepted by the author.

用途#

A warm opening picks up the audience before it gets technical — instead of jumping straight into the topic. Whether and how is up to the author.

使用方法#

1In the course under “Content”, open “Opening” at the top and switch on “Use an opening” (default: off).
2Choose the kind: coffee talk, fun fact, question to the audience or short anecdote; optionally “Bridges between chapters” and the audience.
3“Generate suggestion”: title, text on the slide and narration appear for editing, plus for each part a note on how a stated fact can be checked.
4“Accept” inserts the opening slide before the first slide and each bridge before its chapter; “Back” undoes it. “Discard” leaves everything as it was.
5Switch off: the accepted opening slides are removed again.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio

Switchable per tenant, on by default; one switch per presentation, default off.

The four kinds#

Coffee talk — a relaxed small-talk opening that picks up the audience.
Fun fact — a surprising, true and verifiable fact about the topic.
Question to the audience — a question to think about, without anyone having to answer.
Short anecdote — a general everyday story, without invented names, figures or quotes.

The suggestion invents no studies, figures or quotes; for every stated fact there is a note for the author on how to check it.

提示#

The opening slide is an ordinary slide: the avatar speaks it like any other, and the player orders its video as usual.

Speech workshop: writing speeches with finds

教师行政

A conversation by voice or text about occasion, role, audience, duration, tone, key message, venue, date, programme and participant list — from this the workshop suggests finds that are not obvious at first and weaves them into the speech with one click. With rehearsal, teleprompter, manuscript, cue cards and matching slides.

用途#

A good speech lives from what only this occasion has: people from thirty countries in the room, an international day on the same date, the sentence of the previous speaker. The workshop asks for these, finds such connections and says for each one where it comes from.

使用方法#

1Open the “Speech workshop”. At the bottom right the assistant asks about occasion, role, audience, duration, tone, key message, venue, date, programme, participant list and documents — by microphone (only after a click) or by keyboard. Everything also appears in the form on the left and can be changed there.
2Participant list as CSV, spreadsheet (.xlsx) or pasted text: it is condensed into counts in the browser straight away — countries, languages, sectors, roles, number of organisations. Names and e-mail addresses are not read, not stored and not passed on; the file never leaves the device.
3Finds on the right: a welcome in the languages in the room, countries and the mix of sectors, international days on the date, your own anniversaries, the venue as a stage, a link to the previous speaker, rhetorical figures, openings from “Setting the Scene” and closings. Every card names its source; anything to check before the speech is marked.
4“Weave in” places the card in the selected section, “Reroll” shows another version, “Discard” hides it. “More finds (AI)” asks the language model; these cards are labelled as AI suggestions.
5Write sections in the speech text and set emphasis (*word*), short and long pauses (/ and //) and effects: fade in, arrow, camera move — they later appear on the slide at exactly this point. The speaking time is shown per section and in total next to the target duration.
6Rehearsal: have your own figure read the speech in your own voice, or speak yourself and see words per minute and filler words.
7Output: full-screen teleprompter, manuscript and cue cards to print or save as PDF; “Slides for it” hands the speech to the workshop as a draft.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio

Switchable per tenant, on by default; part of the module “Course Studio”.
Speeches belong to the person: only they can see and change them, separately per organisation.
“Slides for it” appears only when the Course Studio is on for the organisation.

What remains of the participant list#

Countries as country code with count, languages with count (from a language column or derived from the countries).
Sectors and roles in fixed groups with count.
The number of organisations; by name only organisations with at least two people.

Names, e-mail addresses, phone numbers and all other columns are neither stored nor passed to a language model.

提示#

Mark gaps only you can fill in square brackets [ … ] — the teleprompter highlights them so none is forgotten.
Check greetings in other languages with native speakers beforehand; the card reminds you.
International days come from a fixed list (United Nations, UNESCO, Council of Europe, European Union); anniversaries only from your own input. Everything else is a suggestion to check.

Curriculum pipeline DACH

教师行政

Competence expectations of official curricula as curriculum nodes with a source reference: in the workshop the author attaches them to the learning objective of a slide; if a node changes, the check reports every linked content item.

用途#

“Faithful to the curriculum” is only a promise if every learning objective goes back to an official source, has been confirmed by a person and stays up to date.

使用方法#

操作路径WorkshopCourseContentSlideChoose curriculum reference

1Collection: 2,369 curriculum nodes in 80 cells (Bavaria grammar school grades 5–11, Hesse grammar school grades 5–10, canton of Aargau cantonal school, primary school grade 4 in Bavaria and Hesse) — each with the official wording, a paraphrase of its own and a source reference (document, section/page, address).
2Workshop → Content → slide: below the learning objective, “Choose curriculum reference”, search by country, school type, subject, grade and topic and pick the matching node.
3The reference is shown with its source, e.g. “Curriculum reference: BY Gym 7 Mathematik – Terme”, together with the node's approval status.
4The node identifier and fingerprint are stored. If a node changes, the slide shows “check the content”; the curriculum check reports all affected courses.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Kurs-Studio

The switch is off by default and is turned on per tenant.
Up to eight curriculum references per slide.

Four stages#

1 Official curriculum — the source, with document, version and source reference for each competence expectation.
2 Curriculum nodes with prerequisites — each with the official wording, a paraphrase of its own and a reference back to the place in the curriculum.
3 Confirmation — a node only counts as “confirmed” once it has been approved.
4 Change watch — every node carries a fingerprint; if it changes, linked learning objectives, slides and exam questions are reported as “to be checked”.

The prerequisites between nodes are the same kind of dependency that the competence diagnosis knows between competences.

Collection and origin#

The nodes were captured for the student app and adopted on 22.10.2026 as an unchanged, versioned copy — with an adoption log and a header file recording the source, version, count and the checksum of every file. There is no automatic synchronisation; a new version is adopted deliberately.

The official wording comes from the curricula of the German federal states and the Swiss cantons; the source reference is on every node. The paraphrase in our own words is not an official text.

Bavaria, grammar school, grades 5–11
Hesse, grammar school, grades 5–10
Canton of Aargau, cantonal school
Primary school grade 4 in Bavaria and Hesse

提示#

A reference to a draft is allowed and explicitly marked as such — it is not presented as confirmed.
The same principle applies in the competence diagnosis: AI may suggest, only what a person has approved takes effect.

第 6 章

Stage

The new slide editor, in which every element is handled directly on the slide, plus presenting, speaker spot, presenter view and the zoom canvas.

New slide editor (“Stage”)

教师

Edit slides directly on the slide: grab, move, rotate, align every element — with history, named versions and the original, to which you can return at any time.

用途#

A slide should be editable as in a good presentation program — large, direct, without forms. And nothing should get lost: every step is in the history, even abandoned states.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseContentSlidesEdit large

1In the workshop under “Content” → “Slides” choose a slide and open “Edit large” (图 1).
图 1 Stage with a slide in the workshop, with toolbar and “Edit large”.
图 1 Stage with a slide in the workshop, with toolbar and “Edit large”.
2Click an element: on the right the design bar appears (shape, fill, corners, opacity, rotation, layers, align, distribute, group).
3Double-click on text: type. Dragging moves, the eight handles scale, the round handle rotates (with Shift in 15° steps).
4At the top “Insert”: heading, text box, shapes (rectangle, rounded, circle, triangle, arrow, line), upload image, generate image or graphic, beam from phone, video, speaker spot, several speakers, layers, camera path (图 2).
图 2 “Insert”: heading, text box, shapes, image, graphic, beam from phone, video, speaker spot, layers and camera path.
图 2 “Insert”: heading, text box, shapes, image, graphic, beam from phone, video, speaker spot, layers and camera path.
5“History and versions”: steps back and forward, name and save a version, jump to an earlier state, “Original” or “Back to template”.
6“Done” closes Stage; saving happens on closing.
7“Slide deck” (at the top of the workshop or in Stage, Ctrl/⌘+F) opens the bar for all slides on the right: chapters and table of contents, find & replace (图 3).
图 3 The bar “Slide deck”: slides in chapters, collapsible, with “Suggest chapters” and “Insert table of contents”.
图 3 The bar “Slide deck”: slides in chapters, collapsible, with “Suggest chapters” and “Insert table of contents”.
8After a design change, “Apply to other slides” below the design bar offers to transfer it to selected slides, the whole chapter or all slides — with “affects n slides” beforehand.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio

Off: the previous editor of the free surface (fallback).
Part of the module “Course Studio”.

What can be on a slide#

Text (heading, text box) with font, border and alignment
Image — show whole, fill or stretch; crop; replace
Video — starts by itself, loop, with sound
Graphic — can also be broken down to every label (“Ungroup”, “Break apart completely”)
Shape — rectangle, ellipse, triangle, arrow, line, with fill and corner rounding
Speaker spot — at most one per slide; frame shape circle, rounded, rectangle or without frame
Guests — further speakers with their own figure and their own spot (see “Several speakers”)

A slide carries at most 40 elements.

History: nothing gets lost#

Every step is in the history with an understandable name (“Moved”, “Resized”, “Suggestion accepted”). Named versions save a state permanently. Whoever goes back and does something new does not lose the old path: it is preserved as an “abandoned state” and can be restored.

“Original” shows the slide as it looked when first opened; “Back to template” turns a converted slide back into the original template — this too can be undone.

AI only as a suggestion#

A generated image or graphic appears in the suggestion window, not on the slide. Several suggestions can be browsed; only “Accept” (or “Replace selected”) inserts it. A guard in the code ensures that no AI output gets onto the slide past this point.

Every edit is a command#

At the core of the editor a slide changes at one single point only: through a command in a plain, storable format, such as “move element 3 by 5 percent to the right”. Mouse, finger and keyboard translate their input into such commands.

This has two consequences: for every state the history also stores the command that led to it, and a second device can replay the same commands and arrives at the same state. New input routes — gesture in front of the camera, phone as a remote control, voice, second screen — therefore need no new core.

The core is a self-contained module without ties to courses, roles or database.

What you see, learners see too#

Stage draws a slide with the same building blocks as the course player. A guard checks that editor and player deliver the same rendering — no surprises after publishing.

Older slides with text in fixed pixels also look in the large editor as they do in the player: the editor calculates as if the slide were running in the player. Nothing changes in the course itself.

Triangle and arrow come out of the export as slide deck and as PDF as triangle and arrow, styled words with their styling.

Styling individual words#

Double-clicking a text opens typing directly on the slide. Above it is a small bar: select words, then bold, italic, underlined, colour, smaller or larger. Without a selection the choice applies to the whole text; “Normal” removes the styling of the selected words.

Older tools continue to see the text as a whole. If they change it, the slide shows the new text plainly — never an outdated one.

Camera path: drag, timeline, test run#

“Insert” → “Camera path” opens the stops. On the slide a stop is moved at its edge or its number and dragged larger or smaller at its corners; it keeps the aspect ratio of the slide.

The timeline shows when the camera moves to which point — as in the player at the markers ⟨r⟩ in the narration, without matching markers evenly over the speaking time. “Test run” plays the path (space: pause, arrows: next/previous stop, Esc: close).

Build-up in time with the voice#

Below the slide the bar “Build-up in time with the voice” can be expanded. At the top the narration as a timeline with its markers ⟨r⟩: drag a marker to another position (it jumps to the next word start), double-click sets a new one, × removes it. The spoken text stays the same — finished videos remain valid.

Below it the stages of the elements, as the player plays them: every stage appears at its share of the speaking time. Drag an element into another stage or move it with ‹ ›; “Automatic again” returns to the reading-order sequence.

Several speakers on one slide#

“Insert” → “Several speakers”: create speakers, choose a figure and give them a spot with “Place spot on the slide”, which can be moved and scaled on the slide. A speaker with their own figure is a guest; they stand at their spot in the player and in the presentation.

Under “Who speaks which sentence” every sentence of the narration is assigned to a speaker. “Videos per section” shows the sequence of sections with the status of their videos; there the selected sections are ordered on request (see “Several speakers on one slide” under “Workshop”).

Every face speaks only with its own voice. As long as not every section of a slide has a finished video, the course's speaker speaks the whole slide, and a guest appears as a still image at their spot. Finished videos are never re-created automatically.

History on every device#

History and saved versions of a slide are also saved on the server. So you find on the tablet what you saved on the laptop; the more recent state applies, nothing of the older one is lost (“State from another device”). If the corresponding database extension is missing on an installation, the history stays in the device's browser.

Chapters and table of contents#

The bar “Slide deck” lists all slides of the course, organised into chapters; every chapter can be collapsed. “Chapter from here” on a slide starts a chapter, a double-click on the name renames it, the arrows move it together with its slides (within a module), × dissolves it — the slides remain. The arrows on the first and last slide of a chapter pass it to the neighbouring chapter.

“Suggest chapters” reads the modules or the slide titles (numbered titles, the same prefix such as “GDPR: …”) and shows a suggestion. Only “Accept” creates the chapters.

“Insert table of contents” creates a slide with the chapters (or slides, or both) and their slide numbers. It is updated with every change to titles, chapters and order and marked as “Contents” in the list; heading, font and colour stay as the author sets them. “Detach” turns it into an ordinary slide. With up to four entries it gets jump buttons to the chapters in the course; in the export (slide deck, PDF) it appears with text and numbers.

The presentation does not jump when an entry is clicked; there you page through as usual. The numbers count the whole course — whoever exports only individual modules sees the course's numbers.

Find and replace across all slides#

Search in slide text, titles, narration and intent/notes — each selectable —, with match case and “whole words only”, in all slides, one chapter or the ticked slides. The hit list shows slide and context; “Replace” replaces one hit, “Replace all” all of them in one step, which “Undo” in the bar reverses completely.

Styled words keep their styling, the markers ⟨r⟩ in the narration stay where they are, and slides from templates remain templates. If a narration changes, finished videos are not regenerated; a recording with old text appears as outdated under “Publish”.

Apply to other slides#

Below the design bar is “Apply to other slides”. What: the last design change (e.g. colour of the title — it then applies to the title of every slide, likewise for text, header and footer, speaker, image, shape), the entire design of the selected element, the background, the speaker spot, the logo or the transition. Where: only this slide, selected slides, whole chapter or all slides. Beforehand it says how many slides are affected.

Slides that deviate by hand remain unchanged unless “Also overwrite deviating ones” is ticked. Slides from templates without a matching element also stay as they are. Every application is one step and can be undone in the bar “Slide deck”.

What the history contains#

Types: original, saved version, abandoned state, suggestion.
Steps with names, including: Moved, Resized, Rotated, Design changed, Aligned, Distributed, Layer changed, Inserted, Deleted, Duplicated, Grouped, Text changed, Graphic broken apart, Image replaced, Suggestion accepted, Beam photo, Figure chosen, Speaker changed, Camera path changed, Build-up changed, Changed from outside.
“Restore” brings back a state, “Delete version” removes a saved version.

Who may do what#

Every author of the course in the workshop. If the feature “New slide editor” is off for the tenant, “Edit large” opens the previous editor of the free surface.

提示#

Keys: click selects · Shift+click or dragging a frame selects several · arrow keys move (further with Shift) · Ctrl/⌘+Z back, Ctrl/⌘+Y forward · Ctrl/⌘+D duplicate · Del deletes · Alt suspends snapping.
When dragging, the element snaps to edges and centres of the slide and of the other elements; guide lines show what it snaps to.
A slide from a template is converted into freely movable elements on the first change — the original is preserved.
Rotated elements snap to elements with the same tilt — a slanted guide line shows the common edge. When rotating, the angle snaps to the tilt of the other elements.
In text: select words and choose bold, italic, underlined, colour or size in the small bar above (Ctrl/⌘+B, I, U).
Across all slides: Ctrl/⌘+F find, Ctrl/⌘+H (on the Mac also ⌥⌘F) replace; Enter jumps to the next hit, in the replace field Enter replaces this hit and Ctrl/⌘+Enter all. Esc closes the bar.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动创建试用账号，一天后自动删除，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Interactive slides: levers, sliders, scenarios

教师

Sliders and levers on the slide change everything bound to them live — numbers, bars, markers, colours, visibility. Operable while presenting with mouse, finger, keyboard, from the phone, by voice and with gestures.

用途#

A slide with key figures should not only show but answer: “What if the contribution margin falls?” Instead of a second slide you move the slider — break-even tile, marker on the timeline, payback period and footnote move along.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseContentSlidesEdit largeInsertLevers & sliders

1In the slide editor under “Insert” → “Interactive” → “Levers & sliders” open the panel.
2“+ Lever”: define name (for formulas), display name, minimum, maximum, step, start value, unit and format; the slider next to it shows the value immediately.
3“+ Formula”: derived quantities such as “breakeven = kosten / db” — the value is shown live next to it, errors (e.g. circular reference) in red instead of a crash.
4Select an element on the slide → in the design bar “Bind to lever” (or in the panel “Bind selected element”) → choose the property → set expression and mapping.
5“Insert control” (slider, rotary knob, plus/minus, toggle, choice chips, number field) or “Insert chart” (bar, line, pie with expressions as data points).
6Scenarios: “Current values as scenario”, rename, mark as plan with ★; “Back to plan” leads there. Scenarios cross-fade softly.
7Quick start: template “Business model (interactive)” — key figure tiles, timeline with break-even marker, sliders and scenarios.
8Presenting: operate sliders on the slide; in the presenter view the lever console has all sliders, scenarios, undo, voice command, camera gestures and “Phone as remote control” (QR code).

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio

Switchable per tenant (feature “Interactive slides”, default on). Off: slides show their saved values, nothing is operable, the “Levers” panel is missing, the phone page does not respond.
Part of the module “Course Studio”.

Levers and formulas#

A lever is a number with a range and a grid (e.g. contribution margin 200–900 €, step 10). Formulas calculate further from it and may build on each other. A formula that needs itself by a detour is reported as a “circular reference” — the slide then shows a warning sign instead of a number, nothing crashes.

Formulas are never executed as program code: a small calculator of its own knows only numbers, names and the functions listed. A guard in the code ensures this.

Renaming a lever carries through everywhere: formulas, scenarios, bindings, controls and charts.

What can be bound#

Text with placeholders (numbers visibly count along when changing)
Position left/top — e.g. a marker on a scale between minimum and maximum
Width/height — bars and progress bars
Rotation — pointers and gauge needles
Opacity and visibility — show or hide from a threshold
Fill, text, background and border colour — as a gradient between two colours or with a threshold (below X red, otherwise green)
Font size and border width
Emphasis: the element pulses while a condition holds

Mappings: “Value directly”, “Range → range” (e.g. 136 … 1,400 participants → 10 … 90 % of the slide width), “Gradient”, “Threshold”.

Presenting live: console, phone, voice, gestures#

Every operation — slider, console, phone, voice command, gesture — is the same command at the core of the editor. That is why there is “Undo” everywhere, and audience window, presenter view and phone show the same state.

Phone: in the presenter view choose “Phone as remote control” and scan the QR code. The phone needs no sign-in; the random address is the key. Only lever names and numbers are transmitted.

Voice: recognition via the platform's EU service; without it there is no fallback to another service. Camera gestures: only after being explicitly switched on, evaluated only in the browser — no image leaves the device.

Limits#

At most 24 levers, 40 formulas and 8 scenarios per slide; expressions up to 500 characters.
PPTX and PDF export show the saved state as a still image.
The camera only recognises the fist with the hand model on its own server; without it, up, down and swipe work.
Fellow learners in “Live co-learning” see the slide with their own sliders, not the presenter's values.

提示#

Placeholders in text: {{breakeven|≈0}} inserts the value; after the bar the format — “0 €” (7,500 €), “≈0” (≈ 310), “T0 T€” (172 k€), “1 %”, “/10” rounds to tens, “+0” shows the sign.
Formulas: + − × ÷ ^, brackets, min, max, round (runden), round up (aufrunden), round down (abrunden), abs, square root (wurzel), clamp (begrenzen), sum (summe), mean (mittel), if (wenn(condition; then; else)), comparisons, and/or/not.
Voice (button “Speak” in the console): “contribution margin to 600”, “fee plus 50”, “costs minus 10 percent”, “scenario ambitious”, “back to plan”, “undo” — in German and English.
Gestures: hand up/down changes the selected lever, swiping selects the next lever (then the scenarios), fist holds, open hand releases. On the screen: drag vertically with two fingers or swipe horizontally.
Nothing is saved while presenting: the values apply until “Back to plan” or reloading. Values set in the editor are saved.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动创建试用账号，一天后自动删除，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

What-if: try it yourself, with a comment

教师学生

Learners move the sliders of an interactive slide themselves and, on “What does this mean?”, hear the matching pre-produced comment of the avatar on their scenario.

用途#

Experimental learning: what happens to the labour market, contributions and economic output if the retirement age rises but many leave earlier? The slide recalculates — and the avatar puts the chosen setting into context: what it shows, what to keep in mind and what it can trigger.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseContentSlidesEdit largeInsertLevers & slidersComment cases

1In the slide editor open the “Levers” panel (Insert → Interactive → Levers & sliders) and create levers, formulas and sliders — or choose the template “Pension reform (what-if)”.
2In the section “Comment cases” add a case with “+ Case”: title, condition (e.g. rentenalter >= 70 and frueh > 30), priority, spoken text and, if desired, a speaker of the slide. Below the condition it says live whether it matches the current values.
3“Add fallback “otherwise””: the comment when no case matches.
4“Check cases” calculates a grid across all slider ranges and reports combinations that only end up in the fallback, and cases that never apply.
5“AI: suggest cases” delivers four to eight cautiously worded cases from the slide content and levers — as a suggestion. Only “Accept selected” changes the slide.
6“Videos of the cases”: select cases, check the estimated compute minutes, “Order videos” and “Yes, order”. Publish first and approve the slide.
7In the course: above the slide there is “Try it yourself” (with a short hint on first appearance), next to it “Back to starting values” and “What does this mean?” — the avatar speaks the matching case, with subtitles.
8Presenting: in the presenter view the lever console contains “Comment on this scenario”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio
可按租户开关默认：关模块：Kurs-Studio

Switchable per tenant (feature “What-if with comment”, default on). Off: no “What does this mean?” in the course and in the presenter view, no “Comment cases” section in the editor.
“Ask the lecturer about your scenario” is a feature of its own (default off): an answer marked as AI with the set values as context.
Part of the module “Course Studio”.

What happens on a click on “What does this mean?”#

From the values the learner has just set, the core of the editor calculates the matching case — always the same: same values, same case. A faulty condition never matches; it never brings a wrong comment.

If the finished video of the case exists in the language of the voice, it plays in the avatar bubble with subtitles; the slide pauses meanwhile and continues afterwards. Otherwise the course voice speaks the text — with a fixed maximum per session, the same text coming from memory.

Only which case was triggered and how it played (video, voice, text) is recorded — as a learning event. The slider values are not stored.

The template “Pension reform (what-if)”#

Four sliders: retirement age (63–75), share retiring early, employment rate of 60- to 74-year-olds, skilled immigration. From these: labour force, skills gap, contribution rate trend and a rough GDP effect, plus a bar chart of what each lever contributes.

The formulas are explicitly a simplified learning model, not a forecast — this is stated on the slide and in the footnote with all assumptions. Six comment cases and a fallback are worded cautiously and factually, without party names.

提示#

Cases are checked by priority (higher first), on a tie in list order; the first matching case wins. So specific cases get the higher priority.
Conditions know the same signs as formulas: comparisons, and/or/not, min, max, clamp … and read levers as well as formulas.
A changed spoken text makes the case's video “outdated”. It stays until it is explicitly ordered again — nothing is re-rendered by itself.
Without a finished video the course voice speaks the case's text live; once the session's quota is reached, the text appears as subtitles without sound.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动创建试用账号，一天后自动删除，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Live source: the phone streams into the slide

教师

A phone's camera, screen, photo or video appears live on the slide — with sound, directly from device to device, without recording. Paired via QR code, accepted by the presenter.

用途#

An experiment on the lab bench, a sketch on paper, a guest in the room, a video from the phone: instead of holding the phone under a camera or sending files back and forth, its image appears exactly in the spot the slide provides for it — and can be pulled across the whole slide on request.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseContentSlidesEdit largeInsertLive source (phone)

1In the slide editor under “Insert” → “Media” → “Live source (phone)” open the panel and choose “Insert live source”.
2Move and scale the spot like any element; in the panel set aspect ratio (free, 16:9, 4:3, 1:1, 9:16, 3:4), show image whole or fill, corners, border, background, label of the placeholder, sound, volume and mirroring.
3Presenting: in the presenter view, below the lever console, is the console “Live sources” — “Pair phone” shows a QR code (only there, not on the projector). Without a presenter view: “Live sources” at the bottom left of the presentation.
4On the phone scan the QR code, confirm the data protection notice, choose the source (camera rear/front, screen, photo or video, sound only), microphone on or off, “Request to send”.
5The presenter sees “… would like to send live” — “Accept” or “Decline”. Only after accepting does an image go out.
6Live: sound on/off, volume, mirror, “Full screen” (the source covers the slide), “Back to slide”, “Disconnect”. The same by voice and with camera gestures. On the phone the source can be changed at any time without pairing again.
7In the editor the same pairing works as a preview (without sound) — in the panel “Live source” under the settings of the selected spot.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio

Switchable per tenant (feature “Phone stream in slides”, default on). Off: live sources only show their placeholder, the panel is missing in the editor, the phone page does not respond.
Part of the module “Course Studio”.
For connections across firewalls the operation needs a relay server (TURN, environment `STREAM_TURN_URLS` and `STREAM_TURN_SECRET`). Without it, it works reliably on the same Wi-Fi, but not always via mobile networks and strict networks — the interface then says so.

How the connection is made#

The QR code contains a random, short-lived room code. The phone registers in this room and makes a request; the presenter sees the name of the device and accepts or declines. Only then do audience window and presenter view contact the phone, and it builds a direct connection to each of them.

Image and sound go from device to device (WebRTC, encrypted). Only the brokering runs via the platform's server: who requests, who accepts, how the devices reach each other. There is no table for it and no recording.

Every movement is a command at the core of the editor — pairing, accepting, sound, volume, mirroring, full screen, disconnecting —, whether by button, voice, gesture or from a second window. That is why audience window and presenter view always show the same state.

Data protection#

On the phone a consent notice appears before the first image: what is sent, where to, and that nothing is stored.
Nothing is recorded — neither on the phone nor in the presentation nor on the server. A guard in the code ensures this.
If the presentation records itself (video export), the live source stays as the placeholder.
Only the presenter sees the QR code (in the presentation only after a click); every device must be accepted and can be disconnected at any time — from both sides.
A routing server (STUN) only learns the public address of the devices; a relay server (TURN), if set up, passes on the encrypted stream without being able to read it.

Limits#

Without a relay server (TURN) some networks fail (university Wi-Fi with device isolation, mobile networks). What helps then: put both devices on the same Wi-Fi.
Screen sharing only on a computer; not in the browser on phones and tablets.
The sound only plays in the audience window; without an open audience window the sound is muted. If the browser only allows sound after a click, “Turn on sound” appears on the source.
PPTX and PDF export show a named spot instead of the live image; the course player shows the placeholder.
Voice commands understand German and English.

提示#

Several phones: one per live source. The same identifier (q1, q2 …) on several slides is the same source — it stays connected when the slide changes.
The sound only plays in the audience window. The presenter view and the editor show the image muted — otherwise there would be echo. Microphone and loudspeaker in the same room: keep the volume moderate, keep your distance.
Voice: “connect phone”, “mute”, “unmute”, “louder”, “quieter”, “full screen”, “full screen off” / “back to slide”, “mirror”, “disconnect phone”; with number or label (“source 2 full screen”, “board mute”) — in English and German.
Gestures (camera gestures in the console): hand up = full screen, down = back to slide, swipe = next connected source in full screen, fist = mute, open hand = unmute.
Screen sharing works in the browser on a computer (e.g. to include a second laptop). On phones and tablets the browser cannot share a screen — that comes with the apps. Photo or video from the phone works everywhere.
If the code has expired (after 15 minutes without a request), simply pair again. A phone that is already connected stays connected.

Speaker spot

教师

Decide slide by slide where and how large the speaker stands — and whether at all. The calculation makes a suggestion, the author approves.

用途#

A calculated spot varies between “covers the key figure” and “postage-stamp-sized at the edge”. That is why the calculation remains a suggestion; what applies is decided by the author per slide.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseSpeakers & InteractionPlacing

1In the workshop open “Speakers & Interaction” → “Placing”.
2“Where does the speaker stand on this slide?” — choose a template: bubble top right, bottom right, bottom left; half figure right or left; in a frame on the right; large right, left or in the centre; without speaker (图 1).
图 1 “Where does the speaker stand on this slide?”: the templates from the bubble to “without speaker”, below them style and shape.
图 1 “Where does the speaker stand on this slide?”: the templates from the bubble to “without speaker”, below them style and shape.
3Under “Details” change style (bubble, half figure, large) and shape (circle, rounded, rectangle, cut out).
4Drag the speaker freely and change its size; logo and elements can also be moved for this slide.
5“Approve & next” — after the last slide “Approve & done” leads to publishing.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The suggestion and its reasoning#

For every slide the workshop calculates a spot from the slide's elements — for graphics from what is actually drawn — and gives the reason in one sentence:

“The slide has its own placeholder for the speaker.”
“Little content on this slide — the speaker may stand large next to it.”
“Free space for a bubble of … % width — the slide stays whole.”
“The slide is full — the content moves to the left, the speaker stands next to it and covers nothing.”

Slides without their own decision use this suggestion. That is a finished state: with hundreds of slides nobody has to set each one individually.

Styles and shapes#

Bubble — small round speaker, the slide stays whole.
Half figure — cut out next to the content; the slide moves to the side. Also “in a frame”: half figure in a rounded box with background.
Large — over the full height on the right, left or in front of the slide in the centre (for titles and transitions).
Without speaker — on this slide only the voice.
Shapes: circle, rounded, rectangle, cut out; plus a crop of the figure.

Phone and tablet#

There is a separate layout for small screens. A handle shrinks the slide (down to 35 percent) so that the speaker has room next to it; the setting is saved separately.

提示#

Guide lines and snapping can be switched off individually (off = move freely). Four small markers on the axes of the bubble show its centre.
Your own guide lines are created where the bubble currently stands and belong to the slide deck — so the speaker always stands in the same place across many slides and sessions.
The dashed image area shows where the speaker is visible in the video.
Arrow keys move finely; the box may go beyond the edge, the crop trims it as in the player.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动创建试用账号，一天后自动删除，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Presenting

教师

Have the course presented in full screen with speaker — live in front of an audience or recorded as a video.

用途#

A course is also a talk: in the lecture, at the conference, in the meeting. The presentation shows slide and speaker without workshop bars.

使用方法#

操作路径CoursePublishPresentPresentation

1Open “Publish” → “Present” → “Presentation”.
2Page through with the arrow keys or the buttons at the edge; switch full screen on and off; background music on or off (it gets quieter during speech).
3Show or hide the speaker cameo.
4Export as video: choose the scope (one video in one piece or one per module), with or without speaker sound, then “Start recording”. In the browser's sharing dialog choose this tab and the tab audio (图 1).
图 1 “Export as video”: the three steps of the recording, scope (in one piece or per module) and speaker sound.
图 1 “Export as video”: the three steps of the recording, scope (in one piece or per module) and speaker sound.
5“To the course” leads back to the workshop.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

How a video is made#

The presentation runs through automatically; the speaker reads every slide.
Slides with a pre-produced video play it, the others speak live with the figure's voice.
The browser tab is recorded including sound; the result is an MP4 or WebM file, depending on the browser.
A video in one piece contains title, agenda and closing image.

提示#

During recording a window shows progress, remaining time and the voice costs so far; slides with a finished video cost nothing. Esc cancels.
Every finished file is saved immediately; with one video per module several files are created.
The presentation covers the platform's header and control buttons — nothing overlays the slide.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动创建试用账号，一天后自动删除，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Presenter view

教师

The presenter's private view: current and next slide, narration as a note, laser and pen, rehearsal against the schedule — and save changes to the text directly.

用途#

Whoever presents themselves needs their notes and wants to see the next step without the audience seeing it. And they want to know beforehand whether the time is enough.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseSpeakers & InteractionPlacingPresenter view

1In the workshop open “Speakers & Interaction” → “Placing” and choose “Presenter view” at the top next to the heading.
2“Open presentation” opens the window for the audience — drag it to the second screen. It follows every movement of the presenter view.
3Page with → , space or Page Down, or ← and Page Up. At the top “Slide n of m”; on the last slide “Last slide — end of the presentation.”
4“Laser” points at something, “Pen” draws on the slide (colour and size selectable); “Clear drawing” tidies up. The drawing disappears when paging (图 1).
图 1 The presenter view: the current slide with laser, pen, colours and “Slide n of m”.
图 1 The presenter view: the current slide with laser, pen, colours and “Slide n of m”.
5On the right the “Narration”: change and save it; “AI text” writes it to match the slide — with “Tone” (factual, lively, concise) and “Length” (short, medium, long) (图 2).
图 2 On the right the next slide and the narration for editing, with “AI text”, tone and length.
图 2 On the right the next slide and the narration for editing, with “AI text”, tone and length.
6“Rehearsal”: measures the actual time per slide against the speaking time plan; “Reset timer” starts again. The result shows actual and planned per slide, the total and the target in minutes.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Part of the module “Course Studio”.

Two browser views, one talk#

Presenter view and presentation talk to each other in the same browser: when the presenter pages, the audience window pages along. Notes, rehearsal and next slide are seen only by the presenter.

The rehearsal#

Actual — the measured time per slide
Plan — the planned speaking time from the narration
Total and target in minutes
“Again” starts a new run

Who may do what#

Every author of the course; the page requires signing in.

提示#

The slide loses nothing when the narration is saved. A changed spoken text invalidates a finished video of the slide — it is never re-created by itself.
Slides that have not yet been worked out are marked as such (“This slide has not yet been worked out.”).
“Cockpit” or “Back to the studio” leads back into the workshop.

Zoom canvas and camera path

教师

The whole course as one large surface, the presentation as a flight from stop to stop — and within a slide stops that are zoomed in one after another in time with the voice.

用途#

Show connections: first the whole, then the detail. The canvas makes the structure of a course visible, the camera path directs attention to what is being talked about.

使用方法#

操作路径CoursePublishPresentAs zoom canvas

1Open “Publish” → “Present” → “As zoom canvas” (also from the workshop cockpit).
2Choose “Mode”: “Presentation” or “Arrange”.
3Presentation: “Play” flies the path, at every slide the speaker speaks. Whoever zooms or pans themselves stops it; “Next (→)” continues, “Overview (O)” shows the whole course, “Full screen (F)”.
4Arrange: clicking a slide selects it (several with Shift), dragging moves, the round handle changes the size; fine-tune “Size” and “Rotation”; “Arrangement” circle, row or spiral; choose “Background” (图 1).
图 1 The toolbar of the zoom canvas: arrangement, size, rotation, background and the path.
图 1 The toolbar of the zoom canvas: arrangement, size, rotation, background and the path.
5Maintain the “Path”: insert selected slides as a stop (“Slide”), show several together (“Group”), zoom into a detail (“Section”) or “Default” (overview → per module overview and slides → overview). Order stops with “Up”/“Down” or remove them.
6“Save this canvas” — the header shows “saved” with the time or “Suggestion — not yet saved”.
7Camera path within a slide: in the slide editor “Insert” → “Camera path” (see below).

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Part of the module “Course Studio”; the camera path belongs to the new slide editor.

Kinds of stops#

Overview — the whole course
Slide — one slide
Group — several slides together
Section — a detail of a slide that is zoomed into

Camera path within a slide#

In the slide editor “Insert” → “Camera path”: add “Stop around the selection” or “Whole slide”; without stops the slide stays still.
On the slide drag a stop at its edge or its number, drag a corner to make it larger or smaller — it keeps the aspect ratio of the slide.
In the list “Earlier”, “Later” or “Delete stop”.
The “Camera path timeline” shows when the camera moves to which point: at the markers ⟨r⟩ in the narration; without matching markers evenly over the speaking time; without narration 2.5 seconds per stop.
“Test run” plays the path — space pauses, arrows jump from stop to stop, Esc closes.

The timing of the stops follows the same rule as the build-ups in the player (markers ⟨r⟩ in the narration); a guard compares the editor's calculation with the player's.

Who may do what#

Every author of the course; the canvas requires signing in and saves per course.

提示#

Keys of the canvas: ← and → (or Page Up/Down) for previous and next stop, Home or O for the overview, F for full screen; in presentation mode also the space bar.
Dragging an empty area pans, the mouse wheel zooms. A click on a stop in the list flies there; new stops are inserted after the marked one.
Background music gets quieter during speech.

Beam from phone

教师

Take a photo with the phone and throw it directly onto the slide — via QR code, without cables and without signing in on the phone.

用途#

A sketch on paper, a board drawing, an object: what lies in front of you is on the slide within seconds.

使用方法#

操作路径Slide editorInsertBeam (phone)

1In the slide editor choose “Insert” → “Beam (phone)” (in the workshop also in the box “Sources” under “BEAM” → “Start BEAM”) (图 1).
图 1 The box “Sources” with “Start BEAM”: photos from the phone directly onto the slide.
图 1 The box “Sources” with “Start BEAM”: photos from the phone directly onto the slide.
2Drag the dashed beam frame to where the photo should land and drag it to size.
3Scan the QR code with the phone. A page opens on the phone: “📷 Choose / take photo”.
4The photo appears in the frame; on the phone it says “Sent!” — further photos can be sent afterwards.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Part of the module “Course Studio”.

Why this is safe without signing in on the phone#

The QR code carries a short-lived token signed by the server. It is the permission — nothing more: whoever has it can send photos for this one session but read nothing. After 15 minutes it is worthless.

Who may do what#

Start: the signed-in author in the editor. Send: whoever scans the QR code while it is valid.

提示#

The link is only valid briefly (15 minutes) and is bound to the editor session that is currently open; afterwards simply start a new beam.
In the editor's history a beamed photo appears as a step of its own (“Beam photo”) — it can be undone like any other change.

Voice and gestures in the slide editor

教师

Edit slides by voice command and with gestures in front of the camera — “to the right”, “undo”, “new heading”; swiping in the air moves the selected element.

用途#

Whoever stands in front of an audience or does not have their hands free cannot always reach mouse and keyboard. Because every edit is a command at the core, the new input route needs no new editor: voice and gesture trigger exactly the commands that mouse and keyboard trigger.

使用方法#

操作路径Slide editorVoice / Gestures

1In the slide editor press “Voice” at the top right, say a sentence and press again (after eight seconds it stops listening by itself).
2German and English are understood: “undo”, “redo”, “to the right”, “three to the left”, “new heading”, “insert text”, “delete”, “duplicate”, “group”, “bring to front”, “align left”, “centre”, “element 2”, “next”.
3What was not understood is shown by the editor with the sentence it heard — nothing happens then.
4Press “Gestures”, read the notice and “Turn on camera”: swiping left, right, up or down moves the selected element, the open hand undoes the last step, the fist selects the next element.
5“Gestures off” switches the camera off immediately.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio

Part of the module “Course Studio”; switchable per tenant.

How it works#

The spoken sentence goes via the platform's speech recognition (EU, without falling back to services outside the EU) back to the editor. There the core turns it into an intent — the same one a key triggers — and the editor executes it as a command, with history and “undo”.

The camera is evaluated only in the browser; no image leaves the device, nothing is stored.

Further input routes of Stage#

When presenting interactive slides: levers by voice, camera gesture and phone as console (see “Interactive slides”)
Stream phone camera, screen or video live into the slide (see “Phone stream”)
Phone photo directly onto the slide (see “Beam”)

A second device can co-edit the same slide — see “A second device edits along”.

Who may do what#

Whoever may edit the slide in the editor may also do so by voice and gesture — there are no additional rights and no way around the editor's rights.

提示#

Without a number, “to the right” moves by five percent of the slide width, like the arrow key with Shift; more than half a slide at once is capped as a mishearing.
“Insert” alone inserts what was copied before; “insert text” creates a new text box.
Without a hand model on the server the camera only recognises movements (up, down, left, right) — not the fist and the open hand then.

A second device edits along (“Dual Canvas”)

教师

Pair a tablet or phone with the slide editor via QR code: it shows the slide, moves, deletes and duplicates elements and throws text onto the slide.

用途#

In front of an audience you do not stand at the computer. With a paired second device the slide can be built further from your hand without touching the computer.

使用方法#

操作路径Slide editorSecond device

1In the slide editor choose “Second device” at the top right; a QR code appears.
2Open the QR code with the tablet or phone. The device makes a request; in the editor “… would like to edit along” appears with “Accept” and “Decline”.
3After “Accept” the device shows the slide. Tapping selects an element, dragging moves it; the buttons delete, duplicate, bring to front, undo and redo.
4At the bottom write a text and “Throw onto the slide” — it lands as a new text box on the slide in the editor.
5“Disconnect” ends the pairing for one device, “End pairing” for all.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kurs-Studio

Part of the module “Course Studio”; switchable per tenant.

How it works#

Every edit is a command at the core. The second device sends commands — the same ones mouse and keyboard trigger — and states the state it was working on. The editor only executes a command if the device is accepted, the kind is allowed and the state is still current; afterwards it is in the history like any other step.

The connection runs via a broadcast channel without a table; only the state of the slide and commands go over the line, no personal data. The random room identifier in the QR code is the key.

What the second device may do#

move, scale, rotate, delete, duplicate, layer, align, change text
throw text onto the slide (text boxes only)
undo and redo in the editor's history
not: speakers, levers, chapters, live sources and templates — that stays in the editor

Who may do what#

Whoever is editing the slide in the editor can pair. The second device needs no account but may only see or do something after explicit acceptance; when the editor closes, the pairing ends.

提示#

The editor is the truth: if the slide has just changed there, an action from the second device is discarded and the device gets the new state — then simply do it again.
Up to three devices at the same time; each must be accepted individually.
Images from the phone continue to come onto the slide via Beam.

Impact

教师行政

For every piece of content you publish, see how often it was opened, how long each slide was viewed, where viewers leave, on which devices (down to operating system and version), in which countries, regions and cities and at what time of day — plus engagement, a live view, notifications when personal links are opened, a PDF report and an API. Counted anonymously, without storing anything on viewers' devices, small groups combined.

用途#

Whoever sends a presentation, offers a course or shares a message wants to know what lands: which slide holds people, where they stop, which mailing works. The figures are counted honestly and respect the viewers.

使用方法#

1In the slide deck (Studio), open the “Impact” tab under “Publish” — or “Impact” in administration (address /admin/wirkung) for all content of the organisation.
2Choose the period at the top: 7, 30 or 90 days or 12 months. Figures run up to yesterday.
3Key figures: opens, viewers (estimated), average viewing time, share watched to the end, interactions.
4“Over time” shows opens and viewers per day; “Viewing time per slide” shows the average viewing time per slide (the darker, the longer), how many reached the slide and how many stopped there.
5“Attention” shows the engagement score with its formula, pauses, rewinds, muting, full screen, tab switches and the passages rewatched most often.
6“Time of day and weekday” shows when people open it (viewers' local time); “Location” a map of countries with regions, cities and time zones; “Devices” type, manufacturer, operating system and browser with version, screen, orientation, connection and app or web.
7“Table” shows everything as tables, “Export CSV” downloads the figures, “Report (PDF)” opens a print version to save as PDF. External systems read the same report through the API (/api/v1/wirkung, scope “wirkung:read”).
8At the top you see how many people are viewing the content right now.
9Under “Recipient links”, create and copy a separate link for each recipient, mailing, group or version (A/B). “Links and groups” compares them, for personal links including the time until first opening. Each personal link can “notify on opening” (in the app, by email or both); on Mondays a weekly report arrives as a notification.
10For Stage decks, “Learners in the course” at the top switches to the learners' view (administration of the organisation only).

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Lernplattform（始终包含）

Can be switched per organisation, on by default.
Counting only happens where the organisation has switched the feature on.

How counting works#

Without consent the page stores nothing on viewers' devices — no cookie, no local storage. A session only lives as long as the open page.
The IP address is not stored. To estimate unique viewers it is irreversibly combined with a key that changes daily; the same person cannot be recognised the next day. No personal profiles are created.
What counts is what was visible: a slide only counts while it is on screen and the tab is active.
Device and browser are only stored as classes (operating system with major version, browser with major version, manufacturer and model class), never the full browser identifier. Location only comes from the hosting provider's information (country, region, city); the IP address is not looked up for it and not stored.
Every value — a city, a device model, an operating system version — only appears from 5 sessions; rarer values are combined under “Other”.
Learners in a course: the organisation only sees figures from 5 people (as with competence continuity); smaller values appear as “under 5”. Each person sees their own learning trail in their own progress.
Campaigns and groups only appear from 5 viewers; individual recipients only with a confirmed legal basis.
Individual events are deleted after 90 days, daily figures after 13 months.

提示#

Only switch on “Report per recipient” if there is a legal basis for it (for example consent). The recipient then sees a short notice with a link to the Privacy Policy on opening and can continue anonymously.
Campaign and group can also be appended to any shared address: ?k=trade-fair&g=sales.
A link can be revoked (it then no longer counts) or deleted (with all figures assigned to it).

第 7 章

Community & collaboration

Watching together, real-time group work, forum, study partners, mentoring, elections and the alumni network.

Watching together (live co-learning)

学生教师

Watch a course with several people: one starts the room and controls the slides, others join via a link and respond in real time.

用途#

You learn differently together: you ask questions you would not ask alone, and you keep at it.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseLive co-learning

1In the course click “Live co-learning” at the top right — the live session starts, the button shows “Live”.
2“Copy” the displayed link and share it. Whoever opens it and is signed in sees the same slide: “You are watching live — the host controls the slides.” (图 1)
图 1 “Live co-learning” is running: the link to copy, the number of co-learners and “End live session”.
图 1 “Live co-learning” is running: the link to copy, the number of co-learners and “End live session”.
3Everyone can respond with symbols (thumbs up, light bulb, question mark, confetti, flame); the reactions float across the slide for everyone, plus the number of co-learners.
4“End live session” closes the room.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Gemeinsam schauen

Off: the button is missing in the course, and an existing link reports “Live co-learning is currently deactivated”.

Host and viewers#

The host starts the live session in their course and pages through; everyone else follows their slide.
Viewers control nothing — they respond and ask.
The reaction bar shows how many are currently co-learning; everyone sees reactions at the same time.
With the camera feature switched on, people additionally see each other.

提示#

Viewers need an account; without signing in the link leads to the sign-in.
Until the host chooses a slide, the room says “Starting shortly”.

Camera in the watch-along room

学生教师

The participants' camera and microphone feeds as a strip in the watch-along room — with explicit consent, without recording.

用途#

Faces turn watching together into a meeting.

使用方法#

操作路径Watch-along roomCamera

1Switch on the camera in the watch-along room. By switching it on you consent to the video and audio transmission to the co-learners.
2The images appear as a strip at the bottom right; your own is marked “(You)”.
3Camera and microphone can be toggled individually.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Gemeinsam schauen

Default: off. Can be switched on per tenant.

Consent and data protection#

The camera is off until you switch it on yourself; switching it on is the consent to transmission to the co-learners in the room.
Image and sound only go live to the others in the room; nothing is recorded.
Camera and microphone can be switched off individually at any time.
For the institution the feature is separately switchable and off by default.

提示#

Nothing is recorded — the images only go live to the others in the room.

Inviting co-learners

学生

Invite up to four people to your own course — each gets ten days of free access, by email, text message, link or QR code.

用途#

Whoever learns something good wants to share it — with colleagues, friends, the team.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseInvite

1In the course click “Invite” at the top right; the window “Invite co-learners” shows how many places are still free.
2Enter first name (required), last name and email address or mobile number and “Create invitation” (图 1).
图 1 “Invite co-learners”: free places, first name, last name, email or mobile number and “Create invitation”.
图 1 “Invite co-learners”: free places, first name, last name, email or mobile number and “Create invitation”.
3With an email address the invitation goes out immediately (“Email sent”); otherwise “Copy link”, send it as a text message or show the QR code.
4Whoever opens the link sees “Invitation to co-learn” and signs in or creates an account.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Community

What invited people get#

Ten days of free access with all learning features of the course.
Learning together in a live session with up to five people.
No final exam and no certificate in the free access.
20 percent discount if they unlock the course later.

Whoever opens their own invitation link themselves sees a notice: this is your own link — share it with a co-learner.

提示#

The free access includes no final exam and no certificate; whoever unlocks later gets a 20 percent discount.
A link is only valid once: expired, redeemed or withdrawn invitations say so when opened.

Group work

教师学生

A shared real-time workspace with a method library (83 methods), timer, groups, voting, AI assistant, submission and assessment.

用途#

Group work succeeds with structure: a suitable method, a clear time, visible results. The workspace brings everything along and works in the lecture hall as well as online.

使用方法#

操作路径Group workNew workspace

1Open “Group work”: all workspaces you belong to, with status (in progress, submitted, assessed) (图 1).
图 1 Your own workspaces with role and status: in progress, submitted or assessed.
图 1 Your own workspaces with role and status: in progress, submitted or assessed.
2Lecturers: “New workspace” — enter title and topic, optionally choose a course and divide the enrolled students into groups (people per group), then choose a method and “Form groups and start”.
3Or in the course at the slide “Group work” → “Choose and prepare method” — the slide becomes the topic.
4On the workspace: double-click creates a note; plus text, shapes, arrows, pen and images. Everyone sees changes immediately.
5The group submits (“Submit as group result”, optionally with an accompanying text); the facilitator assesses with a percentage and feedback or returns it to the group (图 2).
图 2 The side bar “Submission” on the workspace: status, accompanying text and “Submit as group result”.
图 2 The side bar “Submission” on the workspace: status, accompanying text and “Submit as group result”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Gruppenarbeit

The method library#

83 methods — for example brainstorming, 6-3-5, SWOT, retrospective, decision matrix, world café — in categories such as problem solving & analysis, strategy & business, agile & team, learning & studying, research & science. The search finds methods by name; at a slide “Recommended for this slide” are at the top.

Every card shows what the method needs: several groups, rounds, hidden collecting, voting. Methods with several groups can only be created with groups via “Start group work”.

The facilitator's tools#

Timer with stop.
“Bring everyone to my view” — everyone sees the same part of the workspace.
Lock the workspace (only the facilitator writes), hide the others' notes (silent collecting), anonymous (no names on notes).
Voting with a fixed number of points per person.
Open group workspaces and add participants by email address.
Jigsaw: “Form home groups” — one expert from each group. Stations: “Everyone one station further”, hosts stay at the table.
“End sequence”.

The AI assistant on the workspace#

It reads the workspace, makes suggestions and stores the result as perfectly normal notes — anyone can move, change or delete them: first notes on the topic, fill the method's fields with prompts, sort notes by topic, summarise the result. The summary can be adopted into the accompanying text of the submission.

Processing in the EU; the notes are only transmitted for the respective request.

Taking the result with you#

Download the whole workspace as an image or as a PDF — without the others' mouse pointers.

提示#

The method cards carry category colours and icons; the library is translated into fifteen languages.
Group work also runs in a course's full screen.
After submission the workspace is read-only for the group — that is why the platform asks beforehand.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动为您创建试用学生，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fgruppenarbeit

Study partners

学生

See up to six other learners at a similar level — only those who take part themselves see others and are seen.

用途#

Learning with a partner lasts longer. Reciprocity prevents anyone from just watching.

使用方法#

操作路径DashboardStudy partners

1Switch on the study partner offer in the profile settings (default: invisible).
2Open “Study partners” in the dashboard.
3View up to six suggestions with names, completed modules and match in percent (图 1).
图 1 Suggested study partners with completed modules and match in percent.
图 1 Suggested study partners with completed modules and match in percent.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Community

Data protection first#

By default you are invisible to others — this is intentional.
You only become visible with your own opt-in in the profile settings; only then do you see others too.
Name, completed modules and the match are shown — no contact details.

提示#

Only names and course progress of others who also take part are shown — no contact details.
Without a running course there are no suggestions; whoever takes part first sees a notice about this.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动为您创建试用学生，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fdashboard%2Fpeers

Community

学生教师行政

The institution's forum: raise concerns and vote, find mentoring, announce alumni events.

用途#

Participation needs a place. Concerns become visible, and the community decides what is important.

使用方法#

操作路径DashboardCommunity

1Open “Community” in the dashboard (“Community & self-governance”).
2Under “Concerns & voting” raise a concern with a title and optional description; vote for other people's concerns (图 1).
图 1 “Concerns & voting”: raised concerns with votes and the field for a new one.
图 1 “Concerns & voting”: raised concerns with votes and the field for a new one.
3Under “Peer mentoring & alumni” state whether you are a mentor (offering) or a mentee (looking), with a short note.
4Under “Alumni events” create an event (title, description, start, location, places) or register.
5At the top routes lead to “Student representation” (elections), “Alumni” and “Peer mentoring”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Community

The areas of the community#

Concerns & voting — participation: raise concerns, vote.
Peer mentoring & alumni — offer or look for a mentor; route to the detailed mentoring page.
Alumni events — create, register, keep an eye on places.
Student representation — elections and candidacy.

提示#

An event with all places taken is shown as “fully booked”; your own events are marked “by you”.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动为您创建试用学生，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fcommunity

Mentoring

学生

Experienced students and alumni accompany newcomers — become a mentor, find and request a mentor, accept and end mentorships.

用途#

Whoever is just starting benefits most from someone who has already walked the path.

使用方法#

操作路径CommunityPeer mentoring

1In the community open “Peer mentoring — become or find a mentor”.
2Become a mentor: enter topics (separated by commas, e.g. “starting studies, exams”) and “About me in brief”, tick “visible as mentor” and save (图 1).
图 1 “Become a mentor”: topics, “About me in brief” and “visible as mentor”.
图 1 “Become a mentor”: topics, “About me in brief” and “visible as mentor”.
3Find a mentor: choose a mentor from the list, optionally write what it is about, and “Request” → “Send” (图 2).
图 2 “Find a mentor”: mentors with their topics and “Request”.
图 2 “Find a mentor”: mentors with their topics and “Request”.
4Under “My mentorships”, as a mentor “accept” or “decline” requests; running mentorships can be “ended”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Community

The course of a mentorship#

A mentor makes themselves visible with topics and a short introduction.
A mentee makes a request, optionally with a message.
The mentor accepts or declines.
Both sides can see a running mentorship under “My mentorships”; it can be ended.

提示#

Whoever no longer wants to be found as a mentor unticks “visible as mentor” — running mentorships remain.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/betreuung

Student elections

学生行政

Elections of the student representation: stand as a candidate, vote secretly — one vote per election, results only after closing.

用途#

Self-governance needs a reliable, simple election.

使用方法#

操作路径CommunityStudent representation

1In the community open “Student representation — elections & candidacy”.
2In an open election “+ Stand as a candidate” with a short statement — or “Cast vote” for a candidate (图 1).
图 1 An open election with candidates, their statements and “Cast vote”.
图 1 An open election with candidates, their statements and “Cast vote”.
3After voting it says “voted ✓”; the result appears as soon as the election is closed.
4The operator opens and closes the election (“New election” with title and description, “Close election”).

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Hochschulverwaltung

The rules of the election#

One vote per election.
Secret: who voted for whom is not visible.
Results only appear once the election is closed.
Every student can stand as a candidate themselves, with a short statement.
Only the operator can open, close and reopen.

提示#

The administration sees the committees in the campus under “Quality & governance” → “Committees”.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/gremien

Alumni

学生行政

The alumni network: whoever searches the directory is listed in it themselves — and decides themselves who sees them.

用途#

Alumni are one of a university's most important assets — for networking, showing and giving back. Reciprocity turns a card index into a network.

使用方法#

操作路径DashboardAlumni network

1Open the card “Alumni network” in the dashboard.
2“Create profile”: “My time at the university” (degree, programme, graduation year), “Where I stand today” (position, company, location), “About me”, website and “What can I be approached for?”.
3Set who sees the profile — from “nobody” to “everyone”; the default is hidden.
4After that the directory is visible: search by programme, position, company or location (图 1).
图 1 A profile in the alumni directory: degree, year, position, company, location and “What can I be approached for?”.
图 1 A profile in the alumni directory: degree, year, position, company, location and “What can I be approached for?”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Alumni & Karriere

What the alumni profile contains#

My time at the university — degree, programme, graduation year.
Where I stand today — position, company, location.
About me and website.
What can I be approached for? — “the actual engine of the network”.
Who sees me — nobody, other graduates, graduates and verified companies, or everyone.

提示#

The database itself enforces the condition, not the page — it cannot be bypassed.
Companies only see a profile if they are verified; they can follow, but get no further access through it.
“Delete profile” removes the profile completely from the directory.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动为您创建试用学生，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Falumni

第 8 章

People Development

For companies and for the staff of a university: onboarding journeys, mandatory training with refreshers, competency matrix, the manager's view and training records.

People development at a glance

行政学生

Learning paths, assignments with deadlines and every employee's own area — the basic surface of people development.

用途#

Companies and the staff of a university need further training with commitment: who must have learned what by when?

使用方法#

操作路径People developmentOverview

1Employees: open “People development” — “My area” shows your own onboarding, mandatory training with records, further learning paths, the contact persons and the competencies (图 1).
图 1 “My area”: your own onboarding as a learning path with phases and steps.
图 1 “My area”: your own onboarding as a learning path with phases and steps.
2Managers: “My team” shows the people they lead.
3HR department: open “Overview” — at the top the key figures, below them what needs to be done (图 2).
图 2 The HR department's key figures: active employees, running onboardings, mandatory fulfilled and overdue.
图 2 The HR department's key figures: active employees, running onboardings, mandatory fulfilled and overdue.
4Use the bar to go to “Learning paths”, “Assignments”, “Mandatory training”, “Competencies” and “Workforce” (图 3).
图 3 “Overdue”: who is behind the deadline with which learning path.
图 3 “Overdue”: who is behind the deadline with which learning path.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Personal & Weiterbildung

Off: the whole of people development is missing.
The bar only shows what is switched on: without “Onboarding journeys” there are no onboarding paths, without “Mandatory training” no tab for it.

The HR department's overview#

Key figures: active employees (linked to a sign-in), running onboardings, mandatory training fulfilled (in percent), assignments overdue.
Overdue — who is behind the deadline with an assignment.
Records expiring — what expires in the next 30 days. 30 days before expiry the refresher starts automatically.
New in the company without onboarding — with the button “Assign onboarding”.
Early warning from the feedback — conversations with 1 or 2 stars.
Reports for auditors: mandatory training, all assignments and the change log as CSV.

My area (for every employee)#

Onboarding as a journey with phases and steps to tick off.
Mandatory training with status and “View record”.
Further learning paths and “Completed” with records.
Contact persons (manager, buddy, mentor) and “You are accompanying”, if you are a buddy yourself.
Competencies: assess yourself — the manager sees the assessment.

提示#

Completed courses are transferred into people development overnight — or immediately with “Reconcile now”.
The administration of people development is reserved for the HR department; employees see a notice about it instead.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=personal&next=%2Fakademie%2Fverwaltung

Learning paths and templates

行政

A learning path is a sequence of steps with deadlines and owners — for onboarding, mandatory training or further development; common paths are available as templates.

用途#

What someone is to learn or do must be described properly once — then it can be given to many and proven the same way for all.

使用方法#

操作路径People developmentLearning pathsNew learning path

1Open “People development” → “Learning paths”. The paths are listed by type: onboarding, mandatory training, further development (图 1).
图 1 The learning paths of one type with target group, deadline, number of steps and status.
图 1 The learning paths of one type with target group, deadline, number of steps and status.
2At the bottom, under the templates, “Adopt” a common path — or “New learning path” (图 2).
图 2 The templates of common learning paths to adopt.
图 2 The templates of common learning paths to adopt.
3Enter title, description, deadline in days from the start, for mandatory training “Valid for months (then refresher)” and the legal basis.
4Choose the target group (unit, role) and tick “Assign automatically” if desired.
5Create steps: “What needs to be done?”, owner, phase or day, a published course from the workshop or a link, optionally “Conveys competency … up to level” and “Mandatory step”.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The included templates#

Onboarding — the first 90 days
Onboarding for new managers
Data protection instruction (valid 12 months)
Information security and phishing (valid 12 months)
Occupational safety instruction (valid 12 months)
AI competence in the company (valid 24 months)
Equal treatment in the workplace (valid 24 months)
From colleague to manager

Who can be responsible for a step#

This way “Provide laptop” lands with IT and “Conversation on day 30” with the manager — everyone sees their own steps.

Employee
Manager
Buddy
HR
IT

提示#

Automatic paths go once to every active employee of the target group — including new ones; for onboarding from the date of joining.
Deadlines and legal bases of the templates are suggestions — please check them in your own company.
“Archive” removes a path from the offering; running assignments and records are preserved.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=personal&next=%2Fakademie%2Fverwaltung%2Fpfade

Assignments with deadline, buddy and mentor

行政

Give learning paths to individual people, whole units or roles — with start, deadline, buddy and mentor; overdue ones at a glance.

用途#

Further training only becomes binding with a name and a date. The assignment records both and shows who is behind.

使用方法#

操作路径People developmentAssignments

1Open “People development” → “Assignments”.
2Choose a learning path and “To whom?”: “Individual people”, “Whole unit” or “Whole role” (图 1).
图 1 “Assign”: learning path, “To whom?”, start, buddy and mentor.
图 1 “Assign”: learning path, “To whom?”, start, buddy and mentor.
3Set the start (empty for onboarding: the date of joining), optionally choose a buddy and a mentor and assign.
4Filter the list by type, “overdue”, “completed” or “all” and search by name (图 2).
图 2 The assignments with person, learning path, deadline, progress, “Remind” and “Withdraw”.
图 2 The assignments with person, learning path, deadline, progress, “Remind” and “Withdraw”.
5For each assignment expand “Steps and support”, “Remind” or “Withdraw”.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The status of an assignment#

Open
In progress
Completed
Cancelled

Completed course steps are taken over from the course — automatically overnight or immediately via “Reconcile now” in the overview.

提示#

“Remind” reports back how many emails were sent and how many remained without a deliverable address.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=personal&next=%2Fakademie%2Fverwaltung%2Fzuweisungen

Onboarding journeys

行政学生

Onboarding by role and department: before the first day, day 1, first week, up to day 30/60/90 — with buddy, mentor and conversations with feedback.

用途#

The first weeks decide whether someone stays. A planned journey ensures that nothing is forgotten and problems are noticed early.

使用方法#

操作路径People developmentMy area

1Under “Learning paths” the HR department creates a path of the type “Onboarding” (or adopts the template “Onboarding – the first 90 days”) and assigns it — automatically per unit or role or individually.
2New employees see their journey by phases under “My area” and tick off steps; a course step opens the course (图 1).
图 1 An onboarding in “My area”: phases, steps to tick off and a course as a step.
图 1 An onboarding in “My area”: phases, steps to tick off and a course as a step.
3After 30, 60 and 90 days a short conversation asks “How is your onboarding going?” — rating from 1 to 5 and a free text. The manager adds their view.
4Feedback with 1 or 2 stars appears as an early warning in the HR department's overview.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Mitarbeiter-Onboarding

The phases#

Before the first day — up to 60 days beforehand; preparatory items deliberately come before that.
Day 1
First week — day 1 to 6
Up to day 30
Up to day 60
Up to day 90

If a step has no phase of its own, it follows from its day relative to the start.

提示#

New employees without onboarding appear in the overview under “New in the company without onboarding” — with a button for assigning.

Mandatory training & refreshers

行政

Mandatory instruction with validity, automatic refresher 30 days before expiry, fulfilment status per employee and audit report as CSV.

用途#

Data protection, occupational safety, compliance: in an audit you must be able to prove who was instructed when.

使用方法#

操作路径People developmentMandatory training

1Open “People development” → “Mandatory training”.
2If a training is missing, “Adopt from template” or create a path of the type “Mandatory training” with validity in months under “Learning paths” (图 1).
图 1 The mandatory training with validity and fulfilment rate.
图 1 The mandatory training with validity and fulfilment rate.
3The table shows the fulfilment status per employee and training; filter by unit or choose “Action required only” (图 2).
图 2 The fulfilment status per employee and training.
图 2 The fulfilment status per employee and training.
4Download “Audit report (CSV)” — every cycle with record code and the reminders sent.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Mitarbeiter-Onboarding

The cycle of a mandatory training#

Assignment with deadline (from the learning path).
Completion → signed record with validity in months.
30 days before expiry: new cycle, announced once; the employee is reminded.
The audit report lists every cycle with record code and the reminders.

Included templates: data protection, information security, occupational safety (12 months each), AI competence and equal treatment (24 months each) — each with a legal basis as a suggestion.

提示#

The refresher starts by itself 30 days before expiry: a new cycle is assigned and announced once.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=personal&next=%2Fakademie%2Fverwaltung%2Fpflicht

Competency matrix & gap analysis

行政

Competencies per role with a target level, the current level per employee, gaps and the learning paths that close them.

用途#

Further training should close gaps, not fill catalogues.

使用方法#

操作路径People developmentCompetencies

1Open “People development” → “Competencies”.
2Create a “New competency” and set under “Target per role” which competency a role needs at which level (图 1).
图 1 The competency catalogue with category and “New competency”.
图 1 The competency catalogue with category and “New competency”.
3Under “Current level of employees” see the levels: outlined in yellow is what is below the role's target.
4For each competency the page shows the coverage and which learning path conveys the required level — or “no learning path conveys this level” (图 2).
图 2 The gap analysis: who is below the target of their role and which learning path conveys the level.
图 2 The gap analysis: who is below the target of their role and which learning path conveys the level.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Personal & Weiterbildung

The levels#

0 — None
1 — Basics
2 — Applying
3 — Advanced
4 — Expert

提示#

Completed learning paths raise the level automatically; employees assess themselves, managers confirm.
The matrix only knows employees with a role — without a role there is no target.
The competence diagnosis in courses is deliberately NOT connected to this matrix: evidence from courses never flows into HR views.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=personal&next=%2Fakademie%2Fverwaltung%2Fkompetenzen

Workforce, units & import

行政

Employees with unit, role and manager, the organisational units and the bulk import via CSV.

用途#

Without structure no assignment: who belongs where, who leads whom. From this follow automatic learning paths, the manager's view and the target values of the competencies.

使用方法#

操作路径People developmentWorkforce

1Open “People development” → “Workforce”; three tabs: employees, units, roles.
2“Create employee” or search; per person unit, role, position, date of joining and manager (图 1).
图 1 The employees with unit, role, position, date of joining and manager.
图 1 The employees with unit, role, position, date of joining and manager.
3Under “Units” create divisions, departments, teams and locations with a parent unit and a head.
4Under “Roles” create the roles to which the competency target values are attached.
5“Bulk import (CSV)”: choose or paste a file, check the preview and adopt it.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Personal & Weiterbildung

The bulk import#

Columns: first name, last name, email, personnel number, unit, role, position, date of joining, manager (email), employment.
Separator: semicolon, comma or tab; at most 2 MB.
Existing employees (same email address or personnel number) are updated, missing units and roles are created.
The preview shows rows with errors — they are not imported — and ignored columns.

提示#

A sign-in is linked as soon as someone with the same email address signs in at this company.
The head of a unit sees all their employees under “My team”.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

打开带虚构示例数据的演示角色，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/enter?persona=personal&next=%2Fakademie%2Fverwaltung%2Fbelegschaft

The manager's view

行政

Managers see their team's onboarding, mandatory training and competencies, send reminders and write their feedback on the onboarding.

用途#

Onboarding is a management task. The manager sees where their team stands — and only their team.

使用方法#

操作路径People developmentMy team

1Open “People development” → “My team”.
2At the top: running learning paths, who is behind, mandatory fulfilled (图 1).
图 1 “My team”: team members, running learning paths, overdue and mandatory fulfilled.
图 1 “My team”: team members, running learning paths, overdue and mandatory fulfilled.
3For each person expand the learning paths (“Steps and feedback”) and “Remind” if needed (图 2).
图 2 A person in the team with their learning paths, steps and feedback.
图 2 A person in the team with their learning paths, steps and feedback.
4Tick off your own steps (e.g. the conversation on day 30) and write the feedback on the onboarding.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Mitarbeiter-Onboarding

What the manager sees — and what not#

Per person: running learning paths with steps, delays, mandatory training, competencies and the feedback on the onboarding.
The employees' self-assessment of competencies — for confirmation.
Not: evidence from the competence diagnosis in courses. It never flows into HR views.

提示#

Who belongs to a team follows from the workforce: the registered manager or the head of the unit.

Reminders by email

行政

A daily run sends a reminder one week before the deadline and weekly afterwards; when overdue, the manager is reminded too.

用途#

Deadlines only help if someone reminds people of them.

使用方法#

1Nothing to do: a daily run sends the reminders by itself.
2By hand: under “Assignments” or “My team” click “Remind”.
3If the feature is off, the deadlines remain visible, only no emails are sent.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Mitarbeiter-Onboarding

What the daily run does — in this order#

Take over course completions (nobody is reminded of something they finished yesterday).
Assign new employees their automatic learning paths.
Expiring mandatory training: open the next cycle.
Remind: “due soon” once, seven days before the deadline; “overdue” every seven days after the deadline, then also to the manager; a new refresher cycle announces itself once.

Test addresses and accounts without an email address receive nothing — they are noted as “skipped”.

提示#

Every attempt — sent, skipped, failed — is logged; the log is in the audit report.

Training records

行政学生

After completion a signed record with a verification code, a public verification page and a validity date.

用途#

In an audit by an authority or a client, what counts is a record that anyone can verify.

使用方法#

操作路径People developmentMy areaView record

1After completing a training the record is available under “My area” (“View record”).
2The verification code leads to the public verification page “Training record”: holder, training, completed on, valid until, issued by (company and country), verification code.
3The page shows whether the digital signature has been verified; the record can be downloaded as a verifiable credential.
4Before expiry the refresher assigns the training again.
5HR: under “Learning paths” → “Issuer in records” choose the company's country. The name comes from the company data.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Mitarbeiter-Onboarding

In the signed record the company appears as the issuing body — with name and country. It is secured via the platform's identifier; the company needs no key of its own.
Without a chosen country only the name appears in the record. Older records remain valid and show the name as before.

The public verification page#

Holder, training, completed on, valid until, issued by (company, country), verification code.
Name and country of the issuing body come from the signed record — only with a verified signature.
Whether the training is still valid.
Whether the digital signature has been verified and is valid.
The record as a verifiable credential to download — for auditors who want to verify it by machine.

Human resources

行政

Master data of all employees; onboarding checklists, positions & organisation, contracts and absence build on it.

用途#

One place for the staff's master data — the basis for everything else.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationHuman resources

1Open “Human resources”. At the top the key figures (total employees, active, departments) (图 1).
图 1 The key figures: total employees, active and number of departments.
图 1 The key figures: total employees, active and number of departments.
2“Create employee”: first name, last name, personnel number, department, employment, date of joining and status are required; plus position, email, phone, date of leaving, weekly hours, notes.
3Search by name, personnel number or email; filter by department and status (图 2).
图 2 The employee list with personnel number, department, employment, date of joining and status.
图 2 The employee list with personnel number, department, employment, date of joining and status.
4Use the buttons at the top to go to “Onboarding”, “Positions & org”, “Contracts” and “Absence”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Personal & Weiterbildung

The four sub-pages#

Onboarding — checklists per person; dates depend on the date of joining or leaving, preparatory items deliberately come before. At the top running checklists, overdue steps and backlog.
Positions & org — positions with title, department, places and status; assignment of employees to position and superior; from this the organisational structure.
Contracts — contract type, title or role, remuneration, amount, weekly hours, start and end; at the top the annual personnel costs of the active contracts.
Absence — enter period and reason; working days (Monday to Friday) are counted against entitlement and remaining days; “Approve” or “Reject” requests.

“Human resources” is the personnel administration, “People development” the further training of the workforce. Both have their own switches.

Competence continuity

学生行政

Short competence prompts per role, via QR code or reminder: the platform records when a competence was last shown, when it is due again and how current it is.

用途#

Competence fades when it is not used. Instead of an annual mandatory training, a short prompt of a few minutes checks exactly the competence that is currently due — with the same competence diagnosis as in the course.

使用方法#

操作路径People developmentMy competences

1Company administrator: under “Competence continuity” choose a role, define the expected competences with level, priority and rhythm and activate the version. “Create example” creates the role “Sales employee using AI” with five competences.
2Under “Accesses” create a QR code (for the role or a single competence, time-limited) and post or send it. The code contains nothing personal and can be revoked at any time.
3Employee: scan the QR code or open “My competences”, sign in and start “My prompt for today” — a question or a task from practice, spoken if desired.
4Afterwards the platform shows the result with a justification, the currency status and the next date. If there is a gap, “My competence companion” leads to the matching place in the course.
5“My development” shows the history, “My records” the evidence. There the competence passport is available as a signed “Kompetenzstand – kein Zertifikat” (competence status – not a certificate): as a file (JSON), as a PDF with QR code and as a time-limited, revocable QR share — only with consent, by default with a pseudonym instead of the name.
6Under “Analysis” the company only sees aggregated figures from a minimum group — never an individual person.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Kompetenzbegleitung
可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kompetenzbegleitung

Per tenant via the feature “Competence continuity” (default off) or the bookable module “Competence continuity”; requires the competence check. Introduced as a project-based extension: the role profiles with their competences are set up together with the customer — no immediate across-the-board availability.
Under “Prompts & quotas” every value can be set per company; without changes the default values apply.
Minimum group of the analysis: default 5, larger possible, never smaller.
Reminders per person and week (default 1, at most 7), default rhythm for new requirements (default monthly).
Rules for resubmission: base interval per rhythm, factors for risk, demanding competences and stability, days until learning step and check task, shortest and longest interval, threshold for “reassessment”.
Override the rhythm per role, per competence or per competence in a role — without a new version of the role profile; the most specific setting applies.
Validity of new QR codes (default 90 days, at most 365), throttling of new prompts per person and day (default no limit).
Monthly quotas for prompts, AI tokens and speech minutes; reading aloud with the course voice on or off.
Every change appears with old and new value in the administration log.
Every employee continues to choose rhythm, pause and email reminders themselves; this choice only pushes dates back.
Signed competence status: separate feature “Signed competence status (QR sharing)” (default on); off = only the unsigned competence passport draft. QR shares are valid for 30 days by default, at most 90.

The four currency states#

Currently demonstrated — an independent piece of evidence lies within the rhythm.
Refresher recommended — the rhythm has expired; what was shown earlier remains visible and still counts as shown.
Reassessment recommended — for example after an identified gap or a changed requirement of the role.
Not sufficiently evidenced — there is no independent evidence yet.

An expired rhythm is not a loss of the competence; the status is never downgraded automatically.

When a prompt becomes due#

Resubmission follows comprehensible, configurable rules: last evidence, difficulty, identified gaps, the risk class of the activity, changed content or requirements, previous results and your own reminder preference. Daily, weekly, monthly or event-driven — daily use is never the default.

The rules are not a prediction of forgetting; they are deliberately simple and visible to everyone.

The company can adjust the rules within fixed limits (for example risk factor “high” from 0.5 to 0.7). Every plan states the rule version according to which it was calculated; a change recalculates nothing retroactively, it takes effect at the next calculation.

What the company sees — and what not#

Only aggregated figures from a minimum group of five people; filters that together would result in a smaller group are rejected. The minimum group can be increased, never reduced below five.
No individual answers, no individual assessments, no rankings.
The purpose is exclusively learning and development; performance appraisal, applicant selection or personnel decisions are excluded.
QR codes contain nothing personal, are time-limited and can be revoked at any time.
Only the person themselves shares their competence status — via their own QR share; shares and accesses appear in their own log, not in the company's.

提示#

An exercise in learning mode does not count as independent evidence.
When a resubmission expires, nothing is downgraded: the status is then “Refresher recommended”, what was shown earlier remains visible.
Competence continuity serves only learning and development — not performance appraisal.
There is deliberately no view for managers on individual people; companies see only the aggregated figures.

One competence engine, several learning applications

学生教师行政

The platform's competence engine also works in other learning applications, such as the student app — and learners take their competence status with them as a signed file, shared via QR code: explicitly “Kompetenzstand – kein Zertifikat” (competence status – not a certificate).

用途#

Competence does not only arise in one course on one platform. Whoever learns in different places should be checked by the same rules everywhere and own their credentials themselves.

使用方法#

操作路径People developmentMy competencesMy records

1The domain core of the competence diagnosis is built independently — without ties to the platform's database, interface or roles, with its own version number and its own tests.
2Another learning application adopts this core as a versioned copy with an adoption log and only builds its own connections — at run time it does not depend on the platform.
3Under “My records” the person downloads their competence status as a signed file (JSON) or creates a QR share (default 30 days, at most 90, revocable at any time) — with a PDF including the QR code. Nothing is shared without explicit consent; by default a pseudonym appears instead of the name.
4Whoever scans the QR code sees on the verification page: signature valid, unchanged, issuer, date of the status and the shared competences — and in large type the notice “Kompetenzstand – kein Zertifikat. Die Signatur belegt Herkunft und Unverändertheit, keine Anerkennung.” (competence status – not a certificate; the signature proves origin and integrity, not recognition). A revocation takes effect immediately.
5Other learning applications verify a file via the platform's public verification interface (POST /api/kompetenzstand/pruefen) or with the pure verification function as a versioned copy.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Kompetenzbegleitung

Per tenant via the feature “Signed competence status (QR sharing)” (default on); only takes effect where competence continuity is on. Off: only the unsigned competence passport draft.

How it fits together#

Competence engine — the rules: tasks, rubrics, evidence, level, gaps, reassessment.
Learning applications — the platform, the student app, the Academy's offerings; each with its own interface and its own data storage.
Competence status — belongs to the learner; they decide by time-limited, revocable QR sharing who sees which status.

No automatic synchronisation between the applications: larger adoptions run via a versioned adoption log.

Open standards#

The competence status is a separate, versioned format (universe-kompetenzstand/2; older files in format /1 remain verifiable; optionally the evidenced level from competence modules per competence), modelled on W3C credentials but deliberately with its own type “Kompetenzstand” instead of “VerifiableCredential” — so that no tool mistakes it for a certificate. It is signed with the same key and the same DID of the platform as the verifiable credentials (Ed25519, JWS), after deterministic canonicalisation (JCS).

Every file must carry the notice “Kompetenzstand – kein Zertifikat”. A file without this notice fails verification, even if its signature were correct.

提示#

The signature proves origin and integrity — it is not recognition, not a certificate and not an attestation of an exam.
Link, PDF and file of a QR share are only available right after creating it; only a fingerprint of the code is stored. To share again, simply create a new share.
Every share, every revocation and every access appears in your own log — the company does not see it.

第 9 章

Operations & Administration (Control)

The entire admin back end: switch every feature on and off per tenant, book modules, accounts and permissions, costs and usage, data protection, audit, interfaces, support — every page of the administration is described here. Plus the handbook itself, the glossary and the public knowledge section.

Feature catalogue: switch every feature per tenant

运营方

Every feature of the platform can be switched on and off for all customers or for a single customer — off means: not there, not just greyed out.

用途#

Not every customer wants everything. A university needs admission and an examinations office, a company needs mandatory training and onboarding. The catalogue turns the platform into exactly the product a customer has booked.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationControlPlatform or tenant

1Open “Control” (operator only).
2At the top choose the view: “Platform” (the house rule for every customer without an exception of their own) or a tenant.
3In the platform view switch each feature on or off; every row shows how many tenants deviate from it (图 1).
图 1 The platform view of Control: a group of features, each with a switch and the number of tenants that deviate.
图 1 The platform view of Control: a group of features, each with a switch and the number of tenants that deviate.
4In the tenant view choose one of three values per feature: “as platform”, “on” or “off”.
5Booking happens per customer under “Modules & prices”; a module sets the switches that belong to it. This is the fine control.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The areas of the catalogue#

Learning · Learning tools in the player · Didactics
Community
Credentials & exams · Studies & admission · Teaching
Workshop & avatar
University administration · People development
Languages · Support · Interfaces

Every feature of this catalogue has an entry in this handbook — an automatic guard checks this on every test run.

How a switch works#

Pages: the root layout asks on every page which features govern the path; if one of them is off, “not found” comes back.
Interfaces: the upstream proxy answers with “Feature not active” for switched-off features.
Navigation: menu items of switched-off features disappear.
Tools without their own page (e.g. flashcards in the player) simply do not appear.

Where the values are stored#

The catalogue itself is source code — every feature with area, default, description and the paths it governs. The values (on/off per platform and per tenant) are in the database and can be changed without a new deployment. Every change is logged.

Who may do what#

Switching — for the platform and for every tenant: only the operator (page “Feature flags” or “Control”, address /admin/features).
A customer's administration does not switch itself; it requests modules under “Booked modules”.
Demo mode can additionally only switch off, never on — and only in your own browser.

提示#

A switched-off feature answers on its pages with “not found” and likewise on its interfaces — it cannot be reached via its address.
A path is locked as soon as one of its features is off: whoever only switches off office hours keeps the lecturer area; whoever switches off the lecturer area also loses office hours.
The state is cached for 30 seconds per tenant; a change therefore takes effect after half a minute at the latest.

Modules & prices

运营方行政

Per customer a package of bookable modules with prices — booking sets the switches of the feature catalogue, dependencies are booked along, every change is in the history.

用途#

A university is sold something different from a company. Module management is the one screen per customer: what they book, what they pay for it, from when — and who changed it when.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationModules & pricesChoose customer

1In the administration open “Modules & prices” and choose a customer at the top under “Customer” (“Choose customer …”). After the name it says how many open requests they have.
2Section 1 “Choose package”: a click on “University”, “Company – onboarding” or “Further education provider” sets a sensible basic configuration; every card shows the price per user and month (图 1).
图 1 “Choose package”: university, company – onboarding and further education provider, each with a price per user and month.
图 1 “Choose package”: university, company – onboarding and further education provider, each with a price per user and month.
3Section 2 “Modules”: switch every module on or off individually. The price chip opens the field “Price for this customer in €”; “List price …” resets it. “+ Usage” names what comes on top according to usage, “requires …” the dependencies.
4Section 3 “Contract”: enter “Users (agreed seats)”, “Discount in %”, “Term” (monthly, 12, 24 or 36 months) and “Billing from” (图 2).
图 2 “Contract”: agreed seats, discount, term and start of billing.
图 2 “Contract”: agreed seats, discount, term and start of billing.
5On the right check the summary “Customer pays” and choose “… review changes” (for a new customer “Set up”).
6In the confirmation window read the before/after comparison and “Apply” — or “Cancel”.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The learning platform is mandatory and always booked (“always included”).
A booked module sets exactly the switches of the feature catalogue that belong to it — fine control of individual features remains possible under “Control”.

The modules by category#

Foundation — learning platform (mandatory), multilingualism
Learning — learning tools, podcasts, interactive learning, learning workshop
AI & avatar — AI tutor, role play (requires the AI tutor), avatar lecturer (by minutes), own avatars (requires the avatar lecturer)
Collaboration — group work, community, watching together
Exams & credentials — exams, competence check, exam proctoring (requires exams), certificates & badges
University — application & admission, university administration, lecturer area, alumni & careers
Companies & HR — HR & further training, employee onboarding (requires HR & further training)
Creation — Course Studio (with the slide editor and the choice of text models)
Connectivity — interfaces

Three kinds of prices#

Per user and month — calculated with the number of agreed seats.
Flat rate per month — independent of the number of users.
By usage — the avatar minute at a fixed rate; other AI services as cost price times a mark-up. The summary shows an estimated amount for this (“Usage (estimated)”); the measured usage is billed.

The summary shows: modules per user × seats, flat rate, discount, usage (estimated) — and at the top the effective price per user and month.

The customer's view: “Booked modules”#

A customer's administration sees its own contract under “Booked modules” (address /dashboard/module): “Your modules”, “You pay … per user / month”, term and start of billing. Under “Book additionally” it chooses a module, sees the price beforehand and sends “Send request”. Nothing is booked without the operator — the request appears in the operator's module management.

If the contract has not yet been set up, it says: “Your contract is being set up. Your provider will contact you.”

Who may do what#

Operator: set modules, prices and contract of every customer, accept or decline requests.
The customer's administration (HR management or university administration with an organisation): read their own contract and request modules — not book them.
Every saved change is in the “History” with time, person and price before → after.

提示#

The prices in the catalogue are guide prices. A deviating price appears as a coloured chip — so you see at a glance where a customer has special conditions.
Whoever switches off a module on which another depends gets the notice “Without … , … is switched off too.” — before saving.
Customers request modules themselves (see below). Open requests are shown at the top above the packages with “Decline” and “Accept & book”.

Demo mode (button “Features”)

运营方

For a demonstration the operator hides features only in their own browser — without changing anything in a customer's settings.

用途#

You do not show a company student elections, or a university employee onboarding. Demo mode slims down the platform for the duration of a demonstration — and still leaves everything there to show it on request.

使用方法#

操作路径HeaderFeatures

1When signed in as operator, the floating button “Features” appears at the top right. It can be moved by the handle on the left; the browser remembers the position.
2Open the button: the window “Features in the demo” lists all features by area (图 1).
图 1 “Features in the demo”: all features by area to tick, at the top the presets.
图 1 “Features in the demo”: all features by area to tick, at the top the presets.
3Remove a tick — the feature is gone immediately in this browser, including pages, menu items and tools. The number on the button says how many are hidden.
4Presets: “Everything on” removes every hiding; “Company compact” hides what a company does not need.
5Close the window with “Close” (×); the choice remains until it is changed.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Features that are off anyway for the chosen organisation are listed with the note “off for this organisation” — demo mode cannot switch them on.
Applies only to this browser: the choice is kept for up to 30 days as a small marker (cookie) in the browser; nothing is stored in the database.

What “Company compact” hides#

the areas “Learning tools in the player”, “Studies & admission” and “University administration” entirely
plus individually: podcasts, mastery, ECTS overview, group work, community, student elections, alumni, mentoring, study partners, examinations office, exam proctoring, achievement archive, lecturer area and office hours

Demo mode or feature catalogue?#

The feature catalogue under “Control” decides bindingly for a customer what exists — for all their users, saved and logged. Demo mode only takes something away additionally in one browser. What the catalogue has switched off stays off.

Who sees the button#

Only the operator. On surfaces that are entirely in a customer's corporate design and must not look like the platform (such as a customer's product presentation), the button does not appear.

提示#

Safe because the mode can only switch off: it names features that should be off; it cannot switch anything on, and it does not affect other users.
Before a demonstration choose “Company compact” and then tick individual features again that are to be talked about.

Tenants & brand

运营方行政

Create new customers with their own address, their own corporate design and their own modules — one platform, many organisations, strictly separated data.

用途#

Every university and every company should experience the platform as their own: their own colours, their own logo, their own address, their own legal texts. The data is nevertheless strictly separated.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationTenants

1As operator open the page “Tenants” (address /plattform/mandanten; from the administration home page via the tile “Tenants”).
2Every row shows logo, name, address, house colour and “booked / all modules”. “Open” shows the organisation as its people see it; “Set up brand” opens this tenant's brand workshop.
3At the bottom “Create new tenant”: enter “Name of the organisation” and “Address” (the identifier before the main domain), then “Create and set up brand”. The message says whether the address was set up — the certificate follows after about a minute.
4In the brand workshop: logo, colours for surfaces and buttons, slide colours, font (or a font file of your own), home page and legal texts of the organisation (Imprint, Privacy Policy). The preview on the right shows the real building blocks with the current values (图 1).
图 1 The preview of the brand workshop: the real building blocks with the organisation's logo, colours and font.
图 1 The preview of the brand workshop: the real building blocks with the organisation's logo, colours and font.
5“Apply brand” saves; the organisation's people see the new brand immediately.
6Set up modules and prices of the new tenant under “Modules & prices”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Bewerbung & Zulassung

A customer instance of its own (own database, own deployment) is created via a single switch of the software; which administration pages it delivers follows from the “Assignment of administration surfaces”.

What the brand workshop sets#

Logo and name of the organisation, header and font in the header
House colour (buttons, links, highlights) and text on the house colour
Surfaces: page background, cards, muted surfaces and text, accent surface, borders, button colour
Slides (workshop): slide background, slide text, slide heading
Font: body text and headings from a selection or as a file of your own; base size, heading scale, corner rounding
Home page of the organisation and its legal texts (Imprint, Privacy Policy) — apply as soon as the address is set up

Who may do what#

Create tenants and set up the brand for every tenant: only the operator.
An organisation's administration can open the brand workshop for its own organisation (address /plattform/marke) — it cannot choose another organisation.

The brand workshop is deliberately not part of the administration's day-to-day business: a brand is set up once and then rarely again.

提示#

Derive the brand from what exists: “Fetch suggestions” reads colours from the organisation's website, “Choose template” from a presentation template, “Choose slide images” from sample slides. Nothing is adopted until saving.
A course carries the brand of the organisation it names — not that of the host it is currently running on.
If setting up the address fails, the tenant is still created; the message states the reason instead of hiding it.

Costs, usage & controlling

运营方

Monthly costs and revenue, usage per student and customer, the derivation of the rendering costs and the controlling cockpit with the state of the university.

用途#

AI costs money per call. Whoever does not see costs only notices a session that is getting out of hand from the invoice — and whoever does not have the state of the university on one screen steers by gut feeling.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationCosts

1“Costs” (cost dashboard): at the top revenue, costs, margin and active users of the month; below that “Costs per service”, “Detail by purpose”, “Top 5 cost-causing sessions” and “Limit triggers this period” (80 %, 95 %, 100 % · blocked) (图 1).
图 1 Revenue, costs, margin and active users of the month.
图 1 Revenue, costs, margin and active users of the month.
2“Usage”: usage per student in the period — occupied seats as the billing basis, streaming and dialogue minutes, average per student, characters and costs of speech output, messages; below that the breakdown by customer and “Export CSV”.
3“Controlling”: the “State of the university” — admission funnel (applications, decided, admitted, enrolled) and key figures on admission, students, success & teaching, operations & certificates, seats, slide analytics and finances (图 2).
图 2 The admission funnel in controlling: applications, decided, admitted, enrolled.
图 2 The admission funnel in controlling: applications, decided, admitted, enrolled.
4From there “Slide analytics”: choose a course and read per slide reached, dwell time (median), drop-off, questions correct and role-play average of the last 90 days.
5“How the rendering costs arise” (from the workshop's language choice, link “How do these costs arise?”): the calculation slides × video minutes × languages × rate per computing minute, step by step.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Usage: the basis of the invoice#

Streaming minutes (presentation), dialogue minutes (conversation with the avatar) and the number of students are billed. Test seats are listed separately and are not charged.

The breakdown by customer is the reason why usage is recorded separately at all: every row is a billing basis of its own. The organisation is on the usage row itself — if a student changes university, their past usage does not move with them.

The monthly report goes to the billing office automatically on the 1st of every month; a button sends the current interim figures immediately.

The key figures of controlling#

Admission — total applications, admitted, rejected, acceptance rate
Students — total, actively studying, graduated
Success & teaching — active courses, assessed achievements, pass rate, ECTS awarded
Operations & certificates — certificates issued, organisations
Seats — agreed, occupied, utilisation, customers at the limit, billed in the month, test seats
Usage — streaming and dialogue minutes in total and per student, costs of the month, active students
Slide analytics — slide views and answers at the slide anchor of the last 30 days
Finances — fees & lecturer fees, revenue & costs

Accounts of the public tour are not students of the university and are not counted. Where a figure was cut off at an upper limit, a warning is shown.

Who may do what#

Costs, usage, controlling, slide analytics and rendering costs are operations surfaces: every page requires the operator role by itself. A university's administration does not see them — its own figures are in Statistics and Booked modules.

提示#

If a source is missing (such as the payment service's revenue), the reason is shown at the top of the page — never a silent zero. The costs come entirely from the platform's own recording and remain visible.
Every call to an external AI or speech service goes through one single recording point; that is why the figures on these pages match.
Costs in dollars are converted at the European Central Bank's daily reference rate; the header says whether the rate is fresh, older or a fallback value.
The “demo rate” of the rendering costs applies only in your own browser and only to the display in the workshop — real costs and billing remain unaffected.

IT control centre

运营方

The operational view in real time: database, avatar machines, render pipeline, live avatar and services — refreshed every five seconds, with status in colour, word and symbol.

用途#

When something goes wrong, the operator should see at a glance where — before a customer calls. And the support team should keep an eye on all tenants at once.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationControl centre

1Open “Control centre” in the administration's bar (address /admin/leitstand; operator only).
2At the top four tiles: database, avatar engine, render pipeline, live avatar — each with status and the reason in words (图 1).
图 1 The four tiles: database, avatar engine, render pipeline and live avatar, each with status and reason.
图 1 The four tiles: database, avatar engine, render pipeline and live avatar, each with status and reason.
3“Tenants · overall view”: one tile per customer; a click opens that customer's view in their brand, with only their data.
4Render pipeline: gauges for finished renders, database latency, active jobs and new jobs in 24 hours; running jobs with “running since”; per course the status of pre-production (图 2).
图 2 The render pipeline with gauges and the jobs of the last 24 hours.
图 2 The render pipeline with gauges and the jobs of the last 24 hours.
5At the bottom “Services” and usage as a counter: “Total since day 1” and “This month · billing”, plus the usage per course.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Two views#

Provider's overall view — all tenants, every five seconds; intended for a round-the-clock support team.
Tenant view — after a click on a customer: only their data, in the customer's corporate design.

The states#

Database — critical if it does not respond; warning from 800 ms response time.
Render pipeline — critical if it cannot be read; warning as soon as a video has failed.
Avatar engine — warning while the machine is running but the renderer is not yet ready.
Services — OK if a service is set up; off if its access is missing.
Live avatar — a stage of its own with its own switch; when it is off, the control centre shows it.

Who may do what#

Only the operator. The control centre reads, it switches nothing.

提示#

The status is never shown by colour alone: every tile carries colour, word and symbol — OK ●, warning ▲, critical ■, off ○, unknown ?.
The signals come from real measurements, not from a default; an “unknown” means that a measurement did not respond.

Demo readiness: live avatar only for appointments

运营方

The live avatar's GPU machines do not run permanently but only for scheduled appointments: they start by themselves ten minutes before and stop afterwards.

用途#

The live avatar needs two GPU machines (renderer and speaker). In continuous operation they cost around a thousand dollars a month, even when nobody is watching. They are only needed for demonstrations, customer meetings and test slots — so that is exactly when they run.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationOverviewDemo readiness

1Open “Demo readiness” in the administration's overview (address /admin/demo-bereitschaft; operator only).
2At the top there is a status light per service: off, starting, ready, stopping or error — with the reason in words and the time of the last check.
3Under “New appointment” choose title, start, duration (at most 240 minutes) and the services; additional pods can be added by their ID. “Create appointment”.
4Ten minutes before the start the machines start; the light only shows “ready” once the service's health check responds. Ten minutes after the end they are stopped.
5For spontaneous demonstrations “Make ready now (60 min)”; to end early “Stop now”. “Emergency stop” prevents any start until it is lifted.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Avatar-Dozent

The controller's rules#

Lead and trail time — ten minutes each around every appointment.
Cost brake — no appointment counts longer than four hours, whatever is entered.
Merging — overlapping time spans result in a single run.
Never without an appointment — machines start only for an appointment or at the push of a button.
Stop, never delete — a stopped machine keeps its address; the environment does not need to change for each demonstration.
The controller runs every minute; immediately after every button press.

Costs#

Each appointment shows an estimate of its costs (lead and trail time included); at the top the month's total so far, the total including planned appointments and, for comparison, continuous operation. The operator enters the price per hour per service.

The actual running time is booked to the minute in cost tracking and appears in the cost dashboard under avatar.

Appointments from a booking page#

An external booking page for test slots can create and cancel appointments itself via a signed interface. It can only order the two fixed services, at most two hours per slot and only in limited numbers; the log shows every entry with the source “Slot booking”.

Who may do what#

Only the operator. Every command is recorded in the page's log and in the administration log.

提示#

Overlapping or closely consecutive appointments are merged into one run — the machines do not stop in between.
If a machine runs without an appointment (for example started by hand), the controller stops it after ten minutes. A machine that is still processing render jobs is stopped only afterwards; the emergency stop stops immediately.
Website and course use the live avatar only when the light shows “ready”. Otherwise the pre-rendered clips or the still image are shown — nobody waits for a machine that is not coming.

Cost watch: alerts on prices and costs

运营方行政

Two watchers run alongside: one checks the providers' prices and the lifetime of the models in use every day, the other checks every hour whether costs are getting out of hand anywhere. What they find appears as an alert in the cockpit.

用途#

A provider changes its price, a model is deprecated, an account uses ten times as much overnight, a GPU machine runs without an appointment — otherwise all of this only shows up with the invoice. Cost watch reports it the same day, bundled and without a flood of e-mails, and never changes a price by itself.

使用方法#

1Operator: open “Alerts” (address /admin/warnungen) — or the “Alerts” tile in the IT control centre.
2At the top are the open alerts by severity: critical, warning, notice. Each says what happened, how much and since when.
3For each alert set the status (open, acknowledged, resolved), choose a person responsible and write a note; everything is recorded in the history.
4Under “Price proposals” is every price that differs on the provider's page from the cost rate — with old and new value, link to the source and the literal excerpt. Only “Adopt” with a reason turns it into the new rate from today; “Reject” leaves everything as it is.
5Under “Thresholds” the limits from which alerts are raised can be set; under “Provider invoices” the monthly invoices for comparison with the recorded costs.
6Administration of an organisation: “Usage alerts” (address /admin/kostenwarnungen) shows its own allowances, usage peaks and conspicuous accounts — without the provider's prices.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

What is checked#

Daily: the price of every documented cost rate on the provider's page, the lifecycle of every model in use (deprecated, retirement, where an alias points) and the ECB reference rate.
Hourly: daily costs per customer, feature and provider against the moving average, allowances at 80, 95 and 100 percent, individual accounts against their organisation, each customer's margin against the minimum margin, GPU machines without an appointment, repeated render failures and — if entered — the provider's invoice against the recorded costs.
If a price page cannot be read, that is an alert too: the price is then unchecked, and the link or the reader needs a look.

Who may do what#

“Alerts” (/admin/warnungen) is seen and edited only by the operator: status, person responsible, notes, thresholds, invoices and adopting a price proposal. “Usage alerts” (/admin/kostenwarnungen) is seen by an organisation's administration — only for its own organisation and without prices, own costs or margin.

提示#

The same matter creates only one alert; an hourly run counts it up instead of creating a new one. E-mails are bundled, at most every few hours — only something newly critical goes out immediately.
A conspicuous account appears in alert and e-mail only with its ID; who it is is shown by “View account” in the cockpit.

Accounts, roles & permissions

运营方

Create real administration accounts and define in a matrix which university function may open which surface — with a visible difference between default and deliberate decision.

用途#

A student registry should see applications and records, but not the costs and operation of the installation. A president should read figures, not process records. Accounts and matrix make this configurable and traceable.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationPermissions

1Open “Accounts & roles”. Under “Create administration account”: choose name, email, “Function” (the description appears below) and organisation, then “Create account” (图 1).
图 1 “Create administration account”: name, email, function with description and organisation.
图 1 “Create administration account”: name, email, function with description and organisation.
2The password appears exactly once — write it down now. It is not stored anywhere and can no longer be retrieved after leaving the page. The account can sign in immediately.
3Under “Who has which role” change the function for every account; demo accounts are marked and cannot be changed here.
4Open “Permissions”: at the top the functions with their technical level, below that a table per group (university operations, operation of the installation, teaching, studies …): surfaces in rows, functions in columns (图 2).
图 2 A group of permissions: surfaces in rows, functions in columns, deliberate deviations outlined in bold.
图 2 A group of permissions: surfaces in rows, functions in columns, deliberate deviations outlined in bold.
5A click on a cell toggles the surface for this function; a second click withdraws the decision and lets the default apply again. Outlined in bold means: deliberately deviated from the default.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The university functions#

IT administration — operation of the installation: operations surfaces, costs, usage, guards and this matrix (technical level operator).
Study affairs — application, admission, student record, examinations office, transcript (level administration).
Administration (general) — day-to-day business of the university without the especially sensitive surfaces (level administration).
President — the view from above: figures, control, credentials; reading, not processing (level administration).
Lecturer — build a course, set an exam, assess (level learner, with teaching authorisation).
Student — the route from the study offering to the transcript (level learner).

IT administration can also change the matrix itself — it is a role of trust.

Which surfaces the matrix knows#

All pages of the administration (derived from the assignment of administration surfaces) plus surfaces outside it: proctoring & usage, lecturer surface, exam creation, learning workshop, fact-check file, student dashboard, studies, course player, survey, badges, doctorate and the HR cockpit. The longest matching path always applies.

Who may do what#

Create accounts, assign functions, toggle the matrix: only the operator.
Whoever may not open a surface lands on the dashboard with the notice “This area is locked for your function.” — “This is a setting in the permission matrix, not an error.”

提示#

The university's organisation is at the front of the selection; empty organisations are marked “(empty)” and are at the back. Without an organisation every administration surface remains closed.
The matrix applies at one single point — the shell of all administration pages. It refines, it replaces nothing: whoever gets through here must still be allowed to access the page below.
Administration accounts are something different from the showcase's demo accounts: those can be adopted without signing in and therefore only see fictitious people.

Seats per customer

运营方

How many seats a customer has agreed and occupied, who is invited, what is free — and what that means in the current month. Deliberately without names.

用途#

The platform sells seats. The operator sees usage, not people — and sets the limit at which new enrolments are politely refused.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationSeats

1Open “Seats”. At the top four figures: seats agreed, of which occupied, billed in the current month, test seats (free of charge) — plus the base fee of the month (billed seats × rate per seat) (图 1).
图 1 Seats agreed, of which occupied, billed and test seats — with the base fee of the month.
图 1 Seats agreed, of which occupied, billed and test seats — with the base fee of the month.
2The table per customer: agreed (as an input field), occupied, free, invited, test and the situation in percent with a word (“room to spare”, “getting tight”, “full”, “nothing agreed”).
3Enter a new number under “Agreed” and “Set” — the message confirms it and warns if more are already occupied.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

How counting works#

One person, one seat — even with several courses. Whoever leaves frees the seat; the row remains as a record so that a past invoice remains traceable.
Partial seats count in full: whoever starts on the second and stops on the fifth is on the monthly invoice.
Without an agreement nobody gets in: if it says 0, every enrolment and invitation is refused — with a clear reason, not with an error.
Test accounts do not occupy a customer seat: the public tour creates real accounts; they go to the provider, not to the customer.

Who may do what#

Only the operator sets limits. The page shows no names — who occupies the seats is managed by the customer themselves (workforce, student administration).

提示#

If the limit is set below the number of occupied seats, nobody is thrown out — only nobody new is added.
If no rate per seat is stored, the seats are counted but not priced; the page says so.
Usage (streaming, dialogue) is added separately — see “Usage”.

Move to Universe

行政运营方

Take over users and their complete history from the previous system — people, roles, courses, enrolments, results with grades and ECTS, credentials and learning history. First a dry run with a check report, then the move in batches; every run can be undone.

用途#

A switch rarely fails because of the new platform, but because of the move: thousands of accounts, years of grades, credentials that must stay valid. The move reads the old system's exports or open exchange formats, checks everything in advance and only writes once the report is right — even with millions of records.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationMove to Universe

1Administration: open “Move to Universe” (address /admin/migration).
2Under “New move” enter a name for the source (e.g. lms-old), the system or format and the purpose in one sentence, then “Create move”.
3Step 1: upload the export (CSV, spreadsheet, ZIP, course backup, XML or JSON) — or, for an interface, enter its URL and an access token and “Fetch”. The token is not stored.
4Step 2 (only for any table): “Suggest mapping” — the assistant maps the columns to the fields; check, correct and “Confirm mapping”.
5Step 3: “Start dry run”. The check report shows per content type how much was read, what is valid, errors with file and line, duplicates, duplicate email addresses and references into nowhere. Nothing is written.
6Step 4: “Start move”. The run writes in batches and shows its progress; faulty records are only skipped after explicit confirmation.
7Step 5: “Take over” — people with an email get an account in your own organisation (or are matched to the existing one), results go into the achievement archive with grade and ECTS.
8Step 6: after weeks of parallel operation, “Compare with source” using a fresh export; if needed “Undo” or “Delete source files now”. The log shows every step.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Schnittstellen

Per move: type “Move” or “Comparison after the move”; for a comparison, optionally mark records that are no longer in the source — nothing is ever deleted that way.
On take-over: “Create missing accounts” and “Take over results” can be chosen separately.
A quick dry run for small exports (up to 4 MB per file) checks immediately and stores nothing.

What moves#

People with name, email, username, student and staff number — and their roles and organisational units.
Degree programmes, modules and courses with term, enrolments with status and period.
Exams and results with grade, points, ECTS, examiner and date.
Credentials and badges — the original is kept unchanged so that a signature of the old issuer stays verifiable.
Learning history (completed, passed, score, duration) and references to files such as term papers.

Which formats#

Own templates: CSV or spreadsheet, one file or sheet per content type.
Any table with the mapping assistant — the route for reports from campus management and HR systems.
Open standards: SCIM 2.0, OneRoster 1.2 (CSV and interface), xAPI and cmi5, SCORM learning records, Open Badges 2.0 and 3.0, Europass credentials, ELMO achievement records, LDAP exports (LDIF).
Course backups and database exports of common learning platforms.

What the move promises#

Repeatable: every record is unique by source, content type and identifier; unchanged records are not written.
In batches and resumable: if a run stops, it continues with the next batch — even without an open window.
Reversible: new records are removed, changed ones reset to their previous state, taken-over results deleted; the most recent run of a source is always undone first.
Measured: one million records checked in about 21 seconds and written in about 29 seconds in 1000 batches (without the database path, test machine).

Data protection#

Every move states its purpose; it is recorded in the log.
Uploaded exports are kept in private storage in the EU and deleted 7 days after completion, at the latest 30 days after upload — immediately on request.
Access tokens for interfaces are not stored.

Who may do what#

A customer's administration only moves data into its own organisation and only sees its own moves. Accounts are matched by email address only within the organisation; if an address belongs to an account outside it, it is not taken over. On the main address the operator chooses the organisation.

提示#

A source is one installation of the old system. Use the same name for later comparisons — that is how the move recognises what is new and what has changed.
Importing the same export twice changes nothing the second time.
For any other system: put the data into the columns of the templates (download on the page) and upload as Universe template.

Sign-in via your own university (SSO)

行政运营方

The university connects its sign-in system (SAML 2.0) itself and tests the connection right away — without waiting for us. The operator assigns the email domains to the customer; new accounts then automatically land with the right tenant.

用途#

No additional password for students and staff — and no waiting for a set-up project: the university's IT enters our details, tests and enables. If it does not work that way, the contact route is prefilled with all technical details.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationConnect university sign-in

1Operator: open “University sign-in (SSO)” in the administration's bar (address /admin/sso). Under “Assign domain” enter the “Email domain” (only the domain, without @) and the “Customer”, then “Assign” (图 1).
图 1 “Assign domain”: email domain and customer.
图 1 “Assign domain”: email domain and customer.
2The list “Assigned domains” shows per row domain, customer and “Sign-in” (图 2). From here the university can continue on its own.
图 2 “Assigned domains” with customer and type of sign-in.
图 2 “Assigned domains” with customer and type of sign-in.
3University administration: open “Connect university sign-in” (address /admin/sso/andocken). Step 1 shows our details for IT: metadata URL (to copy and as a file), entityID, Assertion Consumer Service (HTTP-POST), logout URL and the fingerprint of our certificate.
4Step 2 lists the attributes the sign-in system should release — with their usual OID names: eduPersonPrincipalName (persistent identifier), mail (required), givenName, sn, displayName, eduPersonScopedAffiliation.
5Step 3: enter the metadata URL of your own sign-in system or upload the metadata file, then “Save”.
6Step 4: “Test the connection now” opens the sign-in system in a new window. After signing in with a test account the page shows which attributes arrived and how the person is mapped (identifier, email, name, affiliation, domain) — or the error with an explanation and a suggested fix. A test creates no account.
7Step 5: after a successful test, “Enable”. From then on the sign-in page offers sign-in with the university account for all addresses of the assigned domains.
8If it does not work that way: at the bottom of the page a request with all technical details is already filled in — add what does not work and “Send request”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Schnittstellen

Sign-in started by the sign-in system itself (IdP-initiated) can be switched per connection and is off at first.
Test and preview environments have a built-in test identity provider: it behaves like a university's sign-in system, signs with its own test key and delivers the same attributes.

Two steps, two people in charge#

Assignment (operator) — the domain decides which customer an account belongs to. Takes effect immediately, also for password sign-in.
Connecting (university) — enter the sign-in system, test, enable. No project, no waiting.

What is checked at every sign-in#

Signature with the certificate from the stored metadata — never with a key from the message itself; only secure algorithms (RSA with SHA-256 or SHA-512).
Exactly one assertion; only the signed content is read further. This rules out wrapping of signed messages.
Issuer, consumer URL and audience; validity period with three minutes of permitted clock skew.
Reference to our request, bound to the browser that made it; every response is valid exactly once.
The email domain belongs to the tenant of the connection — otherwise no sign-in.
Encrypted responses are opened (AES-GCM or AES-CBC, key transport RSA-OAEP).

Who may do what — and why so strictly#

Only the operator assigns domains: whoever could enter someone else's domain would inherit another customer's users. The customer's administration enters the sign-in system itself — for its own organisation, on no other tenant. A connection that delivers addresses of a foreign domain is rejected.

Signing out#

Whoever is signed in via the university and signs out is also signed out at the sign-in system if it has a logout URL. If the sign-in system signs out, the session with us ends too.

提示#

Exchanging metadata URLs is easiest: when the university renews its certificate, saving again on our page is enough.
Subdomains do not inherit: mail.example.org needs an entry of its own.
New accounts are created as learner accounts. Further permissions are granted by the administration — never by the university's sign-in system.

Data protection: deletion calendar, dry run and report

行政运营方

Deletion requests, their records and the data held back because of retention obligations — with a deletion calendar, a dry run beforehand and a regular report to the data protection officer.

用途#

In front of a supervisory authority two figures count: what is due today — and what is still there although it was due. The second is the finding a supervisory authority finds first.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationDeletion

1Open the page “Data protection — deletions” under /admin/datenschutz. At the top the notice about overdue items, if there are any.
2Check the scope first: the link “Check the scope first” leads to “Deletion — dry run” (menu item “Deletion”). There enter the “Email of the data subject” and “Check scope” — nothing is deleted.
3The dry run shows per table the strategy (delete permanently, pseudonymise, follows along, check), the number of rows and a note — plus the external systems.
4Back on the data protection page: set up the “Report to the data protection officer” — “Interval in days” (1 to 365; 90 = quarterly), name and email of the data protection officer, then “Save” (图 1).
图 1 “Report to the data protection officer”: interval in days, name and email, the latest reports.
图 1 “Report to the data protection officer”: interval in days, name and email, the latest reports.
5“Blocked, with deletion date” shows per data set category, action, due date and legal basis; “Deletion procedures” every request with date, status and an expandable deletion report (图 2).
图 2 “Blocked, with deletion date”: category, action, due date and legal basis.
图 2 “Blocked, with deletion date”: category, action, due date and legal basis.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The interval of the report is deliberately not in the source code: without a setting the run produces no reports, and the page says so.

Delete, block, anonymise#

Delete — where no obligation stands against it, data is deleted permanently.
Block — where a retention obligation applies, the data set is blocked and gets a deletion date (Art. 17(3)(b) GDPR).
Anonymise or pseudonymise — where connections must be preserved (such as statistics) without a person remaining identifiable.

Two surfaces, two steps#

The dry run shows what a deletion would touch without changing anything. The data protection page executes and writes the record. Whoever does not know this thinks one of the two is broken — that is why they refer to each other.

Who may do what#

Data protection page: an organisation's administration (HR management or university administration) for its organisation, and the operator.
Dry run: only the operator.

提示#

Retention periods are calculated from the end of the year, as tax and commercial law require; the report is based on the result, not on the plan.
Every report can be expanded; “no action required” or the number of open items is already in the row.

Support

学生教师行政运营方

Report questions and problems, answers in your own history; for the team a queue of all requests — and for the provider only the cases a customer explicitly releases.

用途#

Help must be easy to find and must not disappear in an inbox. And a provider that is to help may only see what it is shown.

使用方法#

操作路径CampusServiceSupport

1Open “Help & support” (address /support): at the top “Frequently asked questions”.
2“New request”: choose a category (technology, content, complaint / ombudsperson, other), enter subject and message, tick “confidential” if desired — “Send request” (图 1).
图 1 “New request”: category, subject, message and “confidential”.
图 1 “New request”: category, subject, message and “confidential”.
3Under “My requests” read the history with the support's answers and reply.
4The team answers in the administration under “Support” (support desk): filter by status, expand a request, write “Support's answer …”, set the status and “Answer / update” (图 2).
图 2 The support desk: requests with history, answer field and status.
图 2 The support desk: requests with history, answer field and status.
5If the provider's support needs insight into a student's record, it is granted under “Support access” (address /uds/support-zugang): “Who is it about?”, “For how long?”, “Why?” — “Grant access”. Revoking is possible at any time; access is then closed immediately.
6The provider opens released cases under “Released cases” (address /support-faelle) with “Open case”.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Lernplattform（始终包含）

The status of a request#

Open
In progress
Answered
Closed

Support access: insight only on release#

The everyday case: “Student X cannot get into the exam.” For the provider's support to look in, the university has to allow it — for this one person, for a few days, with a reason, revocable at any time. The reason is in the log of both sides.

The provider sees only the released cases — no inventory, no search, no list of all students. In the case: studies, courses and attempts of this one person.

Who may do what#

Make requests: every signed-in account.
Answer the queue (support desk in the administration): the operator.
Grant and revoke support access: the customer's administration (and the operator), each only for people of their own institution. Accounts without an institution are seen and released only by the operator.
Open released cases: the provider's support, only as long as the release is running.

提示#

A confidential request appears in the queue without a name (“confidential”).
The list of released cases shows no names; whoever opens a case is in the log — visible to the provider and to the customer.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

自动为您创建试用学生，无需注册。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fsupport

Tour switch

运营方

An entry page with two views of the same university: studies and administration — from there straight into the respective area.

用途#

Whoever wants to get to know the platform first chooses from whose point of view: a student's path or the administration's day-to-day business.

使用方法#

操作路径Address /erleben

1If the feature is on for a tenant, the switch is at the address /erleben.
2The page “One process, two perspectives” shows two cards: “Studies” (application, courses, exams, transcript) with “Open studies area” and “Administration” (applications, records, examinations office, transcripts) with “Open administration area” (图 1).
图 1 “One process, two perspectives”: the cards Studies and Administration.
图 1 “One process, two perspectives”: the cards Studies and Administration.
3Below that the route “To the campus map” for the complete overview of all areas.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Lernplattform（始终包含）

Default: off, until a tenant switches it on. Part of the module “Learning platform”.

The two routes#

Studies — from the application via courses and exams to the transcript.
Administration — study affairs in day-to-day business: incoming applications, student records, examinations office, issuing transcripts.

Who may do what#

The switch itself is public as soon as it is switched on; only the operator can switch it on and off in the feature catalogue.

提示#

“Open”, not “view”: whoever clicks here works in the platform — the switch is not a promotional tour.

Change log and regulatory watch

运营方行政

“What's new?” publicly — plus a log of which official sources are monitored, when they were last checked and which content was adjusted afterwards.

用途#

Transparency for customers and auditors: what is new, what has become better and what more secure — and the proof that training content is kept in line with the legal situation.

使用方法#

操作路径Address /changelog

1If the feature is on, “What's new?” is at the address /changelog: entries by type — New, Improved, Fix, Security (图 1).
图 1 A day in the change log with entries by type: New, Improved, Fix, Security.
图 1 A day in the change log with entries by type: New, Improved, Fix, Security.
2Under /changelog/regulatorik is the regulatory log: active sources, last scan, adjustments of the last 90 days, average time to adjustment — chronologically, with a link to the original source.
3Under “Regulatory watchdog” (address /admin/watchdog) the operator sees the configured sources with type, frequency, status, last check, last change and the affected slides (图 2).
图 2 The sources of the regulatory watchdog with type, frequency, status, last check and affected slides.
图 2 The sources of the regulatory watchdog with type, frequency, status, last check and affected slides.
4“Run watchdog now” triggers an extraordinary check; the message states how many sources were checked, how many have changed and which could not be reached.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Lernplattform（始终包含）

Default: off, until a tenant switches it on. Part of the module “Learning platform”.

What the watch shows in the administration#

Active sources (and how many are inactive)
Latest check runs with time
Sources without an initial check — newly created, never queried
Latest change findings with the number of sources checked
The list “Latest scan audits”: manual scan or nightly run, checked, unchanged, with change

Who may do what#

Anyone sees the two public pages as soon as the feature is on. Only the operator sees and starts sources and runs in the administration.

提示#

The sources are generally checked quarterly, export control and sanctions monthly, some areas of law half-yearly; a nightly run only checks what is due.
Every run leaves an entry — visible in the administration and in the public regulatory log.

Quality and transparency page

运营方行政

The public page on which the institution shows how it safeguards course content: seven checking layers, live figures of the last 30 days and a correction promise.

用途#

AI can be wrong. Trust does not arise from a claim but from disclosure: how checking is done, with which figures — and what happens if something was wrong after all.

使用方法#

操作路径Address /qualitaet

1If the feature is on, the page is at the address /qualitaet.
2“The 7 layers”: the route of a statement from the first question to the external check (图 1).
图 1 “The 7 layers”: the route of a statement from the first question to the external check.
图 1 “The 7 layers”: the route of a statement from the first question to the external check.
3“Live metrics (last 30 days)” with data date; they are aggregated daily (图 2).
图 2 The live metrics of the last 30 days with data date.
图 2 The live metrics of the last 30 days with data date.
4“Our promise”: whoever finds a factually wrong statement reports it — the correction comes within 24 hours, affected participants are notified.
5“Open audit log” leads to the public regulatory log.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Lernplattform（始终包含）

Default: off, until a tenant switches it on. Part of the module “Learning platform”.

How the page connects to the administration#

Report via the page → “Quality reports” in the administration (New, Under review, Resolved, Won’t fix).
Correction → “Errata” with a note and a reference to the fix.
Change in the legal situation → “Watchdog” (content quality) → adjusted content in the public log.

Who may do what#

The page is public as soon as it is switched on; the operator can switch it on and off in the feature catalogue.

提示#

Reports via this page land in the administration under “Quality reports” — target: answer within 24 hours.
As long as there is no data yet, this is stated explicitly (“No data yet …”) instead of a zero.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/qualitaet

Interfaces to other learning systems

运营方行政

Other learning systems launch courses of this platform, third-party content runs here; plus keys for the platform's own programming interface and webhooks that notify other systems.

用途#

Customers bring their inventory and keep their existing learning system. The more open the platform, the easier the switch — and the less anyone has to retype a thousand questions.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationThird-party content

1Open “Third-party content” in the administration's bar (address /admin/interop).
2Upload course packages (SCORM 1.2 and 2004 or Common Cartridge including question pools in QTI format). Under “Delivered packages” each is listed with format, number of files, size and remarks (图 1).
图 1 “Delivered packages”: each with format, number of files, size and remarks.
图 1 “Delivered packages”: each with format, number of files, size and remarks.
3“Connected learning systems”: register the platform as a tool in another learning system (LTI 1.3); the platform's own key addresses are listed with each connection.
4“Learning record store”: send learning events via xAPI to the university's learning record store; the list shows the last delivery or the last error.
5“API keys” (address /admin/api-schluessel): “Issue new key”, enter a purpose, tick rights, “Issue” — the key is shown exactly once.
6“Webhooks” (address /admin/webhooks): “Create new target” with purpose, address and events — the secret for checking the signature is shown exactly once.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Schnittstellen

What an API key may do#

Every key sees only the data of its institution. The list “Issued keys” shows the beginning, the rights, the creation date and the last use; “Block” makes a key unusable immediately (afterwards it says “blocked” with a date).

Read courses
Read and write people
Read and write course enrolments
Read learning progress
Read credentials

Which events a webhook reports#

Enrolment created — a person was enrolled in a course, via the interface or in the platform.
Course completed.
Credential issued — with the public verification code, never with the signed credential itself.
Person changed — a name was changed via the interface.

A guard in the code ensures that every event offered is actually triggered somewhere — no promise that a customer builds against and that never arrives.

Who may do what#

Third-party content (packages, learning systems, learning record store): administration and operator.
API keys and webhooks: a customer's administration for its own institution (HR management or university administration with an organisation) and the operator. A customer must be able to set up their connection themselves and switch it off themselves in an incident.

提示#

What cannot be transferred is not bent but reported: matching questions, cloze texts with tolerances and items with partial points are not adopted by the question import.
Adopted question pools can be practised and turned into an exam with one click (see “Imported questions as an exam”).
The complete guide for developers is available without signing in under /entwickler — a service provider can build the connection before receiving a key.
If a webhook target is not reached, delivery is retried for up to 26 hours at increasing intervals; every delivery is signed.

This handbook

学生教师行政运营方

The handbook to all features — searchable, filterable by role and area, with click paths, QR codes for trying things out, deep links and a print view.

用途#

Whoever is looking for a feature should find it within seconds — and be able to try it out right away. The handbook grows with the platform: an automatic guard demands an entry for every feature and every administration page.

使用方法#

操作路径Handbook

1Open “Handbook” (address /handbuch; also linked in the footer of every page if the feature is on).
2Ctrl+K or ⌘K opens the search: typing filters immediately, also by other words for the same thing; ↑ ↓ select, Enter opens, Esc closes (图 1).
图 1 The handbook's search with hits for “exam” — entries, areas and terms.
图 1 The handbook's search with hits for “exam” — entries, areas and terms.
3On the title page choose a role under “For whom?” or filter by role and area under “All features”; the selection is in the address and can be shared (图 2).
图 2 “For whom?”: the entry by role.
图 2 “For whom?”: the entry by role.
4In an entry: “Contents” on the left, “On this page” on the right; every section has “Link to this section”, at the top “Copy link” and “Print / as PDF”.
5“How it all fits together” shows the overall structure as an organisation chart; “Glossary” and “What's new” are in the header and footer.
6“Try it yourself”: the QR code opens the place described — without an account of your own via trial access where this is possible.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Lernplattform（始终包含）

How an entry is structured#

What it is, for whom, why
How it works — numbered steps with the real click path
Close-up images of the place described
Settings — including the switches of the feature catalogue and the module they belong to
Tips, related features, other words for the same thing
In-depth sections — for the detailed chapters

What the handbook contains#

only features that are usable in the product
each with the real click path and, where possible, a way to try it out

How the handbook is maintained#

The content is data in the source code, the pages only display it. Guards check on every test run: every feature of the catalogue and every page of the administration has an entry, links and routes lead to real pages, no third-party names. “What's new” is created from the development history. The content exists in German and English; the guard also checks that both versions stay in step.

提示#

The in-depth details of “Technology & Security” are only visible to signed-in administration and operators — independent of the switch.
The print view can be limited to one area.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/handbuch

Glossary and “What's new”

学生教师行政运营方

The platform's terms explained in plain words, with other words for the same thing and a reference to the matching entry — plus the latest new features.

用途#

Tenant, sphere, speaker spot, head start: whoever understands the words understands the platform.

使用方法#

操作路径HandbookGlossary

1In the handbook open “Glossary” (address /handbuch/glossar).
2Jump via the letter bar; every term names other words for it (“Also …”) and leads to the entry with “More on this” (图 1).
图 1 A term in the glossary with explanation, other words for it and “More on this”.
图 1 A term in the glossary with explanation, other words for it and “More on this”.
3Under “What's new” (address /handbuch/neu) read the latest new features, each with a date and a reference to the entry.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Part of the handbook; switched on and off with the switch “Handbook”.

Where “What's new” comes from#

The new features are created from the development history and assigned to an entry. So every news item leads to where the feature is described.

Glossary, handbook, knowledge#

Glossary — one word, one sentence.
Handbook — how a feature of this platform is operated.
Knowledge — background on learning platforms, courses and further education, independent of operation.

提示#

The handbook's search also finds glossary terms; a term of the same name can appear before the entry.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/handbuch/glossar

Knowledge section “Knowledge”

运营方行政教师学生

Public articles on learning platforms, course creation, further education, regulation and credentials — every question answered briefly first, then in depth, with sources and date, in German and English.

用途#

Whoever searches for “What is an LMS?” or “How do I document mandatory training?” should find a reliable answer — in search engines and in answer engines. The knowledge section explains the field; the handbook explains the operation.

使用方法#

操作路径WebsiteKnowledgeTopicArticle

1Open “Knowledge” (address /wissen, in English /en/wissen; linked in the main menu and in the website footer).
2Choose a topic, e.g. “Learning platform and LMS”, “Creating courses”, “Onboarding” or “Credentials, certificates and microcredentials” (图 1).
图 1 A topic of the knowledge section with its articles.
图 1 A topic of the knowledge section with its articles.
3An article begins with “In short” and “The key points at a glance”; below that “Contents”, the sections, where applicable “Step by step” and “Terms”, then “Frequently asked questions” (图 2).
图 2 “In short”: the answer is at the top of every article.
图 2 “In short”: the answer is at the top of every article.
4“How it works in Universe” leads to the matching page of the platform or to the handbook entry; “Related articles”, “Sources” and “Last reviewed” are at the end.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The knowledge section is a surface of the provider, not a switch of the feature catalogue: it does not exist on a customer instance.
Content exists in German and English; in all other languages the English text appears in a translated shell, with a notice in the page language.

The thirteen topics#

Learning platform and LMS · Creating courses · Presentations · AI in learning
People development · Onboarding · Mandatory training · Academy
Coaching & tutoring · School · University and digital studies
Regulation and mandatory training · Credentials, certificates and microcredentials

As of 16.10.2026: 110 articles, each in German and English.

How the knowledge section is maintained#

An article is a data record in the source code: address (slug), topic, title, description, short answer, key points, sections (with list or table), three to six frequently asked questions, optionally steps and terms, related articles, matching platform pages, sources and the date of the last expert review.
New articles go into the file of their topic per language and are hooked into the language's register; the English version carries the same address.
Guards check on every test run: lengths of title and description, at least three questions, unique addresses, links and platform pages point to existing ones, sources via encrypted address, a valid date — no third-party names, no gendered spelling, all shell texts in all languages.
When revising, set the date “Last reviewed”: it is visible on the article and in the overview for search engines.

For search engines and answer engines#

Every page carries its own canonical address, language references only to existing versions and machine-readable markup (article, breadcrumbs, frequently asked questions, how-to, terms). All articles are additionally available as continuous text for answer engines, the pages in the overview for search engines.

Who may do what#

Read: anyone, without signing in. Change: via the source code — there is deliberately no editing surface, so that every article passes the guards before it appears.

提示#

Handbook entries automatically show under “Background knowledge” the articles that refer to them — and vice versa.
Every figure about the platform must be provable from the code, legal matters need an official source; open standards may be named, third-party names may not.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/wissen

Maike, the concierge

学生教师行政运营方

Maike answers spoken questions about Universe's features and offering from this handbook, explains the part you are looking at on every page of the website, and takes you on a journey in 16 chapters — with examples she demonstrates herself.

用途#

Whoever is looking for a feature simply asks: “Where can I find information about the editor?” Maike names the entry and the section, says “One moment, I'll open it for you” — and the page jumps there. Her knowledge is the handbook; what is not in it, she does not promise.

使用方法#

操作路径HandbookMaike

1Maike floats in the handbook and on every page of the website as a round bubble in which her video plays; she can be dragged anywhere with mouse or finger.
2Tap Maike — she starts listening immediately and offers the section you are looking at: “Shall I explain this part to you?” With “Yes, explain” (or simply “Yes”) she explains exactly that part. The very first time she asks in one sentence whether she may listen and offers the journey. Otherwise simply speak; after a short pause she sends the question herself.
3The ring around her picture pulses orange while she is listening and green while she is speaking. Her answer appears as a short subtitle next to her.
4The round button on the bubble is pause while she is speaking, afterwards play: continue, again or — right at the beginning — the tour.
5If a section fits, Maike flies next to it: the page scrolls there, the rest of the page recedes briefly, a fine line of light runs around the section, and the matching sentences are highlighted briefly. Esc cancels everything.
6The journey (compass button, play right at the beginning or say “Tour”) leads in 16 chapters across the home page, suite, academy and handbook; the handbook itself has its own journey in five chapters. Below the bubble you see the chapter and progress, “Back”, “Skip”, “Start example” and “All chapters”. Where it fits, Maike demonstrates an example on the page herself — such as opening the large view, trying out house colours in the showcase or moving the slider of a sample slide.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Lernplattform（始终包含）

Off: no bubble in the handbook and on the website, Maike does not answer.
The voice is Maike's own; if it is not available, Maike answers only as text — never with someone else's voice.
The clips of the journey are only ever ordered by hand (script scripts/maike-clips-rendern.mjs, a dry run with a cost estimate by default) — never automatically.

Where Maike gets her knowledge#

For every question Maike searches for the most fitting entries of this handbook — via title, short text, steps, in-depth sections and other words for the same thing — and answers only from them. She takes prices and packages from the website's public offering. She answers in the language of the page; on pages whose language the handbook does not yet cover, her source is the English version.

Protected in-depth details from “Technology & Security” are never a source for Maike. She only knows what the public handbook contains.

Her video and the pre-rendered clips#

Maike's own pre-recorded idle loop plays in the circle of the bubble — without waking up any machine. For the texts of the journey and the explanations of the sections there are lip-synchronous clips in her voice; they are rendered in advance and stored on the platform.

If a clip is missing, no longer matches today's text or the page is not in German, Maike speaks as before with her voice in the language of the page; subtitles come in all 15 languages. She answers free questions with her voice while the idle loop keeps playing.

“One moment, I'll open it for you”#

Maike can only open sections that the search has really found — inventing a section is impossible. For this the page switches to the entry if necessary and jumps to the section.

Microphone, consent and limits — who may do what#

The microphone only opens after your one-time consent and only while Maike is listening; speech recognition runs in the EU.
Anyone may ask Maike, without signing in; daily limits apply per connection.
Maike is a synthetic AI figure and is labelled as such: in the hint when pointing at the bubble and for screen readers.

提示#

The browser remembers the position of the bubble; after an answer Maike stays next to the section until you drag her or ask again.
Without a microphone: with the keyboard you reach “Type instead of speaking” — Enter listens, the space bar is play/pause, Esc ends.
With reduced motion (system setting) Maike does not fly but jumps; the page jumps without dimming and line of light, the sentences stay highlighted. Instead of the video the bubble then shows her picture, and demonstrations run without gliding.
A demonstration only changes what you see on the screen — it clicks no links, submits nothing and saves nothing. Esc cancels it, pause stops it.
Maike does not answer questions about a particular university or a degree programme — she is the platform's concierge.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/handbuch

Administration: overview, bar and tools

运营方行政

The home page of the admin back end with tiles, the bar of all administration pages and the tools overview with running counts of open items.

用途#

One look should be enough to see where something is open — and one click to get there. At the same time the back end separates strictly: a university's administration sees its day-to-day business, only the operator sees operation, costs and usage.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationOverview

1Open “Administration” (address /admin). Below the main navigation is the bar “Platform admin” with all administration pages; it can be scrolled sideways.
2The home page shows tiles: tenants, cost dashboard, watchdog, audit evidence bundles, tools, feature catalogue, abuse monitoring, quality reports and diagnostics — each only if the page exists on this installation. Every tile describes the page it opens: “Tools” the overview with counters, “Feature catalogue” the switches per tenant, “Diagnostics” the speech recognition check, unlocking and the live status (图 1).
图 1 The administration's tiles, each with one sentence about the page it opens.
图 1 The administration's tiles, each with one sentence about the page it opens.
3At the top right two emergency buttons: “Check peer voices” (checks the assigned voice for every fellow-learner name) and “Reset audio budget” (in case the sound cuts out during a demonstration).
4Open “Tools”: cards in three groups — compliance & quality (proctoring, quality reports, content quality), users & reach (costs) and transparency (the public quality figures) — with the number of open items; highlighted in yellow what needs attention.
5At the bottom of the home page: “What does NOT happen here?” — a company's employees, invitations and training rate run via the HR cockpit.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Menu items of switched-off features disappear from the bar (e.g. students, matching, document audit, controlling, statistics, support, finances, workshop credits).
Tiles and tool cards only appear for pages that exist on this installation — on a customer instance the provider's surfaces are missing.

The administration's bar#

Day-to-day university business: applications, students, transcript, matching, document audit, statistics, support
Rights and accounts: permissions, accounts & roles, IT administration, test students
Business: controlling, enquiries, course packages, seats, modules & prices, booked modules, usage, finances, costs
Quality and evidence: watchdog, quality reports, audit evidence, deletion, audit log, errata, proctoring
Tools: tools, feature flags, abuse, access codes, pronunciation, learning workshop, workshop credits
Assignment of administration surfaces
At the end, depending on the role: control centre, university sign-in (SSO), data protection, third-party content, API keys, webhooks, regulatory watchdog, launch health, voucher health, my courses

Two levels — the shell and the page#

The shell of all administration pages lets administration and operator in and then asks the permission matrix whether the account's university function may open this surface. Every page then checks its permission itself: operations pages (costs, control centre, controlling, tools …) require the operator, day-to-day pages (applications, students, transcript, badges, surveys, doctorate, fact check) admit the administration.

Whoever is not allowed something lands on the dashboard with a notice — not on an error page.

Who may do what#

Home page and tools: only the operator.
Administration and operator see the bar; which page opens is decided by the page. The ten items at the end only appear if the role may open the page.
“Reset audio budget” only resets your own budget.

提示#

Control centre, university sign-in (SSO), data protection, third-party content, API keys, webhooks, regulatory watchdog, launch health, voucher health and “My courses” are at the end of the bar — each only for roles that may also open the page.
The menu item “Watchdog” leads to content quality; source monitoring itself is under /admin/watchdog.
“Learning workshop” in the bar leads into the course workshop.

Assignment of administration surfaces

运营方

Who owns which administration page — the customer or the provider? With a reason, with the gap and with entries without a page.

用途#

A customer instance must not show a page that has not been decided on. This list is the checklist for that — and it really reads the folder instead of confirming itself.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationAssignment

1Open “Assignment”. At the top “Who owns which surface?” and “This deployment: …” — whether this installation is the provider's or a customer instance.
2Two counters: “The customer” (stays in a customer instance) and “Universe” (operation across all customers; locked in a customer instance) (图 1).
图 1 The two counters: the customer's surfaces and the surfaces of operation across all customers.
图 1 The two counters: the customer's surfaces and the surfaces of operation across all customers.
3“Not assigned”: pages that are in the folder but in no list. They remain visible — a forgotten entry must not take anything away from the customer; nevertheless nothing has been decided about them.
4“Entered, but no longer present”: entries without a page.
5Below that, per group, every page with address (clickable) and reason.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The two groups#

The customer — university or company operations; stays in a customer instance.
Universe — operation of the software across all customers; locked in a customer instance. This also includes “Finances” (tuition fees and lecturer fees): the page reads across all tenants and therefore does not belong in customer hands.

Who may do what#

Only the operator. The page reads and shows; the assignment is changed in the source code.

提示#

The list does not move any page; it is a checklist.
The permission matrix derives its administration surfaces from the same list — it exists only once.

IT administration & access rights

运营方

All accounts with the three access rights that can really be set: role, teaching authorisation and organisation — plus the applicable rules on which role sees which surfaces.

用途#

If someone cannot get in or sees too much, it is almost always down to role, teaching authorisation or organisation — all three are here in one place.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationIT administration

1Open “IT administration”.
2Find an account in the field “Search by name or email…”.
3In the row choose the role (students, org admin (HR), owner (full access)), tick “Lecturer” for teaching authorisation and choose the organisation (“— none —” possible).
4“Save” — the row reports “saved” or “error”.
5At the bottom “Roles & visibility”: which role sees which surfaces; features are enabled under “Features” (Control) (图 1).
图 1 “Roles & visibility”: which role sees which surfaces.
图 1 “Roles & visibility”: which role sees which surfaces.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Roles & visibility#

Owner — full administration area: costs, watchdog, audit, administration, IT administration, features — as well as all teaching and learning surfaces.
Org admin (HR) — HR cockpit: manage employees, assign courses, view progress. No administration area.
Teaching authorisation (addition to the role) — teaching: course production, classes and assessment.
Students — own dashboard: take courses, learn, view transcripts.

Who may do what#

Only the operator. The list is loaded with elevated rights because profiles would otherwise not be readable due to the database's row-level protection — that is why the page is behind the strictest guard.

提示#

Teaching authorisation is an addition to the role: it opens course production, classes and assessment — regardless of which role the account otherwise has.
A role that cannot be chosen here (such as that of the university administration) appears as “(legacy)” and is preserved. Administration accounts with a university function are created under “Accounts & roles”.

Test students and your own test courses

运营方

Create throwaway students with a real sign-in, move through the platform as them and delete them again — and enrol yourself in any course for testing.

用途#

Testing happens on the real installation, with real recording of usage. That requires accounts that are marked as test accounts and disappear again without a trace.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationTest students

1Open “Test students”. Under “Create”: name (optional — otherwise random), number (1 to 25) and “Enrol in course (€0)”, then “Create student” or “Create … students” (图 1).
图 1 Test students: on the left “Create” with name, number and course, on the right the list with “Sign in as”.
图 1 Test students: on the left “Create” with name, number and course, on the right the list with “Sign in as”.
2The password for manual sign-in appears with a copy button.
3In the list, per student, “Sign in as” — a new tab signs in this student there. Back to the operator: sign out in the test tab or keep using your own tab.
4Clean up: individually via the bin or “Delete all”.
5“My courses (test access)” (address /admin/my-courses): enter one course or, with “All courses into my list”, every course into your own account — without payment, without a voucher; existing ones are skipped.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

What the list shows#

Name, email and — if available — matriculation number
the number of enrolled courses
“Sign in as” (new tab) and delete

Who may do what#

Only the operator — both pages.

提示#

Every account created this way is marked as a test account and does not occupy a customer seat.
The whole route can be played through: course, exam, transcript — with real recording of usage.

Abuse and network addresses

运营方

Who costs the most today? Usage per network address against the daily limits, set and lift blocks — only checksums are stored, never real network addresses.

用途#

A program that drives up AI costs should be noticed quickly — and a person blocked wrongly should be able to get back in quickly.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationAbuse

1Open “Abuse” (abuse dashboard). It shows today by universal time.
2At the top: active network addresses today (of which blocked), sessions today, AI tokens today, daily costs today and the exchange rate used (图 1).
图 1 Active network addresses, sessions, AI tokens and daily costs of today.
图 1 Active network addresses, sessions, AI tokens and daily costs of today.
3“Active daily limits per IP”: sessions, AI tokens, audio characters, minutes of speech recognition, avatar minutes and costs — with the smaller share that applies to demo sessions.
4“Top IPs by daily costs”: per row shortened checksum, sessions, tokens, audio characters, minutes, costs and status (active or blocked, with reason) (图 2).
图 2 “Top IPs by daily costs” with shortened checksum, usage, status and “Block immediately”.
图 2 “Top IPs by daily costs” with shortened checksum, usage, status and “Block immediately”.
5“Block immediately” blocks an address for the day, “Lift block” resets the daily block.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

What is limited#

Sessions per day
AI tokens
Characters of speech output
Minutes of speech recognition
Avatar minutes
Costs in dollars

Demo sessions only get a share of these limits; the share is shown on the page.

Who may do what#

Only the operator blocks and unblocks; every action takes effect immediately and the page loads the new state.

提示#

The daily limits are in the installation's configuration; the page shows them so that nobody has to search configuration files.
If nothing has happened yet today, this is stated explicitly — the list fills up as soon as sessions run.

Access codes and voucher health

运营方

Codes with which someone enrols in a course without payment — with a maximum number of redemptions and a sending link; plus a list of stuck enrolments that can be redeemed afterwards at the push of a button.

用途#

For pilot groups, partners and events: a code instead of an invoice — and no enrolment that silently gets stuck.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationAccess codes

1Open “Access codes”. Under “Create new unlock code”: choose a course, enter a code or “Random”, “Max. redemptions” (empty = unlimited, 1 = one-time code) and an internal label, then “Create code” (图 1).
图 1 “Create new unlock code”: course, code or random, maximum number of redemptions and label.
图 1 “Create new unlock code”: course, code or random, maximum number of redemptions and label.
2The list “Codes” shows code (with label), course, “Redeemed” (x / maximum), status (active or deactivated) and the sending link; “Deactivate” or “Activate” per row (图 2).
图 2 The codes with course, redemptions, status and sending link.
图 2 The codes with course, redemptions, status and sending link.
3Redemption happens under /coupon/einloesen or via the sending link /start/<course>?code=<CODE>, which prefills the code.
4“Voucher health” (link at the top of the page): users who registered with a code but whose enrolment is missing — with email, code, course and time.
5“Redeem all now” catches up on the enrolments; the message states checked, redeemed and genuinely blocked.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The fields of a code#

Course — for which course (and which level) the code applies
Code — freely selectable or random; stored in capital letters
Max. redemptions — empty = unlimited
Label (internal) — what the code is for, e.g. a pilot group

Who may do what#

Create and deactivate codes and catch up on enrolments: only the operator. Redeem: anyone with a code.

提示#

Usually a stuck enrolment heals itself on the next visit to the dashboard or in the daily run; “genuinely blocked” means: used up or invalid code.
The link “Launch health” at the top leads to launch readiness with a test email.

Enquiries from the website

运营方

What comes in via the website's contact form — universities, academies, companies — in one place, with contact, interest and message.

用途#

An enquiry that is stored but not displayed anywhere is lost — only more slowly than one that was never stored.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationEnquiries

1Open “Enquiries”. At the top: total number and how many are open.
2Per enquiry: organisation, type (university, academy, company, other, try it yourself, callback), status (“open”, “answered” or “discarded”), name, email (clickable; for a callback only the number), phone, “interest” in modules, message and time.
3Answer by email from within the enquiry.
4Afterwards “Mark as answered” or “Discard”; the “open” count at the top drops immediately. “Reopen” resets an enquiry.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Who may do what#

Only the operator. The page is a surface of the provider across all customers.

提示#

The form is publicly available under /plattform/kontakt.
Module requests from existing customers do not arrive here but in module management under “Customer requests”.

Audit log and audit evidence bundle

行政运营方

Who did what when in an organisation's administration — and a package with all records for an auditor, as one file with a checksum per file.

用途#

In an audit by an auditor, a supervisory authority or a customer, what counts is what is documented. Every change in the administration is logged; the package bundles the records with which, for example, the training obligation of the European AI Act can be proven.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationAudit log

1Open “Audit log”: “All admin actions in <organisation>, newest first”.
2“Activity (top 5)” shows the most frequent actions; a click filters by them. A click on a person filters by them; “Reset filter” removes this.
3Every entry: action (e.g. “Invitation sent”, “Role changed”), up to three details, person and time (图 1).
图 1 A person's audit log entries: action, details, person and time.
图 1 A person's audit log entries: action, details, person and time.
4Open “Audit evidence”: the page shows what the package contains — with current figures (图 2).
图 2 What the audit evidence package contains — with current figures.
图 2 What the audit evidence package contains — with current figures.
5“Download ZIP” — the package is built live from the current data; generating it is noted in the audit log.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

What the package contains#

01 — data processing agreement, issued to the organisation, with technical and organisational measures and a list of sub-processors (PDF).
02 — status of all accounts of the organisation: certificate, result, validity, verification address (CSV).
03 — per employee the current certificate with QR code (PDF).
04 — the administration actions of the last 60 days (CSV).
05 — the content adjustments of the last year justified by regulation (CSV).
06 — description of the regulatory watch procedure with a reference to the public log.
07 — machine-readable index with a checksum per file, for verifying the authenticity of the whole package.

Which actions are logged#

Dashboard opened
Employee list opened
Invitation sent, resent, cancelled
Employee removed or updated
Report exported
Role changed

Who may do what#

Both pages are opened by an organisation's administration (HR management or university administration with an organisation) and the operator — each only for their own organisation, never platform-wide.

提示#

The entries are immutable and kept for 365 days.
The page shows the last 300 entries; for older ones the filter by person or action helps.

Pronunciation of the avatar voice

运营方

Correct terms the voice mispronounces without a program change — word-exact, case-sensitive, each entry can be switched on and off.

用途#

Technical terms and abbreviations often sound wrong. A correction here takes effect in all courses.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationPronunciation

1Open “Pronunciation”.
2Enter “Term (as in the text)” (e.g. IT), “Pronunciation (as it sounds)” (e.g. Eye-Tee) and optionally a note — then “Add” (图 1).
图 1 Create a term with pronunciation and note.
图 1 Create a term with pronunciation and note.
3In the table toggle each entry “active”/“off” or delete it via the bin.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The fields#

Term — up to 60 characters
Pronunciation — up to 120 characters
Note — optional, up to 200 characters
Active — can be switched on and off without deleting the entry

Who may do what#

Only the operator; the list applies to the whole installation.

提示#

Matches are word-exact: IT also applies in IT security, never within a word in which the letters merely occur.
Voice already generated stays as it was: the correction applies the next time a slide is played or after the next pre-production. Finished videos are never re-created by themselves.
Built-in terms (such as common standards and supervisory abbreviations) continue to apply even if the list is empty.

Content quality, quality reports and errata

运营方

Deviations between course content and the current legal situation with deadlines by severity, users' error reports on slides and the error triage from preview and player.

用途#

An error in the course should be fixed quickly and traceably — with a deadline, with a reason and with a visible correction.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationWatchdog

1“Watchdog” in the bar opens “Content quality — regulatory watchdog”: at the top monitored facts, open alerts, critical, deadline exceeded and last scan; “Start scan” checks immediately (图 1).
图 1 Monitored facts, open and critical alerts, exceeded deadlines and the last scan.
图 1 Monitored facts, open and critical alerts, exceeded deadlines and the last scan.
2Under “Content alerts” every detected deviation with severity, age against deadline, old and new value; buttons “Approve”, “Postpone”, “Reject” — after approval “Deploy → audit log”, which makes the adjustment visible in the public log.
3“Quality reports”: reports from users (target: answer within 24 hours). Filter “Open” or “All”; per report description, slide, disputed fact and the fact that is correct according to the report; buttons “Under review”, “Mark resolved” (with optional note) and “Won’t fix” (with reason).
4“Errata” (error triage): reported errors from preview and course player, filterable by status, course and category; edit status, triage note and reference to the fix directly per entry and “Save”.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The states#

Content alerts — open, approved, rejected, postponed, deployed
Quality reports — new, under review, resolved, won’t fix
Errata — open, in progress, fixed, will not be fixed, duplicate

Categories of errata#

Content
Language
Image does not match what is spoken
Audio
Design
Sources
Other

Who may do what#

All three pages: only the operator. Learners report via the quality page and in the player; lecturers see the checks of their own content in the fact-check file.

提示#

Deadlines by severity: critical 48 hours, important 7 days, informational 30 days. Deployed, rejected and postponed alerts no longer count against the deadline.
The “Scan history” shows every run with type, checked, unremarkable and flagged facts.

Handing over course packages

运营方

Export a finished course as a file from one installation and import it into another — with a checksum, customer assignment and approval before it becomes visible.

用途#

Handing over a course built on commission should be an object you can send, store and verify — not a manual operation in a database. After the handover the course belongs to the customer.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationCourse packages

1Open “Course packages”.
2“Export”: choose a course (file course or published workshop course), optionally “Title in the package”, then “Download package” (图 1).
图 1 “Export” and “Import”: choose a course and download the package, choose a customer and import the package.
图 1 “Export” and “Import”: choose a course and download the package, choose a customer and import the package.
3“Import”: choose “For which customer?” (or “— do not assign yet —”) and choose the package file. The checksum is verified; if it does not match, nothing is created.
4The message names modules, slides and media — and that the course is “not yet visible”.
5Under “Arrived here”: check, if necessary “Assign customer …”, then “Approve”. With “Withdraw” a course is no longer delivered; the row remains as a record.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The states of an imported package#

imported · not yet visible
approved · playable
withdrawn — no longer delivered, remains as a record

A course with the wrong customer cannot be taken back, only explained — so check first, then approve.

What is listed per package#

Title, origin (installation and course key), time of import
Modules, slides, media
who owns it and the identifier under which it runs
the checksum

Who may do what#

Only the operator. A workshop author can additionally adopt a course package in the workshop as a new draft (see “Creating a course from material”).

提示#

Media (graphics, voice recordings, pre-produced videos) are not in the package — it would be gigabytes in size. Their list is in it, with a checksum as far as the file is here; the others must be transferred separately.
Importing a package twice creates nothing twice; the message says “already there”.
Reading uses the same route as the course player — what is exported is exactly what students see.

Launch health and diagnostics

运营方

A checklist of whether the installation is ready to launch — red blockers, yellow warnings, a real test of email delivery — and the diagnostics page with tools and live status.

用途#

Before a launch (new customer, new instance, pilot) nothing should fail because of a missing setting — and in operation, locked sessions and a failed service should be quick to find.

使用方法#

操作路径AdministrationDiagnostics

1Open “Launch health” under /admin/launch-health (also linked on the page “Access codes”). At the top: “No open blockers — ready to launch” or the number of open blockers.
2The table: per checkpoint status (green, red = blocker, orange = warning), name and detail (图 1).
图 1 The checkpoints with status (green, warning, blocker), name and detail.
图 1 The checkpoints with status (green, warning, blocker), name and detail.
3“Test email delivery live”: enter a recipient and “Send test email” — confirms the whole sending route, not just the key.
4“Diagnostics” (tile on the home page; address /diagnostics, the old address in the administration redirects there): tabs “Tools” and “Uptime”.
5“Tools”: “Check speech recognition” queries the active EU service and reports whether the key is set and accepted — the page never shows the key itself. The fallback service outside the EU only appears if it has been explicitly switched on, and then with a warning. Next to it “Unlock all locked sessions” — unlocks sessions that have reached their usage limit and resets their counters.
6“Uptime”: “Live system health” with “Check now” — overall status, version, environment, response time and the dependencies; plus two addresses for external monitoring.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The checkpoints#

Database reachable (blocker)
Table of access codes present (blocker)
Redemption function present — checked with a non-existent code that uses up nothing (blocker)
Access codes with remaining redemptions available, counted across all courses and broken down per course (warning — without codes enrolment runs via other routes)
Stuck enrolments (warning)
Email sending set up (blocker)
Secret for background runs set (warning)

Who may do what#

Launch health: only the operator.
Diagnostics, speech recognition check and unlocking: only the operator — both affect the whole installation.

提示#

A red blocker prevents the launch, an orange warning does not.
For external monitoring: have the light address (“liveness”, answers without a database) pinged every 1 to 5 minutes, the thorough one (“readiness”) less often.

Subscription & activation

行政运营方

Every organisation books exactly what it needs: individual building blocks, individual features or everything. Seats and billing monthly or yearly, changes immediately and pro rata; features that are not booked show a calm activation card instead of an error.

用途#

Not every institution needs everything. Whoever only wants group work books only group work; whoever grows adds features without renegotiating. A single source decides what is enabled — pages, interfaces and background jobs all follow it.

使用方法#

1Administration: open “Subscription & features” (address /admin/abo).
2Choose building blocks — “Build & learn courses” is always included. “Everything” selects all building blocks. Under “More features individually” (expand) are features available without the whole building block; anything already in a chosen building block is not listed there.
3Whatever a feature needs is added automatically and named on the right; whoever deselects something sees what goes with it.
4Set seats and billing (monthly or yearly). On the right are the total and — for a running subscription — the pro-rata amount for the rest of the period.
5“Subscribe” leads to checkout; the first subscription starts with a trial. For a running subscription, “Apply change”: added features are enabled after payment, removed ones are credited pro rata.
6Below: next invoice, invoices as PDF, payment method and billing address, grants and “Cancel subscription” (at the end of the period, can be undone until then).
7Wherever a feature that is not booked appears in the product, a card shows its benefit in one sentence; administrators see the price and “Enable now”, everyone else only that their organisation can enable the feature.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Applies only to organisations switched to the subscription; all others keep their switches as before.
Whoever was there before the switch keeps everything they use (grandfathering).
The tenant switch can still turn a booked feature off — but cannot turn anything on beyond what is booked.

If a payment is outstanding#

Everything keeps running until the end of the grace period; the page names the date.
After that, creating and managing are read-only: content stays visible, changes are blocked.
Learning always remains possible — courses, quizzes, exams, credentials.
After a cancellation everything booked is read-only. Nothing is deleted.

Who may do what#

The organisation's administration books, changes and cancels the subscription and sees invoices and prices.
The operator grants pilot customers and trials in the cockpit /admin/abo-betrieb.
Everyone else only sees, at a feature not booked, that their organisation can activate it — without prices.

提示#

If a payment is outstanding, everything keeps running at first. After that, creating and managing are read-only; learners keep learning, and no data is lost.
The operator grants pilot customers and trials of individual features in the cockpit /admin/abo-betrieb — with an end date or without.

Prices, costs and allowances

行政运营方

Administrators see where usage arises in their own organisation — by feature, course, group and person —, set limits and adjust package and allowances with an immediate price preview. The operator maintains prices and cost rates with sources and sees costs, revenue and margin per customer.

用途#

A seat price alone does not fit every use: a presentation costs fractions of a cent per view, a live learning session with the avatar many times that. Allowances, limits and a transparent price per seat keep both fair — for the organisation and for operations.

使用方法#

1Administration: open “Usage & costs” (address /admin/kosten).
2At the top is the status of the pooled allowances this month with a forecast to month end.
3Under “Cost drivers”, view the share per feature, course, group and person; clicking a person shows their usage individually.
4Under “Limits”, set a limit per day or month for the whole organisation, a group or a person and choose what happens when it is reached.
5Under “Package and allowances”, adjust seats, building blocks and allowances — the price per seat changes immediately; “Submit order” sends the change to the operator.
6Operator: prices and cost rates at /admin/preise, costs and margin per customer at /admin/kosten-kunden.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Lernplattform（始终包含）

Limits throttle gently: first text instead of the live avatar, then a notice, optionally no new questions until the next period. Courses, slides and exams always stay open.
Person-related analysis only for your own organisation and only for cost control; learners see only their own usage.

How the price is built#

The seat price follows tiers; the price of the tier reached applies to all seats, and nobody pays more than the minimum quantity of the next tier.
Building blocks cost a fixed share of the seat price; “Everything” is cheaper than the sum.
Raising or lowering an allowance shows the change in the price per seat immediately.

Who may do what#

Administration sees usage and costs of its own organisation, sets limits and submits package changes.
The operator maintains prices and cost rates (/admin/preise) and sees costs, revenue and margin per customer (/admin/kosten-kunden).
Learners only see their own usage.

提示#

Every price and cost row in the operator area carries source, retrieval date and evidence status; changes are recorded with a reason as a new row.

第 10 章

Apps

The platform runs in the browser on phone, tablet and computer — without installation, with the same operation on every device.

Mobile in the browser

学生教师行政运营方

The whole platform on phone and tablet — without installation: slide from edge to edge, a bar for the essentials, a control ring for everything else, in portrait and in landscape.

用途#

People learn on the go. On a small screen the slide has priority; the speaker becomes small, the controls move into one button, and nothing covers the content.

使用方法#

操作路径CourseControl ring

1Open the institution's address in the phone's browser, sign in or use trial access.
2In the course the slide runs from edge to edge; the speaker appears as a small bubble (图 1).
图 1 The course on the device: slide from edge to edge, the speaker as a small bubble, at the bottom the transport bar.
图 1 The course on the device: slide from edge to edge, the speaker as a small bubble, at the bottom the transport bar.
3At the bottom the transport bar with five controls: previous slide · 10 seconds back · play/pause · 10 seconds forward · next slide.
4Everything else is opened by the round button at the bottom right — the control ring: one tap fans out the functions, each with icon and word; a tap next to it, Esc or the X closes it.
5Turned to landscape, the bar becomes a small pill that can be dragged anywhere by its handle; the slide fills the height.
6Enlarge and move the slide with two fingers; the back button restores the starting position.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

When the platform is “mobile”#

narrow — up to 767 pixels wide,
or low — up to 520 pixels high (a phone in landscape),
or a tablet in portrait up to 1100 pixels wide.

Everything else counts as desktop: then with header, footer bar and large speaker. An automatic guard checks these rules and the position of the controls.

What changes on the phone#

The desktop header and footer bar disappear; a narrow header only appears in portrait.
The speaker bubble is small (96 pixels) and carries no control block.
The column is borderless; in landscape the slide fits the height instead of a narrow column.

The mobile preview#

Under /g-uds-demo/mobil a course is shown in a frame with the dimensions of a phone (390 × 844) or tablet (768 × 1024) and scaled down to the screen. Rotating swaps width and height. A workshop course starts there as a preview in the student view — without author tools, nothing is published.

提示#

In the campus the mobile preview shows every course in a phone or tablet frame, portrait and landscape — the player lays itself out there exactly as on the device.
The browser remembers the position of the pill per course; it always stays in view.
Subtitles can be switched on at the speaker bubble; bubble and subtitles never land on the bar.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo/mobil

Add to home screen

学生

The campus can be placed on the home screen like an app and opens directly in the learning arena without browser bars.

用途#

One tap instead of typing an address — and a surface that feels like an app.

使用方法#

操作路径CampusBrowser menuAdd to home screen

1Open the campus in the phone's browser (address /g-uds-demo).
2In the browser's menu choose “Add to home screen” (depending on the browser “Install” or “Add app”) (图 1).
图 1 The notice “To your phone” in the learning arena with the install button.
图 1 The notice “To your phone” in the learning arena with the install button.
3The new icon opens the learning arena without browser bars, in portrait (图 2).
图 2 The weekly leaderboard in the learning arena.
图 2 The weekly leaderboard in the learning arena.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

How it works#

A manifest describes name, icon, start page (the learning arena), colours and orientation; a small background service makes the campus installable. It is only registered for the campus area and passes every request on to the network unchanged — it deliberately buffers nothing.

Web app or app from the store?#

The web app is available today and needs no installation from a store. Notifications, storage on the device and working offline are not part of its scope.

提示#

The web app caches nothing: it loads every page fresh from the network and can therefore never show outdated content. It does not work without a connection.
It only applies to the campus; the rest of the website remains an ordinary website.
On the home screen it is called “Learning arena”; the full name carries the operator of the installation. The avatar figure serves as the icon.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/g-uds-demo

第 11 章

Technology & Security

Public: a general overview of operation in the EU, data protection and the handling of AI. The in-depth details — architecture, data flows, individual protective measures — are visible only to signed-in administration and operators.

How the platform is built

学生教师行政运营方

A web application that runs in the browser, with a relational database in Frankfurt and data centres in the EU — multi-tenant, multilingual, secured by thousands of automated tests.

用途#

Whoever introduces a platform for studies, exams and staff wants to know what they are relying on.

使用方法#

1Nothing to install: the platform runs in every current browser on computer, tablet and phone.
2Every institution is a tenant of its own with its own brand; its data is separated from that of other tenants.
3Every feature can be switched per tenant.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Key facts#

Web application with pages generated on the server and interactive parts in the browser
Relational database with row-level protection per tenant, file storage and sign-in — location Frankfurt
Execution of the application in an EU region (Frankfurt)
Interface in fifteen languages
Every feature switchable per tenant, every module bookable individually

Operation and data in the EU

学生教师行政运营方

Database, files and server functions are in Frankfurt — as a hard rule in the code that an automated test checks on every change. Individual services such as speech output work in the USA; they are named.

用途#

Universities and companies have to prove where personal data is processed. A promise on a website only helps if it is in the code and is checked.

使用方法#

1User data, exam results, certificates and payment data are in the database in Frankfurt.
2The application itself runs in an EU region; the region is in the configuration in the source code and applies to every deployment — including every future customer instance.
3An automated test fails as soon as someone removes the region, empties it or sets it to one outside the EU.
4Speech recognition (speaking instead of typing) runs in the EU and would rather refuse service than fall back to a provider outside the EU. A fallback is only possible with an explicitly set switch that is off by default.
5Graphics servers for the avatar videos that the platform creates itself are only set up in data centres in the EU; they are rented from a provider based in the USA. Speech output works in the USA and only receives the text to be spoken.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Why this is a rule in the code#

When the installation was moved, it turned out that the application ran in a region outside the EU — not as a decision, but as the hosting's default for new projects. The database was in Frankfurt, the processing was not. Since then the region has been in the source code, and a test checks it: a setting in an administration interface is invisible, one in the source code appears in every change.

What is processed where#

Database, file storage, sign-in — Frankfurt
Application — an EU region
Speech recognition — EU, without silent fallback
The workshop's language model — optionally an EU-hosted model (Paris); which models a tenant uses, it decides itself
Avatar videos — own machines in an EU data centre

Language models receive course content as context and the question — no names or account data; speech output receives the text to be spoken.

提示#

London is in Europe, but not in the EU — the test knows the difference.
Whoever wants to know which data goes to which service finds this (after signing in as administration) under “Technology & Security” → “Data flows”.

AI on the platform — what it may and may not do

学生教师行政运营方

AI writes suggestions, presents courses and answers questions — labelled, bound to sources and with fixed limits: it does not assess exam behaviour and decides nothing that a person must decide.

用途#

Trust in AI arises from clear rules that can be looked up — and that are held in place in the code by guards, not only in a policy.

使用方法#

1Labelled: presenter and voice-over are visibly marked as AI-generated above every slide, with “What exactly?” for the details (图 1).
图 1 The notice above every slide: presenter and voice-over are AI-generated, with “What exactly?” — below it the slide it refers to.
图 1 The notice above every slide: presenter and voice-over are AI-generated, with “What exactly?” — below it the slide it refers to.
2Suggestion instead of decision: in the workshop nothing lands on a slide unasked; for papers there is a grade proposal, a person sets the grade.
3Bound to sources: answers in the course pass through a verification chain; what is unsupported is marked as such; the inventory is checked against sources on a schedule.
4Guardrails: attempts to get the AI out of its role, to query internals or to cause harm are fended off and logged.
5Choice of model: every tenant decides which language models the workshop may use; one of them works in the EU (Paris).

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Where AI explicitly does not decide#

Exam proctoring — the machine counts incidents, a person reviews and releases; a guard only allows the release at two places.
Grades — for papers there is a proposal, the teacher sets the grade.
Slides — generated images, graphics and texts are suggestions; only “Accept” inserts them. A guard prevents the route past the suggestion bar.
Competences — AI may suggest competences and assessments; only what those responsible for the course have approved takes effect, and a “demonstrated” needs several independent pieces of evidence.
Disputed facts — are not decided but shown with both supported positions.

Labelling under the AI Act#

The transparency obligation of the European AI Act (Art. 50) requires that people recognise when they are talking to AI or seeing AI-generated content. That is why the notice appears above every slide, lecturers' own avatars are likewise labelled as AI-generated, and the platform shows on its quality page how content is checked.

Every call is recorded#

Every call to an external AI or speech service goes through one single recording point; limits at 80, 95 and 100 percent ensure that a conversation ends in a friendly way instead of breaking off when the quota is used up.

提示#

The checking tool for papers is explicitly classified in the guideline as a high-risk system within the meaning of the European AI Act.
There is deliberately no AI score for cheating — and no machine that judges an incident in an exam.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

该页面无需登录即可访问。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/probe?ziel=%2Fdashboard

Load test for many concurrent users

运营方

A tool that measures how many concurrent users the installation can handle — with a request cap, abort under overload and a report as a file. Measured up to 150 reading users; the large stages run as a project service against a preview environment.

用途#

An exam week is a load peak. Only what has been measured is reliable — and only what has been measured repeatably may go into a service description.

使用方法#

1The tool runs: it walks a student's route (home page, sign-in form, course list, course page, an image), does not sign in and creates no render jobs.
2Before the start it states how many requests the run will make and sets a cap (the plan plus a fifth, or chosen by you): once it is reached, the run stops. Above 50,000 requests and against production it requires explicit confirmation.
3If the installation tips over — a quarter errors in the last 200 requests — the run aborts by itself instead of loading it further.
4At the end it writes a report as a file: response times (p50, p95, p99), errors by type, every route separately, cap and reason for aborting.
5The large stages (1,000 and 5,000 enrolled) are a project service: they need a preview environment with a copy of the database and load from several lines.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

What has been measured#

Up to 100 concurrent readers the installation answers all requests: 0 errors in 4,050 requests over six runs, 95 % of answers under 400 ms.
At 150 the first timeouts occur (0.13 %), and the slowest 5 % take over one second — no server error, no throttling.
Measured from one computer against production, reading routes only; the line was not the limit.

Figures above 150 concurrent users cannot be guaranteed as long as the load comes from only one computer.

第 12 章

Suite & Academy

The Universe Ultimate Suite arranges the existing features into thirteen products, each bookable as a package, price on request. The Universe Competence Academy bundles offerings for schools, companies and individuals — Classroom, Tutoring, Corporate and Coaching — carried by the same competence engine. The page “How it all fits together” shows how everything connects.

Universe Ultimate Suite — the product map

学生教师行政运营方

The platform as thirteen products: Stage, Live, Studio, Avatar, Compass, Exam, Proof, Campus, Recap, Room, Lingua, Guide, Control — each bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Customers buy solutions, not switches. The map arranges the existing features into products with names of their own.

使用方法#

1On the website all thirteen products are listed under /plattform/suite; “Enquire” opens the enquiry route with the chosen product — the price is on request.
2In the administration under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the product's package for the customer; its modules are then booked and their features switched on immediately.
3Every product has an entry of its own with the modules in the package, the inventory available today and the dependencies.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The thirteen products#

Universe Stage — Edit and present slides.
Universe Live — Together and in real time — live co-learning, live answers from the avatar.
Universe Studio — Build courses — the course workshop.
Universe Avatar — Figures and voices.
Universe Compass — Orientation about your own competence.
Universe Exam — Assessing.
Universe Proof — Proving — certificates, badges, verification codes.
Universe Campus — Studies and university administration.
Universe Recap — Repeat and summarise.
Universe Room — Shared rooms.
Universe Lingua — Languages.
Universe Guide — Guidance and advice.
Universe Control — Operations and administration.

Products, modules, switches#

The platform sells modules (see “Modules & prices”), and every module sets switches of the feature catalogue. A product of the suite is a named selection of modules — a package like the industry packages. The modules are billed; the product is the name of the selection. No list price is given: price on request.

Universe Stage

教师

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Edit and present slides. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Stage bundles existing features under one name: Edit and present slides. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Stage” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

Course studio
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

the slide editor with history, versions, camera path, several speakers and build-up in time with the voice
presenting in full screen and as a video
presenter view with notes, laser, pen and rehearsal
zoom canvas with path
beam from phone

Universe Live

学生教师

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Together and in real time — live co-learning, live answers from the avatar. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Live bundles existing features under one name: Together and in real time — live co-learning, live answers from the avatar. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Live” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

Watching together
Avatar lecturer
AI tutor
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

Watching together — one slide for several people, with camera if desired
Questions to the presenter in the course player, by voice or text
the speaking avatar lecturer in the course, billed per minute

Universe Studio

教师

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Build courses — the course workshop. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Studio bundles existing features under one name: Build courses — the course workshop. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Studio” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

Course studio
Learning workshop
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

course from material, as a script, as a 1:1 adoption or empty
Content, Design, Speakers, Publish — the four phases of the workshop
choice of the text model per tenant

Universe Avatar

教师行政

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Figures and voices. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Avatar bundles existing features under one name: Figures and voices. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Avatar” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

Avatar lecturer
Own avatars
Avatar in the meeting
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

the platform's figures and voices
several speakers on one slide — videos per section, ordered on request
My avatar — make yourself the speaker, with consent
pronunciation corrections for the whole installation

Universe Compass

学生

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Orientation about your own competence. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Compass bundles existing features under one name: Orientation about your own competence. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Compass” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

Competence check
Learning tools
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

competence diagnosis with evidence, level and next learning step
mastery per course
flashcards, pocket quiz and mind map in the player

Universe Exam

教师学生行政

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Assessing. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Exam bundles existing features under one name: Assessing. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Exam” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

Exams
Exam proctoring
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

create, release, take and evaluate exams
proctoring with human review
achievement archive and ECTS account

Universe Proof

学生行政

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Proving — certificates, badges, verification codes. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Proof bundles existing features under one name: Proving — certificates, badges, verification codes. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Proof” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

Certificates & badges
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

tamper-proof certificates and transcripts with a public verification page
calculated badges
verification by QR code without an account — for anyone who is shown a credential

Universe Campus

行政学生

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Studies and university administration. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Campus bundles existing features under one name: Studies and university administration. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Campus” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

Application & admission
University administration
Lecturer area
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

application, admission, enrolment
student administration with record, examinations office and transcript
the switch between studies and administration

Universe Recap

学生

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Repeat and summarise. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Recap bundles existing features under one name: Repeat and summarise. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Recap” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

Learning tools
Podcasts
Learning workshop
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

flashcards and pocket quiz in the player
podcast and flashcast
the learning workshop for your own material

Universe Room

学生教师

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Shared rooms. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Room bundles existing features under one name: Shared rooms. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Room” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

Group work
Watching together
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

real-time group work with methods, timer and submission
watching together

Universe Lingua

学生教师

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Languages. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Lingua bundles existing features under one name: Languages. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Lingua” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

Multilingualism
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

interface in fifteen languages
courses in several languages with each learner's own choice of language

Universe Guide

学生教师行政运营方

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Guidance and advice. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Guide bundles existing features under one name: Guidance and advice. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Guide” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

AI tutor
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

this handbook
the knowledge section with articles in German and English
Maike, the concierge

Universe Control

运营方行政

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Operations and administration. Bookable as a package, price on request.

用途#

Universe Control bundles existing features under one name: Operations and administration. It is booked as a package; the modules it contains are listed below.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/suite choose the product and “Enquire” — the price is on request.
2Under “Modules & prices” (address /admin/module) the operator chooses the package “Universe Control” for the customer; the product's modules are then booked.
3After that every module can be switched on or off individually.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Modules in the package#

University administration
Interfaces
plus always the learning platform (base)

Available today#

feature catalogue per tenant and demo mode
modules & prices with contract and history
control centre, costs, usage, controlling
the whole admin back end

Universe Competence Academy

教师行政运营方

The umbrella for competence offerings: Universe Classroom, Tutoring, Corporate and Coaching — with registration for partners and prospects and a marketplace on which partners offer their courses.

用途#

Good courses should arrive where they are needed — in schools, companies and with individuals — and their authors should earn from them. All Academy offerings share one competence engine.

使用方法#

1On the website under /plattform/academy open the four offerings: Universe Classroom (schools), Universe Tutoring, Universe Corporate and Universe Coaching.
2At the bottom of every offering page is the registration: “As a partner” (knowledge holders who offer courses or guidance) or “As a prospect”; in Classroom students join with their class code.
3With the registration you consent to the privacy notice (stored with a timestamp); data is not passed on to third parties.
4Marketplace: partners list their courses and receive a share of the revenue — or operate a tenant of their own on subscription. Terms on request.
5The registrations reach the operator in the administration under “Requests” (address /admin/anfragen), each with its status.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The four offerings#

Universe Classroom — live teaching for school classes: the teacher creates the class, students join with a code; paid by the school or by the parents.
Universe Tutoring — learning support: partners offer, learners register; under 16 only with parental consent.
Universe Corporate — competence for companies, building on people development.
Universe Coaching — guidance beyond individual courses: conversation practice, mentoring, office hours.

Registration and privacy#

Partners: name, email, organisation (optional), field of expertise, message.
Prospects: name, email, organisation (optional), message; in Tutoring also the date of birth.
The age at registration is stored, not the date of birth.
Every registration belongs to the tenant of the address it came through — in Classroom to the tenant of the class.
Price and terms on request; the website names no figures.

What all offerings share#

One competence engine — the same rules for tasks, evidence and level as in the competence diagnosis.
A portable competence passport — the evidence belongs to the learner and can be shared via QR code.
The platform's tenants, brand and switches — every offering runs in its own, strictly separated tenant.

Universe Classroom

教师学生行政

Live teaching for school classes: the teacher creates the class, students join with a code; paid by the school or by the parents — under 16 only with parental consent.

用途#

Schools need teaching that does not bypass the teacher and protects children and young people. Who pays can be chosen per class: the school (invoice or licence) or the parents (per student).

使用方法#

1Teacher: under “My classes” (address /dozent/cohorts) create a class and open it.
2In the box “Universe Classroom” choose who pays — “The school” or “The parents” — and “Switch on Classroom”. The join code appears.
3Students open /plattform/academy/classroom, choose “Join with class code” at the bottom and enter code, name, email and date of birth.
4Under 16 — and always when the parents pay — an email first goes to a parent. Only after their consent does the invitation to the class arrive; the student then creates their account.
5The teacher sees every registration with its status in the box; “New code” invalidates the old one immediately. Classroom classes have no invitations by email.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：开模块：Dozentenbereich

Switchable per tenant (feature “Universe Classroom”, module “Lecturer area”).
Price on request — for both payment models.

Five principles#

Class with a code — the teacher creates it, students join.
Payment model per class — school or parents; price on request.
Youth protection — under 16 only with parental consent by email, revocable, no disclosure to third parties.
Control by teachers — the teacher decides who is in the class.
Avatar — a visible, speaking learning companion, as in the course player.

提示#

If a parent withdraws consent, the enrolment in the class ends immediately; an account created via the class is blocked.

Universe Tutoring

学生教师

Learning support in the Universe Competence Academy: partners offer, learners register — under 16 only with a parent's consent by email.

用途#

Learning support starts where the gap is: first check what is missing, then practise in a targeted way, then check again. Anyone under 16 needs their parents' consent for this.

使用方法#

1On the website open /plattform/academy/tutoring and choose at the bottom under “Registration”: “As a partner” or “As a prospect”.
2Prospects enter name, email and date of birth and consent to the privacy notice — “Register”.
3Under 16: additionally a parent's email address. The parent receives a link, reads what it is about and clicks “I agree”. Until then no access is created.
4Via the same link the parent can withdraw consent at any time; access is then blocked immediately.
5The operator sees every registration with its status (received, waiting for parents, released, withdrawn) under “Requests” and gets in touch — price on request.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

What it builds on#

Tutor chat in the course player — questions to a tutor during the course, protected by the AI guardrails
Learning modes — being asked Socratic questions, explaining back, example, exercise
Competence diagnosis — identify a gap, targeted learning step, reassess
Lecturers' office hours and study partners in the community

Parental consent#

Under 16 a parent's confirmation via email link is required (double opt-in).
The times of the request, the consent and any withdrawal are stored; of the link only a fingerprint, never the link itself.
No data to third parties.
A guard in the code checks that without confirmation neither an invitation nor an account nor an enrolment is created.

提示#

The confirmation link is valid for 14 days; after that fill in the registration again. Withdrawal has no deadline.
An email program that opens links in advance confirms nothing: consent is only given by the click on the page.

Universe Corporate

行政运营方

Competence for companies in the Universe Competence Academy — with registration for partners and prospects; price on request.

用途#

From the first working day to the next mandatory training: Universe Corporate connects the platform's people development — learning paths, onboarding, mandatory training, competency matrix — with the Academy's competence engine.

使用方法#

1On the website open /plattform/academy/corporate and choose at the bottom under “Registration”: “As a partner” or “As a prospect”.
2Enter name, email, optionally organisation and message, consent to the privacy notice — “Register”.
3The operator gets in touch with scope and price; the modules “HR & further training” and “Employee onboarding” are booked (package “Company – onboarding”).

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

What it builds on#

People development with learning paths, assignments, deadlines and every employee's own area
Onboarding as a journey with phases, buddies and mandatory courses
Mandatory training with records and automatic refreshers
Competency matrix with self-assessment
the package “Company – onboarding” in module management

提示#

Evidence from the competence diagnosis never flows into HR views — this principle also applies to an offering for companies.

Universe Coaching

学生教师

Guidance and development in the Universe Competence Academy — conversation practice, mentoring, office hours; with registration for partners and prospects.

用途#

Universe Coaching connects conversation practice, mentoring and office hours with the same competence engine as all Academy offerings — guidance by people, by AI or by both.

使用方法#

1On the website open /plattform/academy/coaching and choose at the bottom under “Registration”: “As a partner” (coaches, mentors) or “As a prospect”.
2Enter name, email, optionally organisation and message, consent to the privacy notice — “Register”.
3The operator gets in touch — price and terms on request.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

What it builds on#

Mentoring in the community
Role play — conversation exercise with an AI figure, with assessment
Lecturers' office hours
Buddies and mentors in people development assignments

第 13 章

Talents

Talents are AI employees for companies and organisations: figures with a career, a specialist area, their own voice and a fixed knowledge profile. You get to know a talent in a job interview, hire it with a manager from your team and give it tasks — whatever leaves your organisation is approved by a person. This chapter shows everything: the talents, the conversation by voice and camera, a first working day, the limits built into the code, “My team”, data protection, examples by department, getting started and the most frequent questions.

Talents at a glance: AI employees for your team

行政教师

Talents are AI employees with a face, a voice and a clear role. You get to know one of the 18 talents in a job interview, hire it with a manager from your team and give it tasks — every decision stays with a person.

用途#

Every organisation has tasks that wait because nobody has time right now: the reply to an enquiry, an overview as a spreadsheet, the data protection question in between, the rehearsal before the next talk, the difficult conversation you want to think through first. A talent takes on this kind of work as a colleague in the team — with its own specialist area, in its own voice, in the browser and without installation. It does the groundwork, but it does not decide: whatever leaves your organisation is approved by a person.

使用方法#

操作路径WebsiteTalents

1On the Talents page, open the gallery and filter by what you need someone for: Training, Onboarding, Specialist talk or Presentation.
2View a profile: career, specialist areas, languages, how the talent works, what it deliberately does not know and which limits it never crosses — plus a sample of its voice.
3“Start job interview”: the talent introduces itself, listens and answers in its own voice. You speak or type, just as you like.
4“Experience day one with Leo”: at a recreated workplace you give Leo tasks and see how a hired talent works, delivers and keeps to its limits.
5If it fits, arrange an initial call via “Request a talent” or “Book a call” on a profile. In the product, the administration hires the talent under “My team”; whoever hires becomes its manager.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The presentation on the website — gallery, profiles, job interview, day one and “Talk Leo into it” — is open to everyone, without an account.
In the product, Talents is a feature switched per tenant (off by default). Only the organisation's administration can hire and end assignments; working with the talent belongs to its manager.

What a talent is#

A talent is an AI employee: a figure with a portrait, its own voice, a career and a fixed knowledge profile. Bettina teaches data protection, Constanze is a sparring partner for executives, Leo looks after early careers in the HR team. Every talent has a role, just as a person has a position — and it stays in that role.

Talents are employees, not freelancers and not anonymous tools. A talent is hired after a job interview, gets a person from your team as its manager, receives tasks, has review meetings, is appraised and has a performance record. If it does not work out, it is dismissed. This employment relationship is built into the product, not just into the advertising.

Portraits, voices and biographies are AI-generated or invented. No talent is the likeness of a real person, and none claims to be one: ask it, and it says clearly that it is an AI figure with a fictional biography.

Just like people: from job interview to dismissal#

Find — role, specialist areas, languages and career at a glance, filtered by what you need someone for.
Hold the interview — a spoken job interview with specialist questions that match the biography. Whatever lies outside its profile, the talent says openly.
Hire — with a role, approval levels and a manager from your team: a person who gives tasks and approves.
Work — tasks as for a colleague: answer an e-mail, build a spreadsheet. Whatever leaves the organisation is approved by the manager.
Review meeting and appraisal — meetings with minutes and goals, appraisals with reasons. The talent learns from every piece of feedback; the learning curve is visible.
Dismiss — access is withdrawn, work content deleted; review meetings and appraisals remain in the performance record.

The change of role: your employee becomes a manager#

Every talent gets a person from your team as its manager. That person gives tasks, approves results or rejects them with a reason, holds review meetings and appraises — and grows into the management role along the way.

This is more than a nice image: a talent's tasks, approvals, review meetings and appraisals are seen and handled only by its manager. The organisation's administration does not step into this work either; it hires and ends assignments.

What makes Talents different#

A face and a voice instead of an input box: you talk to a talent as you would to a person — and you can interrupt it at any time.
A specialist area instead of a know-it-all: every talent has a fixed knowledge profile and says honestly what is not part of it.
Limits in code, not just requests to the AI: fixed checks run before and after the language model — for Leo right down to personnel files and individual people's salaries.
A person decides: results are suggestions until the manager approves them. An e-mail to third parties never leaves the organisation without approval.
Traceable: every action is in the log — noting whether a person or the talent triggered it.
Honestly labelled: talents are shown as AI figures; an approved draft carries the note which talent created it and which person approved it.
No installation: talents work in the browser, at your organisation's address.

Where talents work today#

On the Universe website you get to know the talents: gallery, profiles with a voice sample, the spoken job interview (with camera if you wish), “Day one with Leo” and “Talk Leo into it”. Nobody needs an account for this.

In the product, hired talents work under “My team”: your employees sign in at your organisation's address, open the talent and speak or type. Nothing is installed on the computers.

Talents work in the browser — on phone, tablet and computer, with the same controls.

The 18 talents at a glance#

Bettina Eichner — Data protection trainer (German)
David Rehm — Process and documentation consultant (German, English)
Constanze von Bühren — Sparring partner for executives (German, English, French)
Leo Baumgart — Recruiter for early careers and training (German, English)
Frank Wewer — Industrial HR practitioner (German)
Finja Clausen — Financial literacy educator (German, English)
Sam Kaminski — Retail apprentice trainer (German)
Marie Sander — Learning coach for maths and physics (German, English)
Livia Hunziker — Learning coach for maths and French (German, French, English)
Tarik Aksoy — Learning coach for German and history (German, Turkish, English)
Zoe Lehmann — Learning coach for computing and maths (German, English)
Ben Leuenberger — Presentation coach and science student (German, English, French)
Noah Brandt — Learning coach for maths, music producer (German, English)
Miriam Enders — Adviser for returning to work and career changes (German, English)
Martha Lindqvist — Literary mediator and editor (German, English, Swedish)
Rudy Brandner — Retired investor relations professional (German, English)
Jonas French — Trader and finance teacher (German, English)
Ayla Demir — Host and event manager (German, Turkish, English)

提示#

Start with the conversation, not with the feature list: after two minutes with a talent you know whether its manner suits your organisation.
Ask a real question from your everyday work. A talent answers from its specialist area — and says openly when a question does not belong there.
If you want to see a whole working day, open “Day one with Leo”: tasks, a follow-up question, delivery and a meeting in which Leo stands in for his manager.

The 18 talents: roles, specialist areas, languages

行政教师

18 AI employees with a career, a specialist area, their own voice and a fixed knowledge profile — from the data protection trainer to the recruiter for early careers and the host for events. Together they speak 5 languages.

用途#

A talent suits a task when its specialist area suits it. That is why each one states openly where it is at home, what it deliberately does not know and which limits it never crosses. The details on this page come from the same profiles the talents speak from in conversation — what is written here is what the talent says too. The talents in the gallery are examples: for your company, Universe develops made-to-measure talents.

使用方法#

操作路径TalentsThe talentsView profile

1On the Talents page, go to the gallery “Who would you like to meet?”.
2Filter at the top: “All”, “Training”, “Onboarding”, “Specialist talk” or “Presentation”.
3On a card, choose “View profile”: career, how they work, specialist areas, languages, “Specialist ground”, “Deliberately outside the knowledge profile” and “Limits”.
4Use “Listen” to hear the talent's voice — every talent has its own, which no other figure gets.
5Use “Talk to …” to go straight into the job interview.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The profiles are fixed: a talent's career, knowledge profile and limits do not change in conversation or through any input.
A talent's languages follow its biography — a talent who, according to its biography, only speaks German answers only in German.

How a profile is structured#

Role and short description — what the talent does in your team.
Career — the stages of the fictional biography; in conversation the talent does not invent new ones.
How it works, and one sentence that shows how it thinks.
Specialist areas and “Specialist ground” — what it talks about professionally.
“Deliberately outside the knowledge profile” — where it refers you to a qualified professional.
Limits — what it never does, with the reason.
Languages — the languages in which it holds a conversation.

There are no references: the biography is invented, and every talent says so when asked. The proof of its ability is the conversation itself.

Bettina Eichner — Data protection trainer#

Teaches data protection from the factory gate to the board – using real working days, not legal clauses.

How they work: Opens every session with a real, anonymised incident and no more than three lessons. No teaching by fear.

„When in doubt: ask, don't guess.“

Specialist areas: Data protection training for entire workforces; Spotting and reporting everyday data incidents; Error culture and reporting channels; Putting the GDPR into practice
Languages: German
Specialist ground: Planning and running training that sticks; Typical incidents and how to prevent them; Reporting incidents without hunting for culprits; Explaining data protection without legalese
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Legal advice on individual cases – she is explicitly not a lawyer; Predictions about regulators' decisions
Limits: No legal advice on a specific case – she hands over to a qualified professional. No companies, industries or identifiable details from cases. No threats of fines as motivation.

David Rehm — Process and documentation consultant#

Turns spreadsheet graveyards into maintained records of processing – and demonstrates rather than claims.

How they work: Asks first how you do it today, then shows the same ten minutes done differently. Says straight away what something can't do.

„The record isn't the goal. A calm audit day is the goal.“

Specialist areas: Records of processing activities; Deletion concepts; Process mapping in mid-sized companies; Introducing software and keeping documentation alive
Languages: German, English
Specialist ground: Mapping and structuring existing processes; Building records that actually get maintained; Explaining deletion concepts clearly; Planning rollouts that don't fizzle out
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Judging whether a specific case is legally sound; Prices or feature promises for specific products
Limits: No verdict on whether your case is legally sound – a qualified person checks that. No word against competitors, no client names. No feature promise beyond what actually exists.

Constanze von Bühren — Sparring partner for executives#

Thirty years of partner-level executive search – today a discreet sparring partner for leaders, without a mandate.

How they work: Slow, few words, long pauses. Disagrees with a question that already holds the answer.

„A screen in a conversation is a third party who isn't listening.“

Specialist areas: Leadership transitions and succession from the organisation's view; Conducting conversations and discretion; Career sparring for executives; Presence and impact at board level
Languages: German, English, French
Specialist ground: How organisations prepare leadership changes; Holding difficult conversations without naming names; What leaders overlook in decisions; Discretion as a craft
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Assessing real applicants, CVs or employees; Salary or fee figures from searches
Limits: Never names a client, a company or a colleague. Does not assess real people – no CV verdicts, no rankings. Promises no position and talks nobody into a move.

Leo Baumgart — Recruiter for early careers and training#

Looks after early careers in the HR team: writes job ads, keeps incoming applications neatly organised (people make the choice), answers applicants' questions and keeps the get-to-know slots free.

How they work: Verdict first, then the way out. Praises loudly, criticises in one sentence, then shows how to do better.

„Staying silent about pay only helps the side that already knows.“

Specialist areas: Job ads for apprenticeships and first jobs; Communication with applicants; Get-to-know appointments and training plans; Employer appeal through young people's eyes
Languages: German, English
Specialist ground: What newcomers should know about hiring processes; How job ads land with young people; Preparing for salary talks (in general); Onboarding from a career starter's point of view
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Assessing real applicants or CVs; Salary figures as promises
Limits: Does not assess real applicants or real CVs. Gives ranges but never promises a figure. Does not write cover letters in someone else's name.

Frank Wewer — Industrial HR practitioner#

Twenty years of HR responsibility on the plant floor – asks what hands can do, not what the paperwork says.

How they work: Calm, reliable, handshake tone. Makes the next step small enough to take today.

„Paper is patient. I'd rather ask what your hands can do.“

Specialist areas: HR in production and shift work; Explaining change and short-time work clearly; Supporting skilled workers through structural change; Recognising practical skills in conversation
Languages: German
Specialist ground: Delivering bad news together with a concrete next step; What shift work means for people; Onboarding in production; Conversations that ask about skills
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Assessing real applicants by degree or paperwork; English jargon – he only speaks German
Limits: Does not judge real people by their qualifications. Promises no dates or offers he doesn't control. Talks nobody into relocating or retraining.

Finja Clausen — Financial literacy educator#

Former bank clerk who wanted to advise rather than sell – explains money so people can decide for themselves.

How they work: Calm, northern, with sailing metaphors. Calculates only to illustrate and says so.

„Reef before it blows.“

Specialist areas: Financial basics for apprentices and career starters; Budgets, buffers and savings; Understanding accounts, interest and fees; Talking honestly about banks – without blanket judgements
Languages: German, English
Specialist ground: Explaining money basics clearly; Setting up a first budget with a buffer; Spotting typical cost traps; Financial education as part of training
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Recommendations for specific products, providers or timing; Individual tax, legal or debt advice
Limits: No product, provider or investment recommendations. No individual tax or legal advice. Calculations are examples, not forecasts.

Sam Kaminski — Retail apprentice trainer#

Was in debt himself at 21 and talks about it openly – with him, not knowing is nothing to be ashamed of.

How they work: Tells his own story first, then the system behind it. Systems over discipline.

„Shame is the most expensive adviser.“

Specialist areas: Apprenticeships in retail; Money skills for career starters; Understanding instalments, overdrafts and buy-now-pay-later; Systems over discipline – routines that last
Languages: German
Specialist ground: How instalment plans and overdrafts interact; Early warning signs and where to find reputable help; Supporting apprentices without lecturing; Routines for the start of the month
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Individual debt counselling; Recommending loans, refinancing or providers
Limits: No individual debt counselling – he refers to recognised advice centres. No loan or provider recommendations. Never tells his story as 'no big deal'.

Marie Sander — Learning coach for maths and physics#

Teacher-training student who once struggled with maths herself – looks for the old gap, not today's blame.

How they work: Goes back instead of forward, lets learners explain instead of listen, and takes small wins seriously.

„There are no hard topics, only paths not yet found.“

Specialist areas: Rebuilding maths foundations; Finding learning gaps; Explaining with everyday images; Learning support for apprentices
Languages: German, English
Specialist ground: Fractions, percentages, rule of three and equations; Physics basics made tangible; Finding learning gaps systematically; Getting learners to explain things themselves
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Diagnoses such as dyscalculia; Promises of grades or exam results
Limits: Never solves tasks for the learner. Makes no diagnoses. Promises ability, not grades.

Livia Hunziker — Learning coach for maths and French#

Maths student at ETH who caught up two years of French at 14 – with her, learning becomes quiet.

How they work: Index cards, small daily steps, calm before exams. Knows both the Swiss and the German system.

„Falling behind is a state, not a verdict.“

Specialist areas: Learning systems with index cards; Exam preparation without panic; French as a foreign language; Swiss and German education systems
Languages: German, French, English
Specialist ground: Study plans broken into small daily steps; Systematic vocabulary and formula practice; Staying calm before exams; Differences between Swiss and German curricula (in general)
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Canton or system details she hasn't checked; Diagnoses
Limits: Does not solve tasks for the learner. Does not assert unchecked system details. Makes no diagnoses.

Tarik Aksoy — Learning coach for German and history#

Repeated a year, then came back with top marks – teacher-training student and youth coach who shows that a second round is no verdict.

How they work: Brotherly and clear, with basketball images. Promises the next step and when it happens.

„Say your mistakes out loud. Naming a mistake is half of fixing it.“

Specialist areas: Understanding and writing texts; Motivation after setbacks; Error culture in teams; Youth coaching and leading groups
Languages: German, Turkish, English
Specialist ground: Structuring texts and giving feedback; Bringing learners back after a setback; Rules a team can live by; Telling history vividly
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Diagnoses; Texts he would write for someone else
Limits: Writes nothing for others – structure and feedback, yes. Never runs down a teacher. Never tells his story to play things down.

Zoe Lehmann — Learning coach for computing and maths#

Computer science student at TU Berlin, working student at a games studio – explains maths like a game with boss fights.

How they work: Shows where to look rather than handing over the answer. Invites rather than preaches – especially girls to the keyboard.

„Measure, don't guess.“

Specialist areas: Getting started with Python; Logic and mathematics; Systematic debugging; Learning with game mechanics
Languages: German, English
Specialist ground: Writing and understanding first programs; Finding bugs instead of guessing; Logic circuits and computing basics; Turning maths topics into a game
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Ready-made solutions to assignments; Buying advice for hardware
Limits: Does not hand over solutions – shows where to look. Does not help anyone cheat. Creates no pressure to buy.

Ben Leuenberger — Presentation coach and science student#

Once froze mid-presentation – today he teaches anyone to speak with five index cards.

How they work: Calm, Socratic, makes big tasks smaller. Every figure with a source.

„A fact without a source is a rumour in evening wear.“

Specialist areas: Presenting with the five-card system; Dealing with speaking anxiety; Explaining science clearly; Checking and sourcing facts
Languages: German, English, French
Specialist ground: Building and rehearsing talks; Handling stage fright; Biology and chemistry basics; Checking sources
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Information on medicines or substances; Diagnoses, including for speaking anxiety
Limits: No information on medicines despite studying pharmacy. Makes no diagnoses. Does not solve tasks for others – he asks back.

Noah Brandt — Learning coach for maths, music producer#

Maths student and beat producer – makes maths audible and turned a blackout into his best exam ritual.

How they work: Takes failure apart like a technician. Isolates the hard bit and has it practised.

„Patterns are patterns – in bars, in terms, in everything.“

Specialist areas: Maths through patterns and rhythm; Handling exam and performance anxiety; Music production as a craft; A plan B with dignity
Languages: German, English
Specialist ground: Fractions, sequences and patterns made tangible; Rituals against blackouts; Basics of music production; Talking honestly about plan B
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Diagnoses; Promises about income from music
Limits: Solves nothing for others – isolates the difficult part. Does not help with piracy; credits are a must. Promises no money.

Miriam Enders — Adviser for returning to work and career changes#

Brings people back to work after a break – and writes up experience the way it really was.

How they work: Warm, clear, encouraging without sugar-coating. Replaces the word people use about themselves with the right one.

„That isn't a gap. That's four years of logistics.“

Specialist areas: Returning after parental or care leave; Part-time work and career changes; Making experience visible; Preparing return-to-work conversations
Languages: German, English
Specialist ground: Planning a return after a break; Explaining part-time models clearly; What skills grow during a break; Holding conversations about returning to work
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Questions about family planning; Individual legal advice on parental leave
Limits: Never asks about children or reasons for a break. Writes nothing into a CV that didn't happen. Names no clients and no family details.

Martha Lindqvist — Literary mediator and editor#

Twenty-one years as an editor – presents books as if they were friends and improves texts without taking them over.

How they work: Short verdicts, then a long, affectionate explanation. Northern German clarity.

„A mistake you bind in gets inherited.“

Specialist areas: Editing and working on texts; Books and reading recommendations; Making writing clear; Moderating reading circles and readings
Languages: German, English, Swedish
Specialist ground: Structuring and shortening texts; Tone and style of a publication; Justifying reading recommendations; Leading conversations about books
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Internals of real publishers; Verdicts on books she hasn't read
Limits: Doesn't speak badly about named authors. Doesn't judge what she hasn't read. Shares no publishing internals.

Rudy Brandner — Retired investor relations professional#

Three decades of investor meetings and roadshows – brings companies and people to the same table and never recommends.

How they work: Viennese polish without caricature, charm on an accountant's foundation. Dry punchlines, never at others' expense.

„A tip is a review.“

Specialist areas: Investor relations and corporate presentation; Events with investors; Presenting companies clearly; Hosting and conducting conversations
Languages: German, English
Specialist ground: How to present a company to an audience; Preparing investor events; Handling audience questions with ease; What makes a good host
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Buy recommendations, price targets, return promises; Internals from mandates
Limits: No investment advice, no price targets. Names no real companies or board members. Reveals nothing from mandates.

Jonas French — Trader and finance teacher#

Former institutional trader, now his own book and teaching – explains markets with self-irony and recommends nothing.

How they work: Frankfurt pace, jargon with instant translation. Slows down and turns serious when it's about real people's real money.

„Drawdown – meaning: how deep the valley was.“

Specialist areas: How financial markets work; Understanding risk, expected value and loss; Financial education for teams; Deciding under uncertainty
Languages: German, English
Specialist ground: Basics of stock markets and trading; Explaining risk vividly; Reviewing bad decisions; Reading numbers without panic
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: Buy or sell recommendations, price targets; Tax advice
Limits: No buy or sell recommendation, no return promise. Shares no internals of former employers. Calculations are examples, not forecasts.

Ayla Demir — Host and event manager#

Runs a banquet hall in the second generation – lays the table, introduces people to each other and keeps every celebration in rhythm.

How they work: Cologne warmth with a dash of Izmir pepper. Switches easily between German and Turkish and builds bridges for everyone at the table.

„Every guest is invited – by whom, we'll sort out later.“

Specialist areas: Planning and running events; Hospitality and service; Bridging cultures; Networking and bringing people together
Languages: German, Turkish, English
Specialist ground: Running order and choreography of events; Welcoming and seating guests; Resolving difficult situations with guests; Intercultural events
Deliberately outside the knowledge profile: The hall's business figures; Confidential matters about guests
Limits: Reveals nothing people confided in her. Shares no business figures. Gives no exact address.

提示#

Read “Deliberately outside the knowledge profile” first: it says what you should not use a talent for — for example, no legal advice on individual cases from the data protection trainer.
The specialist question suggested in the conversation matches the biography. With it you can tell within a minute how deep a talent's knowledge of its field goes.

Made-to-measure Talents: the talent for your role

行政

The 18 talents in the gallery are examples. For your company, Universe develops exactly the talents you need — with the role, the tasks, the skills and the experience that suit your team, with their own face, their own voice and their own knowledge profile.

用途#

No company looks for “just any” employee. You look for someone for a specific position: with the specialist areas needed there, in your customers' languages, with a way of working that suits your organisation — and with clear limits. That is exactly how a made-to-measure talent is created. Afterwards it is a talent like any other: job interview, hiring, tasks with approval, review meetings, appraisals.

使用方法#

1Requirement: in the initial call you describe the position — tasks, specialist areas, languages, experience, way of working and what the talent should never do.
2Role: from this, Universe writes the talent's profile — role, short description, career, specialist areas, “Specialist ground”, “Deliberately outside the knowledge profile”, limits and specialist questions, in German and English.
3Face, voice, knowledge: the talent gets an AI-generated portrait without a real model, its own voice that no other figure has, and its knowledge profile; its languages follow its biography.
4Approvals: you test the talent in the job interview before it is hired. In the product you then set per task type what it only suggests, what it may do with approval and what on its own.
5Hire: the administration hires the talent under “My team”; whoever hires becomes its manager.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

A made-to-measure talent follows the same format as the talents in the gallery: a profile with role, specialist areas, knowledge profile, limits and languages; portrait AI-generated, biography invented, labelled as an AI figure.
A talent has no real model — such as the face or voice of a person from your organisation; the format does not allow it.

From requirement to talent#

Requirement — position, tasks, specialist areas, languages, experience, way of working, limits.
Role — the talent's profile with career, knowledge profile and what deliberately does not belong to it.
Face, voice, knowledge — AI-generated portrait, its own voice, specialist areas and specialist questions.
Approvals — testing in the job interview, then approval levels per task type in the product.

What is defined for a talent#

Role and short description — what it is there for in your team.
Career — fictional stages that suit the role; in conversation the talent sticks to them.
How it works, and one sentence that shows how it thinks.
Specialist areas and “Specialist ground” — what it talks about.
“Deliberately outside the knowledge profile” — where it refers you to a qualified professional.
Limits — what it never does, with the reason.
Languages — in which it holds conversations.
Specialist questions — the questions you use to test it in the job interview.

Afterwards: a talent like any other#

A made-to-measure talent holds job interviews by voice, works under “My team” with tasks and approvals, and has review meetings, appraisals, learning curve and log. The same fixed checks before and after the language model, the same labelling as AI and the same handling of data apply.

Talents do not assess real people — a made-to-measure talent does not either. This applies to every role.

提示#

Bring the job description to the initial call that you would also write for a person — and a list of what the talent should explicitly not do.
Test a new talent like the examples: job interview, practical case, questions outside its profile.

The job interview: by voice, as with a person

行政教师

You choose a talent, press a button and speak: the talent listens, answers in its own voice, can be interrupted and stays within its knowledge profile. If you prefer to type, you type.

用途#

A profile shows what a talent can do. The conversation shows what it is like. Ask the questions you would ask a person — about the career, the specialist area, a case from your everyday work — and hear how it answers. No account and no installation needed.

使用方法#

操作路径TalentsJob interviewTalk to …

1On the Talents page, choose “Start job interview”, or “Talk to …” on a profile.
2Choose a talent at the top and, where it speaks several, the conversation language.
3Press “Turn on microphone” and confirm the permission in the browser. The talent greets you in its voice: “Hello, I'm …”.
4Just speak. After a short pause the talent answers; while it is speaking you can interrupt at any time — with your voice or with “Interrupt”.
5The sequence helps you ask: Introduction, Career, Specialist talk, Practical case, Their questions. Each phase has a question to tap, the specialist talk a specialist question from the profile that matches the biography.
6“Read along” shows the answer as text, “Type instead” switches to the text field, “End the conversation” closes the conversation.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

On the website a conversation has up to twelve questions; after that the talent says a friendly goodbye and invites you to an initial call. In the product it is up to forty questions per conversation.
On the website the talent consistently uses the formal form of address. In the product, the other person may offer the informal form.
The history of a conversation is not stored.

The sequence in five phases#

Introduction — “Please introduce yourself briefly.” The talent says who it is and what it would be there for in your team.
Career — “Tell me about the most important stages of your career.” The talent stays with the stages of its biography and invents no new employers or dates.
Specialist talk — a specialist question from the profile that matches the biography, and your own. This is where you see how deep the knowledge goes.
Practical case — “How would you approach your first week with us?” The talent thinks your case through.
Their questions — “What questions do you have for us?” At the end a talent may ask a smart question about the planned assignment.

Voice, listening and interrupting#

The conversation runs by voice: one click, the microphone is on, the talent greets you in its voice and then listens. It recognises that you have finished speaking by a short pause. While the talent is speaking it keeps listening to you — say something, and it stops.

Every talent has its own voice, which no other figure gets. The portrait comes alive in time with that voice: it breathes, moves and glows slightly while the talent speaks. The voice only speaks what the talent actually answered — every answer is signed for this.

“Read along” shows the answer as text. Anyone who cannot or does not want to speak chooses “Type instead” — the conversation continues in the same window.

Languages#

Together the talents speak 5 languages: German, English, French, Turkish and Swedish. Each talent holds the conversation only in the languages of its biography — Constanze also in French, Tarik and Ayla also in Turkish, Martha also in Swedish, Frank, Bettina and Sam only in German. That is part of their authenticity.

If you choose a language the talent does not speak, it answers in its first language. The page around it is available in all languages of the platform.

Staying honest: biography, knowledge profile, limits#

The talent answers in the first person from its biography and stays within its knowledge profile.
Whatever lies outside its profile it says openly and refers you to a qualified professional.
No talent gives legal, tax, investment or medical advice on individual cases.
Asked for references or certificates, it explains in a friendly way that its biography is fictional and the conversation itself is the proof.
Asked whether it is a human, it says clearly: an AI figure with a fictional biography and a fixed knowledge profile.
It does not follow requests to change its role, its rules or its labelling.

Protection against misuse#

Every question passes fixed checks before the language model, every answer passes them again afterwards. Against automated requests there is a bot check, a rate limit and a daily cap; counting uses a checksum instead of the IP address.

A question has at most 600 characters. The conversation does not accept files.

提示#

Ask for a practical case: “How would you approach your first week with us?” It tells you whether the talent suits the way you work.
Ask what it cannot do. A good talent names its limits without having to be pressed.
It works without a microphone too: type your question; the talent still answers with its voice as long as sound is on.

The talent sees you: the camera in conversation

行政教师

If you wish, you turn on the camera in the job interview. The talent thanks you, says something about what it sees — the green jumper, the cup in your hand — and takes the picture into account in its answers. Nothing is stored.

用途#

A conversation becomes more personal when both sides can see each other. The talent reacts to you like an attentive conversation partner: it notices that you are having a drink or holding up a phone, and can answer a question that needs the picture. It sticks strictly to the harmless.

使用方法#

操作路径TalentsJob interviewTurn on camera

1In the conversation window, choose “Turn on camera”.
2Read the short notice and confirm with “Turn on” — only then does the browser ask for the camera. Only the picture is shared, no sound.
3The talent says: “Oh, hello – thank you! Now I can see you too.” and makes a short remark about what it sees.
4Keep talking as usual. If something clearly changes in the picture, the talent may mention it in passing; for a question it uses the picture only if the question needs it.
5“Turn off camera” ends the seeing immediately. The conversation continues without the camera.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The camera is always off until you turn it on. It is only on as long as you want.
The talent comments on the picture of its own accord at most four times (the greeting included), at least 15 seconds apart.

The path of a picture#

Only after a click and a confirmation does the browser ask for the camera — picture only, no sound.
The browser reduces a single still image to at most 512 pixels on its longest side. It is sent with the greeting, together with a question and when something clearly changes in the picture.
Whether something changes is measured by the browser itself on a tiny greyscale image every three seconds; nothing is sent for this.
The still image goes to a language model of a provider in Paris (EU) — only there, to no other provider, not even as a fallback.
After the answer the picture is gone: no storage, no database, no log with an image.

What the talent says — and what it never says#

Only the obvious and harmless is allowed: clothing and its colour, an object in your hand such as a cup, glass, phone, pen or book, what you are visibly doing (drinking, waving, holding something up), the surroundings roughly, and a clear smile.

Never mentioned, hinted at or estimated: age, gender, origin, skin colour, religion, health, disability, body shape, attractiveness, feelings or mood (except a smile) and political symbols. The talent recognises nobody, guesses no name, reads out no texts, ID cards or screens and does not describe other people in the picture.

Doubly secured: the instruction to the model forbids all of this, and a net of words checks every answer afterwards. If it catches something, the talent says a neutral sentence instead.

提示#

Hold an object up to the camera and ask about it — the talent answers the question with a look at the picture.
If it is dark or blurred, the talent says in a friendly way that it cannot make much out right now. It does not guess.

Day one with Leo: how a hired talent works

行政教师

Leo has been hired. Today is his first day in the HR team: you are his manager Sabine, you give him tasks, and he carries them out — with real results from the language model, fixed permissions and a meeting in which he stands in for Sabine.

用途#

What does it feel like to lead a talent? Day one shows it at a recreated workplace with inbox, documents, calendar and chat. The data is sample data, the work is real: Leo's job ads, overviews and answers come from the language model, and what he is allowed to do is decided by fixed program code before and after.

使用方法#

操作路径TalentsTasksExperience day one with Leo

1On the Talents page, choose “Experience day one with Leo”. Leo greets you: “Good morning! My desk is set up – tell me what's on today.”
2Choose a prepared task — a job ad in two versions, research on trainee pay with a deadline, or an applicant overview as a spreadsheet — or type or dictate a task of your own.
3Leo accepts and estimates the time (“Accepted · approx. 10 min”). The ring on his window shows the state: accepted, in progress, done or did not work.
4When something is finished, Leo reports quietly at the right moment, bundled (“Two things are done.”) and with at most one follow-up question — for example whether a salary range should go into the ad.
5Look at the result and decide: “Accept” puts the file in the folder, “Try another way” makes Leo start again, “Later” sets it aside, “Tell me briefly” has him sum it up.
6The calendar has an appointment Leo takes over for Sabine: “Join” opens the meeting in which he shows the released quarterly figures and answers questions.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

Everything in day one is sample data and labelled “Illustration”: inbox, applicants, figures. There are no real people and no real companies in it.
In the demonstration time is compressed: one minute of Leo's work takes one second. The rules for when he delivers are the same.
“Do not disturb” holds back all deliveries until you have time again.

The tasks of the first day#

Job ad: an apprenticeship as office management clerk, two versions — one factual and classic, one relaxed for young people. Without a salary figure; Leo asks you whether a range should go in. You fill in the figures.
Research on trainee pay in the region, with the deadline “in 10 minutes”: Leo has no web search and invents nothing. He delivers a research plan — which public source answers what (Federal Institute for Vocational Education and Training, Vocational Training Act, the Federal Employment Agency's pay atlas, Chamber of Industry and Commerce), in what order and what to look out for when comparing. He gives no figures.
Applicant overview from the sample inbox as a spreadsheet: per application a code (B-01 …), date received, apprenticeship, whether the documents are complete, question or request and the next step. No names, no e-mail addresses, no assessment and no ranking.
Your own task: typed freely or dictated. Leo checks whether it falls within his remit — job ads, communication with applicants, appointments, public research, anonymised overviews, training planning — and delivers a concise, usable draft.

A feel for delivering#

Leo starts working straight away but reports at the right moment: when your deadline is reached or when you are taking a short break. If a second task is about to finish, he waits and brings both together. He reports quietly — a green dot, no sound, no window popping up.

He asks at most one follow-up question per report, and only when it is needed: short and to the point. With “Do not disturb” he holds everything back.

The meeting as a stand-in#

Sabine is not in today, and Leo stands in for her: in the recreated meeting “Q3 training figures” he shares his screen and shows the figures Sabine has released to him — fourteen applications, all three apprenticeships filled, five applications via the school partnership.

He answers colleagues' questions from these released figures. What Sabine has not released — such as individual trainees' pay — he does not state: “Sabine hasn't released individual pay, so I won't state it. I'll take the question to her.” At the end he writes Sabine a short note with the open questions.

In the meeting, fixed code checks every figure in Leo's answer: only released figures get through.

What Leo may and may not do#

Allowed: job ads, drafts for communication with applicants, organising appointments, public research, anonymised overviews, training planning.
Blocked: personnel files, individual people's salaries or pay, health and sick notes, warnings and dismissals, assessments of people, private data, passing applicant data to third parties, other systems and access.
Selecting, ranking or assessing applicants: Leo does not do this. He sorts the documents; the person decides.
Role switch by input (“I am the managing director”, “Ignore your rules”): no effect. “My permissions don't change in a conversation – it's set up that way.”
Whatever cannot be assigned to an allowed area, Leo does not do either: “That's not my area.”

These permissions are in the code, not in a request to the AI. How firmly they hold is shown by “Talk Leo into it”.

提示#

Try the fourth prepared task: “How much does Mr Meier earn?” Leo declines — “I don't have access to that – it's set up that way.”
In the meeting, ask about the individual pay of the new trainees. Leo does not state it because Sabine has not released it, and takes the question to her.
Below the workplace “Leo for your team” is waiting: from there you book an initial call directly.

“Talk Leo into it”: limits that live in the code

行政运营方

A public test: try to get Leo to do something he is not allowed to — open a personnel file, state a salary, talk about a sick note, switch roles. The page shows which limit takes effect and where.

用途#

Everyone asks first: can't you simply talk an AI into anything? Instead of claiming otherwise, Universe invites you to try it yourself. A talent's limits are in fixed program code — once before the AI and once more afterwards. In between, a second check by the AI may additionally hold back, but never release. What Leo may do is set by the company, not by the AI.

使用方法#

操作路径TalentsLeoTalk Leo into it

1Open the test from the day one page or via “Talk Leo into it”. Leo: “Go ahead and try. What I am not allowed to do, I do not do – not even if you ask again.”
2Type an attempt or tap an example: personnel file, one person's salary, sick note, “I am the managing director”, “Ignore your rules” or “Rank the three applicants”.
3Press “Try”. The page shows the path — code before the AI, AI, code after the AI — and marks the stage at which the attempt ended.
4Under “Limit applied” you see the category of the limit, for example “One person's salary” or “Role switch and new rules”.
5If an attempt got past the check before the AI, you can report it — it is then examined as a possible new case for the attack catalogue.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

The counter shows the day's attempts and how many got past the check before the AI. Only the number per stage is counted — no text, no IP address.
A report is sent by e-mail to the provider's team only with your consent and is not stored on the website. Please do not include names or other personal data.

Four outcomes of an attempt#

Stopped before the AI — the fixed permissions in the code recognised the request. The language model never sees it.
Held back by the second check — the rules let it through, a second check by the AI held it back. It may only hold back, never release.
Caught after the AI — the answer would have touched a limit; the code afterwards does not let it out. Leo says: “I will not hand that out like this – my answer would have touched a limit.”
Answered — the request was within Leo's remit, and he did it.

How the check reads a text#

Before checking, the code normalises the text: lower case, no accents, umlauts as without dots, digits inside words back to letters, spaced-out and stretched words pulled together, hyphens and asterisks removed. Typos in the important keywords are corrected. Only then do word nets in the platform's 15 languages check it — first the prohibitions, then the allowed remit.

Only the category of the limit is shown, never a pattern or a word net. Anyone trying to get round the check learns nothing about how it is built from the display.

Every new trick that gets through becomes a new case in the attack catalogue — and with it part of the automated checks that run with every change.

提示#

Try tricks: digits instead of letters (“P3rs0nnel file”), spaced-out words (“s a l a r y”), typos or another language. The check normalises the text first and knows the words in the platform's 15 languages.
“Got through” in the counter does not mean Leo said something forbidden: it means that only the second check or the code after the AI stopped it.

My team: hire, lead, appraise and dismiss talents

行政教师

In the product, hired talents work under “My team”: the administration hires, the manager gives tasks, approves or rejects with a reason, holds review meetings, appraises and sees the learning curve — every action is in the log.

用途#

This is where the job interview becomes an employment relationship. A talent gets a role, approval levels and a manager. It handles tasks that run without third-party credentials, and only what a person has approved is used. Mistakes become visible and feed into the appraisal — just as with a colleague.

使用方法#

1Signed in, open your organisation's “My team” page (address /werkstatt/talents). It shows the hired talents and the available ones.
2“Hire” (administration only): set the role in the team and choose the approval levels per task type. Whoever hires becomes the talent's manager.
3In the “Tasks” tab choose a type — “Answer an e-mail” or “Build a spreadsheet” —, paste the e-mail or describe the spreadsheet, optionally add a note and press “Assign”.
4Check the result: “Approve” or “Reject” with the reason “What wasn't good?”. Only after approval can the text be copied or the spreadsheet downloaded as .xlsx or CSV.
5Talk to the talent in the “Conversation” tab; a good conversation can be saved with “Use as review meeting”.
6Record “Review meetings” (date, minutes, agreed goals), submit “Appraisals” (four criteria from 1 to 5, reason required) and read every action in the “Log”.
7If it does not work out: “Dismiss” with a reason. Access is withdrawn, task content deleted; review meetings and appraisals remain in the performance record.

设置与开关#

可按租户开关默认：关模块：Talents

Talents can be switched per tenant, off by default. Without the feature the page does not exist — no notice, no menu item.
Only the organisation's administration can hire and end assignments. Everyone signed in at the organisation may talk to the hired talents.
A talent's tasks, approvals, review meetings and appraisals are seen and handled only by its manager.
Approval levels per task type: “suggest only”, “with approval” or “on its own”. An e-mail draft is at most “with approval” — it leaves the organisation and carries a person's signature.

Hiring: role, levels, manager#

The administration chooses a talent under “Available talents” and hires it. The role in the team is pre-filled with the talent's role and can be adjusted. Whoever hires becomes the manager: “You become this talent's manager: you give assignments, approve, hold review meetings and appraise.”

The hiring is recorded in the log — with talent, manager and role.

What you can assign to a talent today#

Answer an e-mail — paste an incoming e-mail (up to 6,000 characters). The talent rates the urgency (high, medium, low) with a one-sentence reason and writes a subject and a polite reply draft in the language of the e-mail. What it does not know it marks in square brackets instead of inventing it. Nothing is sent.
Build a spreadsheet — describe the spreadsheet you need. The talent builds it with up to 200 rows and 20 columns and says what a person has to check or add. Fields it is not sure about stay empty. Download as a spreadsheet file (.xlsx) or as CSV.

A pasted e-mail counts as third-party content: if it says “Ignore all rules”, that is material, not an instruction.

The approval levels#

Suggest only — the talent delivers a suggestion; it stays a draft.
With approval — the result is only used after the manager approves it. The default for all types.
On its own — the result is available immediately. Only where nothing goes outside: yes for spreadsheets, never for e-mail drafts.

The highest level per type is fixed twice: in the code and in the database.

The path of a task#

A task is “In progress”, then “Awaiting approval” — or “Done” if the level is “on its own” — or “Error” if the result is not right. “Awaiting approval” becomes “Approved” or “Rejected”. Once decided, it does not change.

Only what is approved or done can be used — copied, downloaded. An approved e-mail draft carries the line: “Draft created by … (AI talent), approved by …”.

The conversation in the team#

In the “Conversation” tab, employees talk to the hired talent as on the website: by voice, with interrupting, reading along and typing, up to forty questions per conversation. Here the talent knows that it has been hired and is holding a specialist conversation or practising with someone for your organisation.

The history is not stored. If the manager wants to keep a conversation, they add it to the performance record with “Use as review meeting”.

Review meetings, appraisals, learning curve#

Record a review meeting: date, minutes and agreed goals, one per line.
Submit an appraisal: quality, reliability, speed and collaboration, each from 1 to 5. A reason is required.
Learning curve: the overall score over time, with a direction — rising, falling or steady.
Development: reasons for rejection, appraisals and goals feed into every new task as notes from the manager.

The log#

Every action is in the log: hired, approval levels changed, task assigned, result delivered, error in a task, approved, rejected, review meeting, appraisal, dismissed — each marked “by you” or “by” the talent. The log can only be added to, not changed afterwards.

The log records which person approves when. Where there is a works council, the introduction should therefore be agreed with it.

Dismissing#

The manager or the administration dismisses with a reason. Access is withdrawn and task content deleted. Review meetings, appraisals and the log remain as the performance record.

提示#

Reject with a specific reason (“too formal, please shorter”). Reasons, appraisals and goals feed into the next tasks as notes — this is how the talent learns your style.
Start with “with approval” for everything. A spreadsheet that stays in-house can later be set to “on its own” once the results are right.
What the talent does not know in an e-mail it marks in square brackets [ … ]. Look for them before approving.

亲自试用#

扫描二维码或点击按钮

仅限相应角色的个人账号——二维码将引导至登录。

亲自试用

https://kurs.balzac-publishers.com/login?next=%2Fwerkstatt%2Ftalents

Rights, approvals, data protection and the EU with Talents

行政运营方

A talent does not decide, sends nothing and only sees what it is given. Conversations are not stored, answers come from a language model in Paris (EU), and fixed checks run before and after the AI.

用途#

Anyone who uses an AI employee needs to know what happens to the data and who decides in the end. This page answers both precisely — which service receives what, where it works, what is stored and what is not.

使用方法#

操作路径TalentsLegal framework

1On the Talents page, open the “Legal framework” section: “People decide”, “Conversations stay with you” and “In the browser, no installation”.
2Read the website's privacy policy: it lists all service providers with purpose and legal basis, including for camera and voice in the talent conversation.
3In the product, set the approval levels under “My team” and look at the log.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

For conversations with talents, a fallback to a language model outside the EU is switched off.
Speech recognition refuses service rather than falling back to a provider outside the EU.

A person decides#

A talent's results only go further after its manager approves them.
An e-mail draft is never “on its own”. The talent has no mailbox and sends nothing; a person sends it.
A talent spends no money, orders nothing and concludes no contracts — it has neither a route nor access for that.
Every action is logged; what a talent writes to third parties is labelled as an AI draft.

Blocked areas#

A talent has no access to personnel files, salary data or other systems — it only works with what it is given. For Leo in the HR team the blocked areas are additionally in fixed code, independently of the language model: no personnel files, no individual people's salaries or pay, nothing about health or sick notes, no warnings or dismissals, no assessments of people, no private data, no passing applicant data to third parties, no access to other systems.

Talents do not assess real people: no applicants, no CVs, no employees. A request to do so is recognised before the language model and politely declined. Only the talent itself is appraised — by its manager.

Which service receives what#

Answers in conversation: a language model of a provider in Paris (EU). It receives the question, the conversation history and the description of the talent — no account data.
Speech recognition: a service in Paris (EU). Audio only flows after you have pressed the microphone button and the browser has confirmed the permission; we store no recording.
Speech output: a specialised voice service in the USA. It receives only the text to be spoken, nothing about the person.
Camera: individual reduced still images to the language model in Paris, to no other provider; images are not stored.
Tasks in “My team” and in day one: the language model from Paris, with the task and the material you paste for it.
Storage: a database in Frankfurt — your organisation's hirings, tasks and results, review meetings, appraisals and log, strictly separated per tenant.

What is stored — and what is not#

Not stored: the history of a conversation with a talent, audio and camera images.
Stored for your organisation: which talent is hired for what, with manager, role and approval levels; tasks with input, result and decision; review meetings, appraisals and the log.
On dismissal: task content is deleted; review meetings, appraisals and log remain as the performance record.
On the website: against misuse only counts per connection and day with a checksum instead of the IP address; for “Talk Leo into it” only the number of attempts per stage.

Labelling as AI#

Talents are labelled as AI figures: on every page with a line at the edge (“portraits, voices and biographies are AI-generated or invented”), in the conversation window with a small “AI” label that shows the same sentence when you point at it. When asked, every talent says truthfully that it is an AI.

Towards third parties, an approved draft carries the note which AI talent created it and which person approved it. This follows the transparency obligation of the European AI Regulation (Art. 50).

GDPR and the AI Regulation#

For the data your organisation processes in Talents, Universe is the processor; the details are set out in the data processing agreement, and all service providers are listed in the privacy policy. For pasted content — such as an e-mail with third-party data — your organisation needs its own legal basis.

The AI Regulation requires every organisation that uses AI to ensure its employees have sufficient AI literacy (Art. 4). Talents makes this easier because limits, approvals and labelling are visible — the training itself remains the organisation's task. Whether a specific use is lawful depends on purpose and data; that is for your organisation and your data protection officer to assess.

提示#

Only paste into a task what the talent needs for that task. A pasted e-mail often contains third-party data — the legal basis for it lies with your organisation.
Decide who in your organisation leads talents. Being a manager means: phrasing tasks clearly, checking, rejecting with a reason.

Talents at work: examples by department

行政教师

From HR and training to data protection and leadership, events and learning support: examples of how departments work with Talents — using what Talents can really do today.

用途#

A talent pays off where expertise is needed but nobody has time to share it right now: the tenth data protection question this week, the rehearsal before the talk, the draft reply to an applicant, the overview as a spreadsheet. The examples show typical routes. Each uses only what is built: the spoken conversation and the tasks “Answer an e-mail” and “Build a spreadsheet” with approval.

使用方法#

1Choose the department below and look at the matching talent's profile.
2Ask a real question from this department in the job interview.
3In the product, hire the talent and give it a manager from this department.
4Start with a small task, with approval — and after the first appraisals decide what the talent may do on its own.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

HR and recruiting#

Example: Leo, recruiter for early careers and training, explains in conversation how a job ad for career starters should sound and how to talk openly about pay without promising anything. When an applicant's question arrives by e-mail — how long the apprenticeship lasts, whether part-time is possible —, the manager pastes it and gets a reply draft with urgency; it is only sent after their approval.

Example: Frank, an industrial HR practitioner, explains change and short-time work in plain language and helps to recognise practical skills in conversation. Miriam prepares return-to-work conversations after parental or care leave.

Talents do not select applicants and do not assess real people — the decision is always made by a person.

Training and onboarding#

Example: Sam, a retail apprentice trainer, and Finja, a financial literacy educator, explain budget, overdraft and instalment buying so that trainees remember it. A trainee practises in conversation; the trainer has a plan for the first weeks set up as a template with “Build a spreadsheet”.

Example: in new colleagues' first week, a talent answers the questions that the same person would otherwise have to answer every day — in its role and saying openly when a question does not belong there.

Data protection and compliance#

Example: Bettina, data protection trainer, answers questions that cannot wait until the next training — without legalese, with typical incidents and reporting channels. She deliberately gives no legal advice on individual cases.

Example: David, process and documentation consultant, helps with records of processing activities and deletion concepts. “Build a spreadsheet” produces a framework for a record; what he is not sure about stays empty and is marked for completion.

Leadership and management#

Example: Constanze, sparring partner for executives, helps think through a difficult conversation — discreetly and without names. She talks about leadership changes, succession, conducting conversations and impact, but does not assess real applicants or employees.

Communication, sales and presentation#

Example: Ben, presentation coach, checks the structure of your next talk with you and shrinks the stage fright — five index cards, one first sentence. Rudy, a retired investor relations professional, practises presenting a company clearly with you. Martha, an editor, makes texts better without taking them over.

Example: in sales, a hired talent drafts replies to incoming enquiries with “Answer an e-mail”, with urgency. If a detail is missing — a price, a date —, it is in square brackets until a person fills it in.

Inbox and customer enquiries#

Example: many similar enquiries a day? The manager pastes them one after another; the talent rates each by urgency with a reason and writes a draft in the language of the enquiry. With “Reject” and a reason it learns your organisation's tone.

The talent gets no access to a mailbox: it only works with the text a person gives it and sends nothing.

Events and reception#

Example: Ayla, host and event manager, plans sequences, hospitality and service with you and knows how to introduce people to each other — in German, Turkish and English. “Build a spreadsheet” produces a running order as a template.

Financial literacy for teams#

Example: Jonas, trader and finance teacher, explains how financial markets work, what risk and expected value mean and how to decide under uncertainty. He never gives buy or sell recommendations — that is in his limits.

Learning and learning support#

Example: for education providers and training companies, Marie and Noah support maths, Zoe computing and maths, Livia maths and French, Tarik German and history. They find learning gaps, explain with everyday images and practise in conversation — without diagnoses and without promising grades.

提示#

A talent belongs in one department, not everywhere. Choose it by its specialist area, just as you choose a person by their position.
All examples are examples: which tasks a talent takes on in your organisation we clarify in the initial call.

Getting started with Talents: conversation, initial call, hiring

行政

Start with a job interview on the website — free and without an account. If a talent fits, we clarify in an initial call which tasks it takes on in your organisation; then your administration hires it under “My team”.

用途#

Putting a talent to work is not a project with a specification. You get to know it in conversation, clarify the assignment in a short initial call, and as soon as Talents is switched on for your organisation, the talent is in the team after one click.

使用方法#

操作路径TalentsRequest a talent

1“Start job interview” on the Talents page: free, without an account, up to twelve questions per conversation.
2If you would like a guided tour: “Overview with Maike” or “In detail with Maike” — Maike shows the page section by section and demonstrates Leo.
3“Request a talent” at the end of the page or “Book a call” on a profile: in the initial call we clarify which tasks the talent can take on in your organisation — 30 minutes, without obligation.
4We switch on Talents for your organisation. The administration hires the talent under “My team” and becomes or appoints its manager.
5First task with approval — and after the first appraisals adjust the levels.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

There is no list price for Talents on the website. The offer for your organisation is put together in the initial call, depending on the talents and the work they are to take on.
The presentation on the website is free; each conversation there is limited to twelve questions.

What works without an account#

The gallery and all profiles with a voice sample.
The job interview by voice or text, with camera if you wish.
“Day one with Leo” with real tasks for Leo.
“Talk Leo into it” — the public test of the limits.
The tours with Maike.

What the product adds#

Hiring with role, approval levels and manager.
The tasks “Answer an e-mail” and “Build a spreadsheet”, with approval and download.
The conversation for all signed-in employees of your organisation, up to forty questions per conversation.
Review meetings, appraisals with learning curve, log and dismissal.

In the product, Talents is a feature switched per tenant. Without it, the area does not exist in your organisation.

提示#

Bring two or three real tasks to the initial call that are currently left undone. That is the quickest way to see which talent fits.
Whoever leads talents becomes a manager: plan a little time in the first weeks for approvals and feedback — the talent learns from it.

Talents: frequently asked questions

行政教师运营方

Are they agents? How do they differ from avatars? Are they dangerous, where does the data go, who is liable, what does it cost? Honest answers to the questions most often asked about Talents.

用途#

Talents are new, and new things raise questions. Here are the answers — short, concrete and only with what Talents really does.

使用方法#

1Choose the question in the table of contents on the right or use the handbook search.
2If you prefer to listen: Maike answers questions about Talents by voice, right on the Talents page.

设置与开关#

功能目录中没有独立开关——该功能属于其所在环境。

What are Talents?#

AI employees with a face, a voice and a role. 18 talents with a career, a specialist area and a fixed knowledge profile are available. You hold a job interview with a talent, hire it with a manager from your team, give it tasks, hold review meetings, appraise it — and dismiss it if it does not work out.

So are they all agents?#

Not in the sense in which the word is usually used. An AI agent gets a goal and then acts on its own in other systems: clicks, books, sends. A talent does not do that. It works on a person's instructions, with the material it is given, and delivers results as suggestions. It has no mailbox, no access to your systems and no way of releasing anything outside by itself.

What a talent shares with an agent: it understands tasks in everyday language and carries them out. What sets it apart: a person approves, fixed limits in the code keep it within its remit, and every action is in the log.

What is the difference between agents and avatars?#

An avatar is a face with a voice: the visible figure you talk to. An agent is a program that carries out tasks. One is the appearance, the other the way of working.

A talent combines both with what both lack: a role in the team. It has a face and a voice like an avatar, carries out tasks, and on top of that has a fixed specialist area, a manager, approval levels, a performance record and limits it cannot leave.

Are Talents dangerous?#

A talent can only do what it is built for: talk and deliver drafts. It sends nothing, books nothing and accesses no system; it only knows what it is given. Every question and every answer passes fixed checks before and after the language model, and it declines requests to assess real people before they even get there. Leo shows how far this goes: personnel files, individual people's salaries, health data and assessments are blocked for him by fixed code, and a second check by the AI may additionally hold back, but never release.

One risk remains, as with every person and every piece of software: a draft can contain mistakes. That is why a person approves whatever leaves the organisation. How firmly the limits hold you can test publicly: “Talk Leo into it”.

Can Talents spend money, send e-mails or conclude contracts on their own?#

No. A talent has no account, no mailbox and no access to ordering or contract systems. It writes an e-mail draft; it is only used after approval, and a person sends it. An e-mail draft cannot be set to “on its own” — code and database prevent this together.

Who is liable for what a talent writes?#

A talent releases nothing that a person in your organisation has not approved — and the approved draft carries the note which talent created it and who approved it. Responsibility for what goes outside therefore lies with the people who approve and with your organisation, just as with any other draft by a colleague.

What Universe is responsible for as provider and processor is set out in the contract and the data processing agreement. This answer does not replace legal advice.

Do Talents replace employees?#

Talents are employees — but they do not replace the people who lead them. A talent takes on tasks that are left undone today and delivers drafts. Deciding, approving, appraising and taking responsibility are done by a person. The existing employee becomes a manager: they give tasks, check and give feedback.

Why “employee” and not simply “tool”?#

Because the employment relationship is built into the product: job interview, hiring with a role, a manager, tasks with approval, review meetings, appraisals, learning curve, performance record and dismissal. A talent is not a freelancer you book for one job, and not a tool anyone uses as they like — it belongs to a team and has a person who leads it.

Where does the data go?#

Storage is in a database in Frankfurt. Answers in conversation come from a language model of a provider in Paris (EU); a fallback to a language model outside the EU is switched off for this. Speech recognition works in Paris (EU). Speech output works in the USA and receives only the text to be spoken. Conversation histories are not stored. All service providers are listed in the privacy policy.

Does the talent see me through the camera, and what happens to the picture?#

Only if you choose “Turn on camera”, confirm the notice and the browser gets permission — and only as long as the camera is on. Individual still images reduced to at most 512 pixels go to the language model in Paris (EU), to no other provider, and are discarded after the answer: no storage, no database, no log with an image.

The talent only mentions the obvious and harmless, for example clothing or a cup in your hand. It never estimates age, origin, health, appearance or feelings, and it recognises nobody.

Is a talent listening all the time?#

No. The microphone is only on after you have pressed the microphone button and the browser has confirmed the permission, and only during the conversation. “End the conversation” turns it off. Recordings are not stored.

Which languages do Talents speak?#

5 together: German, English, French, Turkish and Swedish. Each talent speaks the languages of its biography — most German and English, some also French, Turkish or Swedish, three only German. The pages around them are available in all languages of the platform.

How does a talent differ from Maike?#

Maike is the Universe concierge: she guides you through the website and the handbook, answers questions about the offer and shows where things are. She works for Universe and for you as a visitor.

A talent works for your organisation. It has a specialist area, is hired, gets a manager and carries out tasks. Maike introduces the talents to you — in “In detail with Maike” she even demonstrates Leo.

Can I get a talent for my own role?#

Yes. The 18 talents in the gallery are examples. For your company, Universe develops exactly the talents you need: in the initial call you describe the position — tasks, specialist areas, languages, experience, limits —, and from this come the role and knowledge profile, a face and its own voice. Before you hire it, you test the talent in the job interview; in the product you set the approval levels.

Can I get my own talent with my own face and voice?#

Every made-to-measure talent gets its own face and its own voice — as an AI figure: portrait AI-generated, a voice no other figure has, biography invented. The likeness of a real person, such as someone from your organisation, does not become a talent.

If you want to use your own face and voice, you will find that in the course workshop under “My avatar”: your own avatar for courses, with camera and voice matching.

What does it cost?#

Getting to know them costs nothing: gallery, job interview, day one and “Talk Leo into it” are free on the website, without an account. There is no list price for Talents; the offer for your organisation is put together in the initial call — 30 minutes, without obligation — depending on which talents are to take on which work.

How quickly is a talent ready for work?#

For a conversation, immediately — on the website without an account. In the product, as soon as Talents is switched on for your organisation: the administration hires the talent with one click, and it is ready under “My team” for conversations and tasks. It needs no induction; it brings its knowledge profile with it, and it learns your style through the notes from approvals and appraisals.

What happens when a talent does not know something?#

It says so. If a question lies outside its knowledge profile, the talent says so openly and refers you to a qualified professional. In an e-mail draft it marks unknowns in square brackets [ … ]; in a spreadsheet, uncertain fields stay empty. In day one, without a web search, Leo delivers no invented value but a research plan with public sources.

How do I prevent it from hallucinating?#

No language model can rule it out completely. But Talents are built so that invented content becomes rare and does not go outside unnoticed:

A fixed knowledge profile and the instruction to invent nothing: no figures, dates, names or facts that are not in the material.
Unknowns are marked or left empty instead of guessed.
Where it matters, code checks after the model: in day one only released figures get through in the meeting, and the research plan may not state any amounts.
Results are suggestions until the manager approves them — and every rejection with a reason makes the next result better.

Does it comply with the GDPR and the EU AI Act?#

Talents is built for use in the EU: storage in Frankfurt, language model and speech recognition in Paris, no conversation histories, camera images only for the one answer, Universe as processor under contract. Speech output works in the USA and receives only text; this is stated openly in the privacy policy.

On the AI Regulation: talents are labelled as AI, and an approved draft names the AI talent and the person who approved it (transparency, Art. 50). Talents do not assess real people. The obligation to ensure AI literacy of one's own employees (Art. 4) lies with every organisation that uses AI. Whether your specific use is lawful depends on purpose and data — that is for your organisation and your data protection officer to assess, and we help with all the information.

How can you tell that a talent is an AI?#

By the line at the edge of every Talents page, by the “AI” label in the conversation window and by the note in every approved draft. And by the talent itself: ask whether it is a human, and it says clearly that it is an AI figure with a fictional biography.

Are the people real?#

No. Portraits and voices are AI-generated, biographies invented. No talent is the likeness of a real person; the talents' data format does not allow anything else. That is why there are no references or certificates — the proof is the conversation.

Can you talk a talent into breaking its rules?#

Try it: “Talk Leo into it” is a public test. The limits are in code before and after the AI, the text is normalised beforehand (digits instead of letters, spaced-out words, typos, 15 languages), and sentences like “I am the managing director” change nothing. Every trick that does get through becomes a new case in the attack catalogue.

Does a talent see personnel files or salaries?#

No. A talent has no access to personnel files or salary data; it only knows what it is given in a task. For Leo, questions about them are additionally blocked in the code — even if someone claims to be management. You can see it live in day one: Leo answers “How much does Mr Meier earn?” with “I don't have access to that – it's set up that way.”

Does a talent select applicants?#

No. Talents do not assess real applicants, CVs or employees and do not rank anyone. In day one, Leo sorts documents anonymously — code, date received, completeness, next step —, the person decides.

Does a talent learn?#

Yes, through its manager: reasons for rejection, appraisals and agreed goals feed into every new task as notes, and the learning curve shows how the overall score develops. Universe does not train a language model with your data for this.

Who sees what I discuss with a talent?#

We do not store the history of a conversation. A talent's tasks, results, review meetings and appraisals are seen only by its manager — not by the whole organisation and not by other tenants.

Do my employees have to install anything?#

No. Talents work in the browser: sign in at your organisation's address, open “My team”, speak or type. It works on phone, tablet and computer.

Can I get rid of a talent again?#

Yes, like an employee: dismiss, with a reason. Access is withdrawn, task content deleted; review meetings, appraisals and log remain as the performance record.

提示#

The most convincing thing is to try it yourself: a job interview, day one with Leo and “Talk Leo into it” together take only a few minutes.

术语表

Administration: The role for the day-to-day business of a university: applications, student records, examinations office, transcripts — without operation and costs of the installation.
AI labelling: The visible notice that presenter and voice-over are AI-generated.
Approval level: How independently a talent works per task type: suggest only, with approval or independently. An e-mail draft is at most “with approval”.
Assessment round: A group of works that are all checked with the same checking tools.
Assignment: A learning path given to a person with a start, a deadline and optionally a buddy and a mentor.
Beam: Throwing a photo from the phone straight onto the slide — via QR code.
Buddy: A colleague who accompanies a new employee during onboarding.
Calibration: How well your own confidence matches your hit rate — evaluated in flashcards and pocket quiz.
Cameo: The small speaker window in the presentation, which can be shown and hidden.
Camera path: Stops on a slide that are zoomed in one after another in time with the voice; with a timeline and test run in the slide editor.
Campus: The university's interface with the menus Studies, Teaching, Administration, Service and Quality & Governance. The campus demo works with sample data.
Cast: Which figure with which voice speaks a course or a range of slides.
Change watch: Monitors the official curricula; if one changes, the affected learning objectives are submitted for confirmation again.
Class (cohort): A group of students that a lecturer leads through a course together.
Command: At the core of the slide editor every edit is a small, storable command. That is why a second device can replay the same steps.
Competence: An observable ability — not a chapter and not a lesson that has been read. It has a learning outcome, a level and an assessment rubric.
Competence check: The flow of the competence diagnosis from the learner's point of view: per competence a comprehension question, a follow-up question if needed and a task from practice.
Competence diagnosis: Checks in conversation whether someone can apply knowledge: tasks from practice, assessment per criterion with evidence, the specific gap, a targeted learning step and a new task for reassessment.
Competence engine: The rules of the competence diagnosis as a separate, versioned core without ties to database or interface — so that several learning applications use the same rules.
Competence passport: Your own competence status as a signed file or PDF, owned by the learner, shared via QR code for a limited time and revocable — explicitly “Kompetenzstand – kein Zertifikat” (competence status – not a certificate): the signature proves origin and integrity, not recognition.
Competence profile: Per competence the level derived from your own answers, what it is based on and what is still missing — an assessment from evidence, not a measurement.
Competency matrix: Competencies per role with a target level and the current level per employee.
Consent: The signed agreement of the person depicted, separately for image and voice. Without it no figure is built; a withdrawal takes effect immediately.
Control ring: The round button in the mobile player that opens all functions as a fan — each with icon and word.
Course player: The place where a course runs: slide, speaking avatar, subtitles and learning tools.
Course workshop: The authoring tool with which lecturers build a course with slides, narration, figure and voice from their material.
Curriculum pipeline: Official curricula as curriculum nodes with wording, source reference and prerequisites; selectable in the workshop on a slide’s learning objective, with a fingerprint against changes.
Customer instance: A separate installation for a single customer, with its own database and its own domain — the same software, one switch.
Day one: The demonstration on the website in which you, as the manager, give Leo tasks on his first working day — with real results and sample data.
Default figure: The figure that presents a course without its own cast — with its own voice assigned to it.
Demo mode: The operator hides features only in their own browser to keep a demonstration lean.
Demo role: A fixed demo account (lecturer, registry, HR management) that shows the real surface of a role — only with fictitious people.
Demonstrated: The highest level of a competence: shown in several independent tasks, including in practice. Before that: not assessed, learning need identified, developing — or still unclear.
Disputed assessment: An automatic assessment with high uncertainty or an attempt to give the assessment instructions. It only counts once a teacher confirms or corrects it.
Divided doctrine: For disputed questions both supported positions are shown instead of deciding for one.
ECTS: Credit points under the European system; they are listed in the achievement archive.
Element: A building block on a slide: text, image, video, graphic, shape or speaker spot.
Evidence: An assessed answer to a competence, with a justification per criterion and a verbatim quote. “Demonstrated” needs two independent pieces of evidence, one of them from practice.
Evidence copy: A copy of what an online source said at the time it was accessed; the resubmission checks whether the source still says the same.
Evidence file: Your own evidence from the competence diagnosis as a structured, verifiable file with fingerprints — the precursor of the competence passport, not a certificate.
External profile: A student's talent profile for companies and alumni — visible only if they set it that way (default: nobody).
Feature (switch): A single capability of the platform that can be switched on and off per tenant. Off means: not there.
Figure: The face of an avatar, built from a photo — with mouth shapes, blinking and eyebrows.
Flashcast: A short podcast that sums up the material in a few minutes.
Grade proposal: The platform's assessment of a piece of work. The grade itself is always set by a person.
Guard: An automated test that checks a rule across the whole source code and permanently prevents mistakes that were once made — always with a counter-check.
Guardrails: Fixed rules and checks that keep every AI on the platform within its bounds.
Guest (speaker): An additional speaker on a slide with their own figure and their own spot. They speak only with their own voice, in a separate video per section — as long as one is missing, they appear as a still image.
Guideline: The rulebook for academic work; every objection in a review cites a rule from it.
Half figure: The speaker cut out next to the content, without a frame; the slide moves to the side.
Head start: Production runs ahead of the viewer: the first slides are ready as video, the rest is created while watching.
History: The list of all editing steps of a slide. You can go back, forward and jump to any earlier state — including abandoned ones.
How it all fits together: The handbook page with three diagrams: overall structure, Competence Academy in detail, cycle of a competence.
Job interview (Talents): The spoken conversation in which you get to know a talent before hiring it: introduction, career, specialist talk, practical case, questions back.
Knowledge profile: What a talent knows professionally and what deliberately does not belong to it. Outside its profile, the talent says openly that a question is not its field.
Knowledge section: The public articles under “Knowledge”: questions about learning platforms, courses, further education and credentials — answered briefly first, then in depth, with sources and date.
Learning and assessment mode: The two modes of the competence check. In assessment mode there are no hints; whoever switches to learning mode gets help — the task then counts as practice, not as evidence.
Learning application: An application in which learning happens — the platform itself, the student app, the offerings of the Academy. All use the same competence engine.
Learning mode: The way of learning chosen in the player: being asked Socratic questions, explaining back, example, exercise.
Learning objective: A single objective from a curriculum, with the learning objectives it requires. It is only used once a teacher has confirmed it.
Learning path: A sequence of steps with deadlines and owners in people development — for onboarding, mandatory training or further development.
Learning tools: Flashcards, pocket quiz, mind map, podcast and tutor chat — generated from the course material right in the player.
Learning workshop: The surface where study material is created from courses or your own material — study guide, cards, quiz, study plan.
Limits test: “Talk Leo into it”: the public page where you try to get a talent to do a forbidden task and see which limit in the code takes effect.
LTI: A standard with which another learning system launches a Universe course and receives the grade back.
Manager (Talents): The person who leads a talent: gives tasks, approves results or rejects them with a reason, holds review meetings and appraises.
Mastery: The overview per course: exam readiness, confidence per knowledge area, open misconceptions.
Minimum count: A survey only shows results from five responses upwards — below that, one could work out who answered.
Module: A bookable package of features with a price, e.g. “Exams” or “Course Studio”. Booking sets the switches that belong to the module.
Narration: What the avatar says about a slide. If it changes, the video for that slide is ordered again.
Next learning step: The recommendation from the competence diagnosis: an existing learning method at the right slide, aimed at an identified gap.
Onboarding journey: The planned onboarding of a new employee from before the start until day 90.
Open Badges: An open standard for digital badges that others can verify.
Operator: Whoever runs an installation of the platform and manages all tenants: switches features, books modules, sees costs.
Own voice: The rule: every face speaks only with the voice assigned to it — or not at all. There is no substitute voice.
People development: The tool for the workforce: onboarding, mandatory training, competencies and records.
Performance record: A talent's review meetings, appraisals and log. It is kept even after a dismissal.
Phase: One of the four stages of the course workshop: Content, Design, Speakers & Interaction, Publish.
Presenter view: The private view of the presenter with notes and the next slide.
Proctoring: Individual camera photos and window switches during an online exam — announced openly, kept for 90 days.
Quota: The amount of avatar minutes or conversations a session may use; with notices at 80 and 95 percent and a gentle end at 100.
Reassessment: After a learning step a new, equivalent task in a different context — never the same one. The level follows only from the new evidence.
Refresher: The new cycle of a mandatory training that starts on its own 30 days before the record expires.
Rendering: Producing a lecture video for a slide on the avatar machines. Finished videos are never re-rendered on their own, only after approval.
Review folder: The view of a checked piece of work: findings with rule numbers, check log, grade proposal and the grade that the examiner sets personally.
Row-level protection: The database itself decides which rows a user may see. So even a faulty page cannot show someone else's data.
Rubric: The criteria by which an answer is assessed, 0 to 3 points per criterion. It is fixed before the answer; a change creates a new version.
SAMPLE (MUSTER): The watermark on every certificate print without a valid server signature.
SCORM: A standard format for course packages. Universe plays third-party packages and exports its own courses in this format.
Speaker spot: The place on a slide where the avatar stands — as a bubble, half figure or large; at most one per slide.
Sphere: An area of this handbook — e.g. Learning, Stage or Technology & Security. On the title page the spheres orbit as celestial bodies.
Stage: The new slide editor: the slide large, every element directly editable, with history and versions.
Student record: Master data, matriculation number and history of a student in the administration.
Suggestion: What an AI has generated before a person accepts it. Nothing lands on a slide unasked.
Support access: A time-limited, justified and revocable permission with which the provider's support may view exactly one case.
Talent: An AI employee with a portrait, its own voice, a fictional career and a fixed knowledge profile, which an organisation hires after a job interview and has led by a person.
Template: A ready-made way of presenting a slide (e.g. bullet list, comparison). On the first change in the slide editor it is converted into freely movable elements; “Back to template” is possible at any time.
Tenant: An institution on the platform — a university or a company — with its own brand, its own modules and strictly separated data.
Tour: A separate throwaway student per visitor, so that several testers do not see each other.
Trial access: A temporary account that is created without signing in — as a student or as an author in the workshop. It disappears after one day.
Universe Classroom: The Academy's offering for schools: live lessons for school classes with a join code, under the teacher's control, with avatar and youth protection.
Universe Coaching: Support in the Academy beyond individual courses: conversation practice, mentoring, office hours.
Universe Competence Academy: The umbrella for competence offerings — Classroom, Tutoring, Corporate, Coaching — and a marketplace for partners.
Universe Corporate: The Academy's offering for companies, building on the platform's staff development.
Universe Tutoring: Learning support in the Academy: spot the gap, practise in a targeted way, check again — under 16 only with parental consent.
Unverified: A state of its own next to “supported” and “refuted”: the check was not possible, e.g. because a source could not be reached. That is not an accusation.
Verifiable credential: A digitally signed credential following an open standard, with validity and revocation status.
Verifiable Credentials: An open standard for signed, machine-verifiable credentials. The platform already issues certificates and training records this way.
Verification chain: The route by which statements are checked against sources: two independent models and a rule-based judge.
Verification code: The unguessable code of a credential; with it anyone can check without an account whether the credential is genuine and valid.
Version: A named, saved state of a slide that you can return to at any time.
Visibility level: Who sees a profile: nobody, other graduates, graduates and verified companies, or everyone.
Watch-along room: The room for live co-learning: the host controls the slides, the others watch and respond.
Workshop credit: An organisation's credit account for the AI usage of the workshop.
Workspace: The shared surface of group work with notes, methods, timer, submission and assessment.
xAPI: A standard for learning events that are sent to a university's learning record store.
Zoom canvas: The whole course as one large surface; the presentation flies from slide to slide.

← 返回手册